68012007023-FP Enus MOTOTRBO DP4600 DP4600e DP4601 DP4601e LIMITED KEYPAD PORTABLE RADIO USER GUIDE

PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO
MOTOTRBO™
DP4600/DP4600e, DP4601/DP4601e
LIMITED KEYPAD PORTABLE RADIO
USER GUIDE
en-US
FEBRUARY 2021
© 2021 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. @68012007023@
68012007023-FP
English
Contents 2.7 Removing the Universal Connector Cover

(Dust Cover)...................................................... 42
2.8 Turning the Radio On.................................. 43
Important Safety Information........................................ 28
2.9 Turning the Radio Off.................................. 43
Software Version.......................................................... 29
2.10 Adjusting the Volume.................................43
Copyrights.................................................................... 30
Chapter 3: Radio Controls..........................................45
Computer Software Copyrights.................................... 32
3.1 Using the 4–Way Navigation Button............46
Radio Care................................................................... 33
Chapter 4: WAVE....................................................... 47
Chapter 1: Introduction...............................................35
4.1 WAVE OnCloud/OnPremise........................47
1.1 Icon Information...........................................35
4.1.1 Switching from Radio Mode to
1.2 Conventional Analog and Digital Modes......35
WAVE Mode........................................... 47
1.3 IP Site Connect............................................36
4.1.2 Making WAVE Group Calls............48
1.4 Capacity Plus...............................................37
4.1.3 Receiving and Responding to
1.4.1 Capacity Plus–Single-Site............. 37 WAVE Group Calls................................. 48
1.4.2 Capacity Plus–Multi-Site ............... 37 4.1.4 Receiving and Responding to
Chapter 2: Getting Started......................................... 39 WAVE Private Calls................................ 49
2.1 Charging the Battery....................................39 4.1.5 Switching from WAVE Mode to
2.2 Attaching the Battery................................... 39 Radio Mode ........................................... 49
2.3 Attaching the Antenna................................. 40 Part I: Capacity Max................................................... 50
2.4 Attaching the Carry Holster......................... 41 5.1 Push-To-Talk Button....................................50
2.5 Attaching the Universal Connector Cover... 41 5.2 Programmable Buttons................................50
2.6 Cleaning the Universal Connector Cover.... 42 5.2.1 Assignable Radio Functions.......... 50
2
English
5.2.2 Assignable Settings or Utility 5.6.1.2 Making Group Calls by

Functions................................................ 53 Using the Contacts List................ 68
5.2.3 Accessing Programmed 5.6.1.3 Responding to Group
Functions................................................ 53 Calls............................................. 69
5.3 Status Indicators..........................................53 5.6.2 Broadcast Call .............................. 70
5.3.1 Icons.............................................. 54 5.6.2.1 Making Broadcast Calls .. 70
5.3.2 LED Indicator................................. 60 5.6.2.2 Making Broadcast Calls
5.3.3 Tones.............................................61 Using the Contact List ................. 71
5.3.3.1 Audio Tones.....................61 5.6.2.3 Receiving Broadcast
Calls ............................................ 71
5.3.3.2 Indicator Tones................ 61
5.6.3 Private Call.................................... 72
5.4 Registration................................................. 62
5.6.3.1 Making Private Calls........ 72
5.5 Zone and Channel Selections..................... 63
5.6.3.2 Making a Private Call
5.5.1 Selecting Zones ............................ 63
with a One Touch Call Button ..... 73
5.5.2 Selecting a Call Type.....................64
5.6.3.3 Making Private Calls by
5.5.3 Selecting a Site..............................64 Using the Manual Dial.................. 74
5.5.4 Roam Request...............................65 5.6.3.4 Receiving Private Calls.... 75
5.5.5 Site Lock On/Off............................ 65 5.6.3.5 Accepting Private Calls ... 75
5.5.6 Site Restriction...............................65 5.6.3.6 Declining Private Calls .... 76
5.5.7 Site Trunking .................................66 5.6.4 All Calls .........................................76
5.6 Calls.............................................................66 5.6.4.1 Making All Calls .............. 77
5.6.1 Group Calls....................................67 5.6.4.2 Receiving All Calls .......... 77
5.6.1.1 Making Group Calls......... 67 5.6.5 Phone Calls................................... 78
3
English
5.6.5.1 Making Phone Calls......... 78 5.7.4 Receive Group List........................ 89

5.6.5.2 Making Phone Calls with 5.7.5 Priority Monitor...............................90
the Programmable Button .......78 5.7.5.1 Editing Priority for a
5.6.5.3 Making Phone Calls by Talkgroup..................................... 91
Using the Contacts List ............... 80 5.7.6 Multi-Talkgroup Affiliation.............. 91
5.6.5.4 Making Phone Calls by 5.7.6.1 Adding Talkgroup
Using the Manual Dial.................. 82 Affiliation...................................... 92
5.6.5.5 Responding to Phone 5.7.6.2 Removing Talkgroup
Calls as All Calls.......................... 83 Affiliation...................................... 93
5.6.5.6 Responding to Phone 5.7.7 Talkback ....................................... 93
Calls as Group Calls.................... 84 5.7.8 Bluetooth®..................................... 94
5.6.5.7 Responding to Phone 5.7.8.1 Turning Bluetooth On
Calls as Private Calls................... 85 and Off......................................... 95
5.6.6 Initiating Transmit Interrupt............ 85 5.7.8.2 Connecting to Bluetooth
5.6.7 Call Preemption............................. 86 Devices........................................ 95
5.6.8 Voice Interrupt............................... 86 5.7.8.3 Connecting to Bluetooth
5.6.8.1 Enabling Voice Interrupt...86 Devices in Discoverable Mode.....96
5.7 Advanced Features..................................... 87 5.7.8.4 Disconnecting from
5.7.1 Call Queue.....................................87 Bluetooth Devices........................ 97
5.7.2 Priority Call.................................... 88 5.7.8.5 Switching Audio Route
between Internal Radio Speaker
5.7.3 Talkgroup Scan .............................88 and Bluetooth Device...................97
5.7.3.1 Turning Talkgroup Scan 5.7.8.6 Viewing Device Details.... 98
On or Off...................................... 89
4
English
5.7.8.7 Deleting Device Name..... 98 5.7.12.1 Initiating Remote

5.7.8.8 Adjusting Bluetooth Mic Monitor....................................... 105
Gain Values................................. 99 5.7.12.2 Initiating Remote
5.7.8.9 Permanent Bluetooth Monitor by Using the Contacts
Discoverable Mode...................... 99 List ............................................ 106
5.7.9 Indoor Location............................ 100 5.7.12.3 Initiating Remote
Monitors by Using the Manual
5.7.9.1 Turning Indoor Location
Dial.............................................107
On or Off.................................... 100
5.7.13 Contacts Settings.......................108
5.7.9.2 Accessing Indoor
Location Beacons Information... 101 5.7.13.1 Assigning Entries to
Programmable Number Keys ....108
5.7.10 Multi-Site Controls..................... 102
5.7.13.2 Removing Associations
5.7.10.1 Enabling Manual Site
Between Entries and
Search........................................102
Programmable Number Keys ....109
5.7.10.2 Site Lock On/Off...........103
5.7.13.3 Adding New Contacts . 110
5.7.10.3 Accessing Neighbor
5.7.14 Call Indicator Settings................111
Sites List.................................... 103
5.7.14.1 Activating or
5.7.11 Home Channel Reminder.......... 104
Deactivating Call Ringers for
5.7.11.1 Muting the Home Private Calls............................... 111
Channel Reminder..................... 104
5.7.11.2 Setting New Home Deactivating Call Ringers for
Channels....................................104 Text Messages ..........................112
5.7.12 Remote Monitor......................... 105
5
English
5.7.14.3 Activating or 5.7.16.2 Making Call Alerts by

Deactivating Call Ringers for Using the Contacts List.............. 121
Call Alerts...................................113 5.7.16.3 Responding to Call
5.7.14.4 Activating or Alerts .........................................121
Deactivating Call Ringers for 5.7.17 Dynamic Caller Alias..................122
Telemetry Status with Text........ 113
5.7.17.1 Viewing the Caller
5.7.14.5 Assigning Ring Styles.. 114 Aliases List.................................122
5.7.14.6 Selecting a Ring Alert 5.7.17.2 Initiating Private Call
Type........................................... 115 From the Caller Aliases List....... 123
5.7.14.7 Configuring Vibrate 5.7.18 Mute Mode.................................123
Style........................................... 116
5.7.18.1 Turning On Mute Mode 123
5.7.14.8 Escalating Alarm Tone
5.7.18.2 Setting Mute Mode
Volume.......................................117
Timer.......................................... 124
5.7.15 Call Log Features ..................... 117
5.7.18.3 Exiting Mute Mode....... 125
5.7.15.1 Viewing Recent Calls... 117
5.7.19 Emergency Operation................125
5.7.15.2 Storing Aliases or IDs
5.7.19.1 Sending Emergency
from the Call List........................ 118
Alarms........................................ 127
5.7.15.3 Deleting Calls from the
Call List...................................... 118
Alarms with Call......................... 128
5.7.15.4 Viewing Details from
the Call List................................ 119
Alarms with Voice to Follow....... 129
5.7.16 Call Alert Operation................... 120
5.7.19.4 Receiving Emergency
5.7.16.1 Making Call Alerts........ 120 Alarms ....................................... 131
6
English
5.7.19.5 Responding to 5.7.20.1.8 Deleting All

Emergency Alarms ....................131 Text Messages from the
5.7.19.6 Responding to Inbox............................... 139
Emergency Alarms with Call...... 132 5.7.20.1.9 Deleting
5.7.19.7 Exiting Emergency Saved Text Messages
Mode.......................................... 133 from the Drafts Folder..... 139
5.7.20 Text Messaging ........................ 134 5.7.20.2 Sent Text Messages.... 140
5.7.20.1 Text Messages.............134 5.7.20.2.1 Viewing Sent
Text Messages................ 140
5.7.20.1.1 Viewing Text
Messages........................ 134 5.7.20.2.2 Sending Sent
Text Messages................ 141
5.7.20.1.2 Viewing
Telemetry Status Text 5.7.20.2.3 Deleting All
Messages........................ 135 Sent Text Messages from
the Sent Items Folder ..... 142
5.7.20.1.3 Viewing Saved
Text Messages................ 135 5.7.20.3 Quick Text Messages . 142
5.7.20.1.4 Responding to 5.7.20.3.1 Sending Quick
Text Messages................ 136 Text Messages ............... 142
5.7.20.1.5 Responding to 5.7.21 Privacy....................................... 143
Text Messages with 5.7.21.1 Status Message........... 144
Quick Text....................... 137 5.7.21.1.1 Sending
5.7.20.1.6 Forwarding Status Messages.............144
Text Messages................ 138 5.7.21.1.2 Sending
5.7.20.1.7 Resending Status Message by Using
Text Messages................ 138 Programmable Button..... 145
7
English
5.7.21.1.3 Sending a 5.7.23.3 Stunning a Radio by

Status Message by Using Using the Manual Dial................ 153
the Contacts List............. 145 5.7.23.4 Reviving a Radio.......... 153
5.7.21.1.4 Sending 5.7.23.5 Reviving a Radio by
Status Message by Using Using the Contacts List.............. 154
Manual Dial..................... 146
5.7.23.6 Reviving a Radio by
5.7.21.1.5 Viewing Status Using the Manual Dial................ 155
Messages........................ 147
5.7.24 Radio Kill....................................155
5.7.21.1.6 Responding to
5.7.25 Lone Worker.............................. 156
Status Messages.............148
5.7.26 Password Lock.......................... 156
5.7.21.1.7 Deleting a
Status Message.............. 149 5.7.26.1 Accessing the Radio by
Using Password......................... 156
5.7.21.1.8 Deleting All
Status Messages ............149 5.7.26.2 Turning Password Lock
On or Off.................................... 157
5.7.21.2 Turning Privacy On or
Off.............................................. 150 5.7.26.3 Unlocking Radios in
Locked State.............................. 158
5.7.22 Response Inhibit........................ 150
5.7.26.4 Changing Passwords... 158
5.7.22.1 Turning Response
Inhibit On or Off..........................151 5.7.27 Notification List ......................... 159
5.7.23 Stun/Revive............................... 151 5.7.27.1 Accessing Notification
List ............................................ 160
5.7.23.1 Stunning a Radio......... 151
5.7.28 Over-the-Air Programming ........160
5.7.23.2 Stunning a Radio by
Using the Contacts List ............. 152 5.7.29 Received Signal Strength
Indicator................................................ 161
8
English
5.7.29.1 Viewing RSSI Values... 161 5.7.31.8 Viewing Details of

5.7.30 Front Panel Programming..........161 Network Access Points.............. 168
5.7.30.1 Entering Front Panel 5.7.31.9 Removing Network
Programming Mode................... 162 Access Points............................ 169
5.7.30.2 Editing Mode 5.8 Utilities....................................................... 170
Parameters................................ 162 5.8.1 Keypad Lock Options...................170
5.7.31 Wi-Fi Operation..........................162 5.8.1.1 Enabling the Keypad
5.7.31.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off163 Lock Option................................170
5.7.31.2 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off 5.8.1.2 Disabling the Keypad
Remotely by Using a Lock Option................................170
Designated Radio (Individual 5.8.2 Identifying Cable Type................. 171
Control)...................................... 164 5.8.3 Setting Menu Timer..................... 171
5.7.31.3 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off 5.8.4 Text-to-Speech............................ 172
Remotely by Using a
5.8.4.1 Setting Text-to-Speech.. 172
Designated Radio (Group
Control)...................................... 164 5.8.5 Turning the Acoustic Feedback
Suppressor Feature On or Off.............. 173
5.7.31.4 Connecting to a
Network Access Point................ 165 5.8.6 Turning Global Navigation
Satellite System On or Off.................... 174
5.7.31.5 Checking Wi-Fi
Connection Status......................166 5.8.7 Turning Introduction Screen On
or Off.....................................................174
5.7.31.6 Refreshing the Network
List............................................. 167 5.8.8 Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or
Off......................................................... 175
5.7.31.7 Adding a Network.........167
9
English
5.8.9 Setting Tones/Alerts Volume 5.8.22 Switching Audio Route between

Offset Levels.........................................176 Internal Radio Speaker and Wired
5.8.10 Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Accessory............................................. 184
Off......................................................... 177 5.8.23 Turning Intelligent Audio On or
5.8.11 Turning Power Up Tone On or Off......................................................... 185
Off......................................................... 177 5.8.24 Turning Trill Enhancement On
5.8.12 Setting Text Message Alert or Off.....................................................185
Tones....................................................178 5.8.25 Turning the Microphone
5.8.13 Power Levels............................. 179 Dynamic Distortion Control Feature On
or Off.....................................................186
5.8.13.1 Setting Power Levels... 179
5.8.26 Setting Audio Ambience............ 187
5.8.14 Adjusting Display Brightness..... 180
5.8.27 Setting Audio Profiles................ 187
5.8.15 Setting Display Backlight Timer. 180
5.8.28 General Radio Information ........188
5.8.16 Turning Backlight Auto On or
Off......................................................... 181 5.8.28.1 Accessing Battery
Information ................................ 189
5.8.17 Turning LED Indicators On or
Off......................................................... 181 5.8.28.2 Checking Radio Alias
and ID ....................................... 189
5.8.18 Setting Languages.....................182
5.8.28.3 Checking Firmware and
5.8.19 Turning Option Board On or Off.182
Codeplug Versions.....................190
5.8.20 Turning Voice Announcement
5.8.28.4 Checking GNSS
On or Off .............................................. 183
Information................................. 190
5.8.21 Turning Digital Microphone AGC
5.8.28.5 Checking Software
On or Off .............................................. 183
Update Information.................... 191
10
English
5.8.28.6 Displaying Site 6.1.4 Switching Between Connect Plus

Information................................. 192 and Non-Connect Plus Modes..............203
5.8.29 Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi 6.2 Making and Receiving Calls in Connect
Certificate Details..................................192 Plus Mode........................................................203
Part II: Connect Plus................................................ 193 6.2.1 Selecting a Site............................203
6.1 Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus 6.2.1.1 Roam Request............... 203
Mode................................................................193 6.2.1.2 Site Lock On/Off.............204
6.1.1 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button..........193 6.2.1.3 Site Restriction............... 204
6.1.2 Programmable Buttons................ 193 6.2.2 Selecting a Zone..........................204
6.1.2.1 Assignable Radio 6.2.3 Using Multiple Networks.............. 205
Functions................................... 194
6.2.4 Selecting a Call Type...................206
6.1.2.2 Assignable Settings or
6.2.5 Receiving and Responding to a
Utility Functions..........................196
Radio Call............................................. 206
6.1.3 Identifying Status Indicators in
6.2.5.1 Receiving and
Connect Plus Mode.............................. 196
Responding to a Group Call.......207
6.1.3.1 Display Icons..................196
6.2.5.2 Receiving and
6.1.3.2 Call Icons....................... 199 Responding to a Private Call..... 207
6.1.3.3 Advanced Menu Icons... 200 6.2.5.3 Receiving a Site All Call. 208
6.1.3.4 Sent Item Icons ............. 200 6.2.5.4 Receiving an Inbound
6.1.3.5 Bluetooth Device Icons.. 201 Private Phone Call..................... 209
6.1.3.6 LED Indicator................. 201 6.2.5.5 Receiving an Inbound
6.1.3.7 Indicator Tones.............. 202 Phone Talkgroup Call................ 209
6.1.3.8 Alert Tones.....................202
11
English
6.2.5.6 Inbound Phone Multi- 6.3.2.1 Indications of Auto

Group Call.................................. 209 Fallback Mode............................215
6.2.6 Making a Radio Call.....................209 6.3.2.2 Making/Receiving Calls
6.2.6.1 Making a Call with the in Fallback Mode........................ 216
Channel Selector Knob.............. 210 6.3.2.3 Returning to Normal
6.2.6.1.1 Making a Group Operation................................... 217
Call.................................. 210 6.3.3 Radio Check................................ 217
6.2.6.1.2 Making a 6.3.3.1 Sending a Radio Check. 217
Private Call...................... 211 6.3.4 Remote Monitor........................... 218
6.2.6.1.3 Making a Site 6.3.4.1 Initiating Remote Monitor
All Call............................. 212 ................................................... 219
6.2.6.1.4 Making a Multi- 6.3.5 Scan.............................................220
group Call........................ 212
6.3.5.1 Starting and Stopping
6.2.6.1.5 Making a Scan...........................................220
Private Call with a One
6.3.5.2 Responding to a
Touch Call Button............213
Transmission During a Scan...... 221
6.3 Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
6.3.6 User Configurable Scan...............221
.........................................................................213
6.3.7 Editing the Scan List.................... 222
6.3.1 Home Channel Reminder............ 213
6.3.8 Add or Delete a Group via the
6.3.1.1 Muting the Home
Add Members Menu............................. 223
6.3.9 Understanding Scan Operation... 225
6.3.1.2 Setting a New Home
Channel......................................214 6.3.10 Scan Talkback........................... 226
6.3.2 Auto Fallback............................... 215 6.3.11 Editing Priority for a Talkgroup.. 226
12
English
6.3.12 Contacts Settings.......................227 6.3.14.2 Deleting a Call from a

6.3.12.1 Making a Private Call Call List...................................... 235
from Contacts.............................228 6.3.14.3 Viewing Details from a
6.3.12.2 Making a Call Alias Call List...................................... 235
Search........................................229 6.3.15 Call Alert Operation................... 236
6.3.13 Call Indicator Settings................230 6.3.15.1 Responding to Call
6.3.13.1 Activating and Alerts .........................................236
Deactivating Call Ringers for 6.3.15.2 Making a Call Alert
Call Alert.................................... 230 from the Contact List.................. 237
6.3.13.2 Activating and 6.3.15.3 Making a Call Alert with
Deactivating Call Ringers for the One Touch Access Button... 237
Private Calls............................... 231 6.3.16 Mute Mode.................................238
6.3.13.3 Activating and 6.3.16.1 Turning On Mute Mode 238
Deactivating Call Ringers for
6.3.16.2 Setting Mute Mode
Text Message............................ 231
Timer.......................................... 239
6.3.13.4 Selecting a Ring Alert
6.3.16.3 Exiting Mute Mode....... 239
Type........................................... 232
6.3.17 Emergency Operation................240
6.3.13.5 Configuring Vibrate
Style........................................... 233 6.3.17.1 Receiving an Incoming
Emergency.................................242
6.3.13.6 Escalating Alarm Tone
Volume.......................................234 6.3.17.2 Saving the Emergency
Details to the Alarm List............. 242
6.3.14 Call Log......................................234
6.3.17.3 Deleting the
Emergency Details..................... 243
13
English
6.3.17.4 Responding to an 6.3.20 Text Messaging ........................ 252

Emergency Call..........................243 6.3.20.1 Sending a Quick Text
6.3.17.5 Responding to an Message.................................... 253
Emergency Alert........................ 244 6.3.20.2 Sending Quick Text
6.3.17.6 Ignore Emergency Messages with the One Touch
Revert Call................................. 244 Access Button............................ 254
6.3.17.7 Initiating an Emergency 6.3.20.3 Managing Fail-to-Send
Call.............................................245 Text Messages...........................254
6.3.17.8 Initiating an Emergency 6.3.20.3.1 Resending a
Call with Voice to Follow............ 245 Text Message..................254
6.3.17.9 Initiating an Emergency 6.3.20.3.2 Forwarding a
Alert............................................246 Text Message..................255
6.3.17.10 Exiting Emergency 6.3.20.4 Managing Sent Text
Mode.......................................... 246 Messages...................................255
6.3.18 Man Down Alarms..................... 247 6.3.20.4.1 Viewing a Sent
6.3.18.1 Turning Man Down Text Message..................255
Alarms On and Off..................... 248 6.3.20.4.2 Sending a
6.3.18.2 Resetting the Man Sent Text Message......... 256
Down Alarms..............................249 6.3.20.4.3 Deleting All
6.3.19 Beacon Feature......................... 250 Sent Text Messages from
Sent Items....................... 257
6.3.19.1 Turning Beacon On
and Off....................................... 251 6.3.20.5 Receiving a Text
Message.................................... 258
6.3.19.2 Resetting the Beacon...252
14
English
6.3.20.6 Reading a Text 6.3.23.3 Unlocking the Radio

Message.................................... 259 from Locked State...................... 267
6.3.20.7 Managing Received 6.3.23.4 Changing the
Text Messages...........................259 Password................................... 267
6.3.20.7.1 Viewing a Text 6.3.24 Bluetooth Operation...................269
Message from the Inbox..259 6.3.24.1 Turning Bluetooth On
6.3.20.7.2 Deleting a Text and Off....................................... 269
Message from the Inbox..260 6.3.24.2 Finding and Connecting
6.3.20.7.3 Deleting All to a Bluetooth Device.................270
Text Messages from the 6.3.24.3 Finding and Connecting
Inbox............................... 261 from a Bluetooth Device
6.3.21 Privacy....................................... 261 (Discoverable Mode).................. 271
6.3.21.1 Making a Privacy- 6.3.24.4 Disconnecting from a
Enabled (Scrambled) Call.......... 263 Bluetooth Device........................271
6.3.22 Security......................................263 6.3.24.5 Switching Audio Route
6.3.22.1 Radio Disable...............263 between Internal Radio Speaker
and Bluetooth Device.................272
6.3.22.2 Radio Enable............... 264
6.3.24.6 Viewing Device Details 272
6.3.23 Password Lock Features........... 266
6.3.24.7 Deleting Device Name. 273
6.3.23.1 Accessing the Radio
from Password........................... 266 6.3.24.8 Bluetooth Mic Gain.......273
6.3.23.2 Turning the Password 6.3.24.9 Permanent Bluetooth
Lock On or Off............................266 Discoverable Mode.................... 274
6.3.25 Indoor Location.......................... 274
15
English
6.3.25.1 Turning Indoor Location 6.3.27.8 Viewing Details of

On or Off.................................... 275 Network Access Points.............. 283
6.3.25.2 Accessing Indoor 6.3.27.9 Removing Network
Location Beacons Information... 276 Access Points............................ 284
6.3.26 Notification List.......................... 277 6.4 Utilities....................................................... 285
6.3.26.1 Accessing the 6.4.1 Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts
Notification List...........................277 On or Off............................................... 285
6.3.27 Wi-Fi Operation..........................277 6.4.2 Setting the Tone Alert Volume
6.3.27.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off278 Offset Level...........................................286
6.3.27.2 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off 6.4.3 Turning the Talk Permit Tone On
Remotely by Using a or Off.....................................................287
Designated Radio (Individual 6.4.4 Turning the Power Up Alert Tone
Control)...................................... 279 On or Off............................................... 287
6.3.27.3 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off 6.4.5 Setting the Power Level...............288
Remotely by Using a 6.4.6 Adjusting the Display Brightness. 289
6.4.7 Setting the Display Backlight
Control)...................................... 279
Timer.....................................................290
6.4.8 Turning the Introduction Screen
Network Access Point................ 280
On or Off............................................... 290
6.4.9 Language.....................................291
Connection Status......................281
6.4.10 Turning the LED Indicator On or
6.3.27.6 Refreshing the Network
Off......................................................... 292
List............................................. 282
6.4.11 Identifying Cable Type............... 292
6.3.27.7 Adding a Network.........282
16
English
6.4.12 Voice Announcement.................293 6.4.20.5 Displaying the Site ID

6.4.13 Setting the Text-to-Speech (Site Number).............................303
Feature................................................. 293 6.4.20.6 Checking the Site Info..303
6.4.14 Menu Timer................................294 6.4.20.7 Checking the Radio ID. 304
6.4.15 Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D).... 295 6.4.20.8 Checking the Firmware
6.4.16 Intelligent Audio......................... 296 Version and Codeplug Version.. 305
6.4.17 Turning the Acoustic Feedback 6.4.20.9 Checking for Updates.. 305
Suppressor Feature On or Off.............. 297 6.4.20.9.1 Firmware File. 307
6.4.18 Turning the Microphone 6.4.20.9.2 Pending
Dynamic Distortion Control Feature On Firmware – Version......... 307
or Off.....................................................298 6.4.20.9.3 Pending
6.4.19 Turning GNSS On or Off............299 Firmware – % Received.. 308
6.4.20 Accessing General Radio 6.4.20.9.4 Pending
Information............................................299 Firmware – Download..... 309
6.4.20.1 Accessing the Battery 6.4.20.9.5 Frequency File
Information................................. 300 ........................................ 310
6.4.20.2 Checking the Degree of 6.4.20.9.6 Checking the
Tilt (Accelerometer)....................301 GNSS Information........... 313
6.4.20.3 Checking the Radio 6.4.21 Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi
Model Number Index..................302 Certificate Details..................................313
6.4.20.4 Checking the CRC of Part III: Other Systems............................................. 315
the Option Board OTA Codeplug 7.1 Push-To-Talk Button..................................315
File............................................. 302
7.2 Programmable Buttons..............................315
17
English
7.2.1 Assignable Radio Functions........ 315 7.5.2.1 Making Private Calls . 333
7.2.2 Assignable Settings or Utility 7.5.2.2 Making Private Calls by
Functions.............................................. 318 Using the Contacts List .........333
7.2.3 Accessing Programmed 7.5.2.3 Responding to Private
Functions.............................................. 318 Calls ......................................334
7.3 Status Indicators........................................319 7.5.3 All Calls........................................335
7.3.1 Icons............................................ 319 7.5.3.1 Making All Calls............. 335
7.3.2 LED Indicators ............................ 326 7.5.3.2 Receiving All Calls......... 335
7.3.3 Tones...........................................327
7.5.4 Selective Calls ........................ 336
7.3.3.1 Indicator Tones.............. 327
7.5.4.1 Making Selective Calls... 336
7.3.3.2 Audio Tones...................327
7.5.4.2 Responding to Selective
7.4 Zone and Channel Selections................... 328 Calls ......................................337
7.4.1 Selecting Zones .......................... 328
7.5.5 Phone Calls ............................ 337
7.4.2 Selecting Channels......................328
7.5.5.1 Making Phone Calls ..338
7.5 Calls...........................................................329
7.5.5.2 Making Phone Calls with
7.5.1 Group Calls..................................329 the Programmable Phone
7.5.1.1 Making Group Calls....... 330 Button ................................... 338
7.5.1.2 Making Group Calls by 7.5.5.3 Dual Tone Multi
Using the Contacts List ............. 330 Frequency.................................. 339
7.5.1.3 Responding to Group 7.5.5.3.1 Initiating DTMF
Calls........................................... 331 Tone................................ 340
7.5.2 Private Calls ........................... 332
18
English
7.5.5.4 Responding to Phone 7.5.9 Open Voice Channel Mode

Calls as Private Calls ............340 (OVCM).................................................346
7.5.5.5 Responding to Phone 7.5.9.1 Making OVCM Calls.......346
Calls as Group Calls ............. 341 7.5.9.2 Responding to OVCM
7.5.5.6 Responding to Phone Calls........................................... 347
Calls as All Calls ................... 341 7.6 Advanced Features................................... 348
7.5.6 Initiating Transmit Interrupt .....342 7.6.1 Bluetooth®................................... 348
7.5.7 Broadcast Voice Calls..................342 7.6.1.1 Turning Bluetooth On
and Off....................................... 349
7.5.7.1 Making Broadcast Voice
Calls........................................... 342 7.6.1.2 Connecting to Bluetooth
Devices...................................... 349
7.5.7.2 Making Broadcast Voice
Calls by Using the 7.6.1.3 Connecting to Bluetooth
Programmable Number Key ..... 343 Devices in Discoverable Mode...350
7.5.7.3 Making Broadcast Voice 7.6.1.4 Disconnecting from
Calls by Using the Alias Search Bluetooth Devices...................... 351
...............................................344 7.6.1.5 Switching Audio Route
7.5.7.4 Receiving Broadcast between Internal Radio Speaker
Voice Calls................................. 344 and Bluetooth Device................. 351
7.5.8 Unaddressed Calls...................... 344 7.6.1.6 Viewing Device Details.. 352
7.5.8.1 Making Unaddressed 7.6.1.7 Deleting Device Name... 352
Calls........................................... 345 7.6.1.8 Bluetooth Mic Gain.........353
7.5.8.2 Responding to 7.6.1.9 Permanent Bluetooth
Unaddressed Calls.....................345 Discoverable Mode.................... 353
19
English
7.6.2 Indoor Location............................ 354 7.6.6.2 Setting New Home

7.6.2.1 Turning Indoor Location Channels....................................360
On or Off.................................... 354 7.6.7 Radio Check ............................... 361
7.6.2.2 Accessing Indoor 7.6.7.1 Sending Radio Checks
Location Beacons Information... 355 ...............................................361
7.6.8 Remote Monitor........................... 362
7.6.3 Multi-Site Control .............. 356 7.6.8.1 Initiating Remote Monitor
................................................... 362
7.6.3.1 Enabling Manual Site
Search........................................356 7.6.8.2 Initiating Remote Monitor
by Using the Contacts List ........ 363
7.6.3.2 Site Lock On/Off.............357
7.6.8.3 Initiating Remote Monitor
7.6.4 Talkaround...................................357 by Using the Manual Dial .......... 364
7.6.4.1 Toggling Between 7.6.9 Scan Lists.................................... 365
Repeater and Talkaround
Modes........................................ 358 7.6.9.1 Viewing Entries in the
Scan List ................................... 366
7.6.5 Monitor Feature .......................... 358
7.6.9.2 Adding New Entries to
7.6.5.1 Monitoring Channels...... 359 the Scan List.............................. 366
7.6.5.2 Permanent Monitor ....... 359 7.6.9.3 Deleting Entries from the
7.6.5.2.1 Turning Scan List.................................... 367
Permanent Monitor On or 7.6.9.4 Setting Priority for
Off................................... 359 Entries in the Scan List.............. 368
7.6.6 Home Channel Reminder............ 359 7.6.10 Scan...........................................369
7.6.6.1 Muting the Home
20
English
7.6.10.1 Turning Scan On or Off 7.6.13.1 Activating or

................................................... 369 Deactivating Call Ringers for
7.6.10.2 Responding to Call Alerts...................................375
Transmissions During Scanning 370 7.6.13.2 Activating or
7.6.10.3 Deleting Nuisance Deactivating Call Ringers for
Channels....................................370 Private Calls ..........................376
7.6.10.4 Restoring Nuisance 7.6.13.3 Activating or
Channels....................................371 Deactivating Call Ringers for
Selective Calls ...................... 377
7.6.11 Vote Scan ....................... 371 Deactivating Call Ringers for
7.6.12 Contacts Settings.......................371 Text Messages ..................... 378
7.6.12.1 Adding New Contacts . 372 7.6.13.5 Activating or
7.6.12.2 Setting Default Contact Deactivating Call Ringers for
...............................................373 Telemetry Status with Text........ 379
7.6.12.3 Assigning Entries to 7.6.13.6 Assigning Ring Styles.. 379
Programmable Number Keys 7.6.13.7 Selecting a Ring Alert
................................................... 373 Type........................................... 380
7.6.12.4 Removing Associations 7.6.13.8 Configuring Vibrate
Between Entries and Style........................................... 381
Programmable Number Keys 7.6.13.9 Escalating Alarm Tone
................................................... 374 Volume.......................................382
7.6.13 Call Indicator Settings................375 7.6.14 Call Log Features ..................... 382
21
English
7.6.14.2 Viewing Call List 7.6.18.1 Sending Emergency

Details ...................................383 Alarms ....................................... 391
7.6.14.3 Storing Aliases or IDs 7.6.18.2 Sending Emergency
from the Call List ...................384 Alarms with Call ........................ 392
7.6.14.4 Deleting Calls from the 7.6.18.3 Emergency Alarms with
Call List ................................. 384 Voice to Follow ..........................393
7.6.15 Call Alert Operation................... 385 7.6.18.4 Sending Emergency
Alarms with Voice to Follow ..394
7.6.15.1 Responding to Call
Alerts .........................................385 7.6.18.5 Receiving Emergency
Alarms........................................ 395
7.6.15.2 Making Call Alerts........ 386
7.6.18.6 Responding to
7.6.15.3 Making Call Alerts by
Emergency Alarms.....................396
Using the Contacts List.............. 386
7.6.18.7 Exiting Emergency
7.6.16 Dynamic Caller Alias..................387
Mode After Receiving the
7.6.16.1 Viewing the Caller Emergency Alarm...................... 397
Aliases List................................. 387
7.6.18.8 Reinitiating Emergency
7.6.16.2 Initiating Private Call Mode.......................................... 397
From the Caller Aliases List....... 387
7.6.18.9 Exiting Emergency
7.6.17 Mute Mode.................................388 Mode.......................................... 397
7.6.17.1 Turning On Mute Mode 388 7.6.18.10 Deleting an Alarm
7.6.17.2 Setting Mute Mode Item from the Alarm List............. 398
Timer.......................................... 389 7.6.19 Man Down..................................398
7.6.17.3 Exiting Mute Mode....... 389 7.6.19.1 Turning the Man Down
7.6.18 Emergency Operation ...............390 Feature On or Off....................... 399
22
English
7.6.20 Text Messaging ........................ 399 7.6.20.1.10 Deleting

7.6.20.1 Text Messages ....... 400 Saved Text Messages
from the Drafts Folder..... 406
7.6.20.1.1 Viewing Text
Messages........................ 400 7.6.20.2 Sent Text Messages
................................................... 406
7.6.20.1.2 Viewing
Telemetry Status Text 7.6.20.2.1 Viewing Sent
Messages........................ 401 Text Messages ...........407
7.6.20.1.3 Viewing Saved 7.6.20.2.2 Sending Sent
Text Messages................ 401 Text Messages ...........408
7.6.20.1.4 Responding to 7.6.20.2.3 Deleting All
Text Messages ...........401 Sent Text Messages from
7.6.20.1.5 Replying to the Sent Items Folder ..... 408
Text Messages................ 402 7.6.20.3 Quick Text Messages
7.6.20.1.6 Forwarding ...............................................409
Text Messages ...........403 7.6.20.3.1 Sending Quick
7.6.20.1.7 Resending Text Messages ...........409
Text Messages................ 404 7.6.21 Analog Message Encode...........410
7.6.20.1.8 Deleting Text 7.6.21.1 Sending MDC Encode
Messages from the Inbox 404 Messages to Dispatchers ..... 410
7.6.20.1.9 Deleting All 7.6.21.2 Sending 5-Tone
Text Messages from the Encode Messages to Contacts
Inbox .......................... 405 ...............................................411
7.6.22 Analog Status Update ...........412
23
English
7.6.22.1 Sending Status 7.6.26 Lone Worker.............................. 421

Updates to Predefined Contacts 7.6.27 Password Lock.......................... 422
...............................................412 7.6.27.1 Accessing the Radio by
7.6.22.2 Viewing 5-Tone Status Using Password......................... 422
Details........................................ 413 7.6.27.2 Turning Password Lock
7.6.23 Privacy ..................................413 On or Off.................................... 423
7.6.23.1 Turning Privacy On or 7.6.27.3 Unlocking Radios in
Off ......................................... 414 Locked State.............................. 424
7.6.24 Response Inhibit........................ 415 7.6.27.4 Changing Passwords... 424
7.6.24.1 Turning Response 7.6.28 Notification List ......................... 425
Inhibit On or Off..........................415 7.6.28.1 Accessing Notification
7.6.25 Security .................................415 List ............................................ 426
7.6.25.1 Disabling Radios .....416 7.6.29 Auto-Range Transponder
7.6.25.2 Disabling Radios by
Using the Contacts List .........417 System .......................................426
7.6.25.3 Disabling Radios by 7.6.30 Over-the-Air Programming ... 427
Using the Manual Dial ...........418 7.6.31 Transmit Inhibit.......................... 428
7.6.25.4 Enabling Radios ......419 7.6.31.1 Enabling Transmit
7.6.25.5 Enabling Radios by Inhibit......................................... 428
Using the Contacts List .........419 7.6.31.2 Disabling Transmit
7.6.25.6 Enabling Radios by Inhibit......................................... 428
Using the Manual Dial ...........420 7.6.32 Wi-Fi Operation..........................428
24
English
7.6.32.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off429 7.6.33.2 Editing Mode

7.6.32.2 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Parameters................................ 436
Remotely by Using a 7.7 Utilities....................................................... 437
Designated Radio (Individual 7.7.1 Keypad Lock Options...................437
Control)...................................... 430
7.7.1.1 Enabling the Keypad
7.6.32.3 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Lock Option................................437
Remotely by Using a
7.7.1.2 Disabling the Keypad
Lock Option................................437
Control)...................................... 430
7.7.2 Turning Automatic Call
Forwarding On or Off............................ 438
Network Access Point................ 431
7.7.3 Identifying Cable Type................. 438
Connection Status......................432 7.7.4 Flexible Receive List ...............439
7.6.32.6 Refreshing the Network 7.7.4.1 Turning Flexible Receive
List............................................. 433 List On or Off..............................439
7.6.32.7 Adding a Network.........433 7.7.4.2 Adding New Entries to
7.6.32.8 Viewing Details of the Flexible Receive List............ 439
Network Access Points.............. 434 7.7.4.3 Deleting Entries from the
7.6.32.9 Removing Network Flexible Receive List.................. 440
Access Points............................ 435 7.7.5 Setting Menu Timer..................... 441
7.6.33 Front Panel Programming..........436 7.7.6 Text-to-Speech............................ 442
7.6.33.1 Entering Front Panel 7.7.6.1 Setting Text-to-Speech.. 442
Programming Mode................... 436 7.7.7 Turning Acoustic Feedback
Suppressor On or Off ...................... 443
25
English
7.7.8 Turning Global Navigation 7.7.20 Turning LED Indicators On or

Satellite System On or Off.................... 444 Off......................................................... 453
7.7.9 Turning Introduction Screen On 7.7.21 Setting Languages.....................453
or Off.....................................................445 7.7.22 Voice Operating Transmission...454
7.7.10 Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On 7.7.22.1 Turning Voice
or Off.....................................................445 Operating Transmission On or
7.7.11 Setting Tones/Alerts Volume Off.............................................. 454
Offset Levels.........................................446 7.7.23 Turning Option Board On or Off.455
7.7.12 Turning Talk Permit Tone On or 7.7.24 Turning Voice Announcement
Off......................................................... 447 On or Off .............................................. 455
7.7.13 Turning Power Up Tone On or 7.7.25 Turning Digital Microphone AGC
Off......................................................... 448 On or Off .............................................. 456
7.7.14 Setting Text Message Alert 7.7.26 Turning Analog Microphone
Tones....................................................448 AGC On or Off ..................................... 457
7.7.15 Power Levels............................. 449 7.7.27 Switching Audio Route between
7.7.15.1 Setting Power Levels... 449 Internal Radio Speaker and Wired
7.7.16 Adjusting Display Brightness..... 450 Accessory............................................. 457
7.7.17 Setting Display Backlight Timer. 450 7.7.28 Turning Intelligent Audio On or
Off......................................................... 458
7.7.18 Turning Backlight Auto On or
Off......................................................... 451 7.7.29 Turning Trill Enhancement On
or Off.....................................................459
7.7.19 Squelch Levels ......................... 452
7.7.30 Turning the Microphone
7.7.19.1 Setting Squelch Levels
Dynamic Distortion Control Feature On
................................................... 452
or Off.....................................................459
26
English
7.7.31 Setting Audio Ambience............ 460 Citizens Band Repeater Operation..................469

7.7.32 Setting Audio Profiles................ 461 25 kHz Land Mobile Band to 12.5 kHz Narrow
7.7.33 General Radio Information ........461 Band Transition............................................... 469
7.7.33.1 Accessing Battery Limited Warranty........................................................ 471
Information ................................ 462 MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS
7.7.33.2 Checking Radio Alias COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS.................... 471
and ID ....................................... 462 I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND
7.7.33.3 Checking Firmware and FOR HOW LONG:........................................... 471
Codeplug Versions.....................463 II. GENERAL PROVISIONS............................ 472
7.7.33.4 Checking GNSS III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:................................472
Information................................. 463 IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE......472
7.7.33.5 Checking Software V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT
Update Information.................... 464 COVER............................................................473
7.7.33.6 Displaying Site VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS473
Information................................. 465
VII. GOVERNING LAW................................... 474
7.7.33.7 Received Signal
VIII. For Australia Only.................................... 475
Strength Indicator.......................465
7.7.33.7.1 Viewing RSSI
Values............................. 465
7.7.34 Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi
Certificate Details..................................465
Part IV: Authorized Accessories List........................ 467
Citizens Band License................................................469
27
English
Important Safety Information

RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety
Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios
CAUTION:
This radio is restricted to Occupational use only.
Before using the radio, read the RF Energy
Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable
Two-Way Radios which contains important
operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy
awareness and control for Compliance with
applicable standards and Regulations.
28
English
Software Version
All the features described in the following sections are
supported by the software version R02.21.01.0000 or later.
See Checking Firmware and Codeplug Versions on page
190 to determine the software version of your radio.
Contact your dealer or administrator for more information.
29
English
Copyrights Disclaimer
Please note that certain features, facilities, and capabilities
The Motorola Solutions products described in this described in this document may not be applicable to or
document may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions licensed for use on a specific system, or may be dependent
computer programs. Laws in the United States and other upon the characteristics of a specific mobile subscriber unit
countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive or configuration of certain parameters. Please refer to your
rights for copyrighted computer programs. Accordingly, any Motorola Solutions contact for further information.
copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs
contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in Trademarks
this document may not be copied or reproduced in any
manner without the express written permission of Motorola MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, and the
Solutions. Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under
© 2021 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved license. All other trademarks are the property of their
No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted, respective owners.
stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language
or computer language, in any form or by any means, Open Source Content
without the prior written permission of Motorola Solutions,
This product contains Open Source software used under
Inc.
license. Refer to the product installation media for full Open
Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products Source Legal Notices and Attribution content.
shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by
implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the
copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola
Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty-free
license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of
a product.
30
English
European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and

Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
The European Union's WEEE directive requires that

products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out
trash bin label on the product (or the package in some
cases).
As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin
label means that customers and end-users in EU countries
should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or
accessories in household waste.
Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact
their local equipment supplier representative or service
centre for information about the waste collection system in
their country.
31
English
Computer Software patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of Digital Voice
Systems, Inc.
Copyrights This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for use
within this Communications Equipment. The user of this
The Motorola Solutions products described in this manual Technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to
may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object
programs stored in semiconductor memories or other Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into a
media. Laws in the United States and other countries human-readable form.
preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for
copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited U.S. Pat. Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974,
to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the #5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011,
copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any #5,581,656, #5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579,
copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs #5,226,084 and #5,195,166.
contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in
this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified,
reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without
the express written permission of Motorola Solutions.
Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products
shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by
implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the
copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola
Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive license to
use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.
The AMBE+2™ voice coding Technology embodied in this
product is protected by intellectual property rights including
32
English
Radio Care and the battery before attaching the battery to radio.
The residual water could short-circuit the radio.
This section describes the basic handling precaution of the • If your radio has been submersed in a corrosive
radio. substance (for example, saltwater), rinse radio and
battery in fresh water then dry radio and battery.
Table 1: IP Specification • To clean the exterior surfaces of your radio, use a
diluted solution of mild dishwashing detergent and fresh
IP Specification Description
water (for example, one teaspoon of detergent to one
IP67 Allows your radio to with- gallon of water).
stand adverse field condi-
• Never poke the vent (hole) located on the radio chassis
tions such as being sub-
below the battery contact. This vent allows for pressure
mersed in water.
equalization in the radio. Doing so may create a leak
path into radio and your radio's submersibility may be
CAUTION: lost.
Do not disassemble your radio. This could damage
radio seals and result in leak paths into the radio. • Never obstruct or cover the vent, even with a label.
Radio maintenance should only be done in service • Ensure that no oily substances come in contact with the
depot that is equipped to test and replace the seal vent.
on the radio.
• Your radio with antenna attached properly is designed
• If your radio has been submersed in water, shake your to be submersible to a maximum depth of 1 m (3.28 ft)
radio well to remove any water that may be trapped and a maximum submersion time of 30 minutes.
inside the speaker grille and microphone port. Trapped Exceeding either maximum limit or use without antenna
water could cause decreased audio performance. may result in damage to your radio.
• If your radio's battery contact area has been exposed to
water, clean and dry battery contacts on both your radio
33
English
• When cleaning your radio, do not use a high pressure

jet spray on radio as this will exceed the 1 m depth
pressure and may cause water to leak into your radio.
34
English
Introduction Icon Information

Throughout this publication, the icons described are used
This user guide covers the operation of your radios. to indicate features supported in either the conventional
Your dealer or system administrator may have customized analog or conventional digital mode.
your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer
or system administrator for more information.
You can consult your dealer or system administrator about
Indicates a conventional Analog Mode-Only feature.
the following:
• Is your radio programmed with any preset conventional
channels?
• Which buttons have been programmed to access other Indicates a conventional Digital Mode-Only feature.
features? For features that are available in both conventional analog
• What optional accessories may suit your needs? and digital modes, both icons are not shown.
• What are the best radio usage practices for effective
communication? 1.2
• What maintenance procedures that helps promote Conventional Analog and Digital
longer radio life? Modes
Each channel in your radio can be configured as a
1.1 conventional analog or conventional digital channel.
1 : Channel Selector Knob
35
English
Certain features are unavailable when switching from In an automatic site search, the radio scans through all
digital to analog mode. The icons for digital features reflect available sites when the signal from the current site is weak
this change by appearing “grayed out”. The disabled or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the
features are hidden in the menu. current site. The radio then locks on to the repeater with
the strongest Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI)
Your radio also has features available in both analog and
value.
digital modes. The minor differences in the way each
feature works do not affect the performance of your radio. In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site
in the roam list that is currently in range but which may not
NOTICE:
have the strongest signal and locks on to the repeater.
Your radio also switches between digital and analog
modes during a dual mode scan. See Scan on page NOTICE:
369 for more information. Each channel can only have either Scan or Roam
enabled, not both at the same time.
1.3 Channels with this feature enabled can be added to a
IP Site Connect particular roam list. The radio searches the channels in the
roam list during the automatic roam operation to locate the
This feature allows your radio to extend conventional best site. A roam list supports a maximum of 16 channels,
communication beyond the reach of a single site by including the selected channel.
connecting to different available sites by using an Internet
Protocol (IP) network. This is a conventional multi-site NOTICE:
mode. You cannot manually add or delete an entry in the
roam list. Contact your dealer for more information.
When the radio moves out of range from one site and into
the range of another, the radio connects to the repeater of
the new site to send or receive calls or data transmissions.
This is done either automatically or manually depending on
your settings.
36
English
1.4 Check with your dealer or system administrator for more

Capacity Plus information on this configuration.
Capacity Plus is an entry-level trunked system for single 1.4.2

and multiple sites. The single and multi-site dynamic
trunking offers better capacity and coverage. Capacity Plus–Multi-Site
Capacity Plus–Multi-Site is a multi-channel trunking
1.4.1 configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio system, combining
Capacity Plus–Single-Site the best of both Capacity Plus and IP Site Connect
configurations.
Capacity Plus–Single-Site is a single-site trunking
Capacity Plus–Multi-Site allows your radio to extend
configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio system, which uses
trunking communication beyond the reach of a single site,
a pool of channels to support hundreds of users and up to
by connecting to different available sites which are
254 Groups. This feature allows your radio to efficiently
connected with an IP network. It also provides an increase
utilize the available number of programmed channels while
in capacity by efficiently utilizing the combined available
in Repeater Mode.
number of programmed channels supported by each of the
You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access a available sites.
feature not applicable to Capacity Plus–Single-Site by
When the radio moves out of range from one site and into
using a programmable button press.
the range of another, it connects to the repeater of the new
Your radio also has features that are available in site to send or receive calls/data transmissions. Depending
conventional digital mode, IP Site Connect, and Capacity on your settings, this is done automatically or manually.
Plus. However, the minor differences in the way each
If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans through
feature works does not affect the performance of your
all available sites when the signal from the current site is
radio.
weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from
37
English
the current site. It then locks on to the repeater with the

strongest RSSI value.
In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site
in the roam list that is currently in range (but which may not
have the strongest signal) and locks on to it.
Any channel with Capacity Plus–Multi-Site enabled can be
added to a particular roam list. The radio searches these
channels during the automatic roam operation to locate the
best site.
NOTICE:
You cannot manually add or delete an entry to the
roam list. Check with your dealer or system
administrator for more information.
Similar to Capacity Plus–Single Site, icons of features not
applicable to Capacity Plus–Multi-Site are not available in
the menu. You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to
access a feature not applicable to Capacity Plus–Multi-Site
by using a programmable button press.
38
English
Getting Started warranty extension over the standard Motorola

Solutions Premium battery warranty duration.
Getting Started provides instructions to prepare your radio

2.2
for use.
Attaching the Battery
2.1 Follow the procedure to attach the battery to your radio.
Charging the Battery This battery mismatch alert feature is only applicable for
Your radio is powered by a Nickel Metal-Hydride (NiMH) or IMPRES battery and Non-IMPRES battery with kit number
Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) battery. programmed in Erasable Programmable Read Only
Memory (EPROM).
Turn off your radio when charging.
When the radio is attached with the wrong battery, a low
• To comply with warranty terms and avoid damages, pitched warning tone sounds, the LED blinks in red, display
charge the battery using a Motorola Solutions shows Wrong Battery, and the Voice Announcement/
authorized charger as described in the charger user Text-to-Speech sounds Wrong Battery if the Voice
guide. Announcement/Text-to-Speech is loaded by using CPS.
• Charge a new battery 14 to 16 hours before initial When the radio is attached with a non-supported battery,
use for best performance. an alert tone sounds, display shows Unknown Battery,
and battery icon is disabled.
Batteries charge best at room temperature.
The certification of the radio is voided if you attach a UL
• Charge your IMPRES™ battery with an IMPRES
battery to an FM approved radio or vice versa. Your radio
charger for optimized battery life and valuable
can be preprogrammed in CPS to alert you if this battery
battery data. IMPRES batteries charged exclusively
mismatch occurs. Check with your dealer or system
with IMPRES chargers receive a 6-month capacity
39
English
administrator to determine how your radio has been

programmed.
1 Align the battery with the rails on the back of the

radio.
2 Press the battery firmly, and slide upwards until the

latch snaps into place.
A
2.3
Attaching the Antenna
Turn off your radio.
Set the antenna in the receptacle and turn clockwise.

NOTICE:
To protect best against water and dust,
3 Slide battery latch into lock position. ensure that antenna is tightly fitted.
4 To remove the battery, turn the radio off. Move the

battery latch marked A into unlock position and hold,
and slide the battery down and off the rails.
40
English
2.5
Attaching the Universal Connector
Cover
The universal connector is located on the antenna side of
the radio. It is used to connect MOTOTRBO accessories to
the radio.
Replace the universal connector cover or dust cover when
the universal connector is not in use.
NOTICE:
To remove the antenna, turn the antenna
counterclockwise. 1 Insert the slanted end of the cover into the slots
above the universal connector.
CAUTION:
To prevent damages, replace the faulty antenna 2 Press downwards on the cover to seat the dust
with only MOTOTRBO antennas. cover properly on the universal connector.
2.4
Attaching the Carry Holster
1 Align the rails on the carry holster with the grooves
on the battery.
2 Press downwards until you hear a click.
41
English
3 Secure the connector cover to the radio by turning 4 Apply Deoxit Gold Cleaner or Lubricant Pen
the thumbscrew clockwise. (Manufacturer CAIG Labs, Part number G100P) on
the contact surface of the universal connector.
2.6 5 Attach an accessory to the universal connector to
Cleaning the Universal Connector test the connectivity.
Cover NOTICE:
If the radio is exposed to water, dry the universal connector Do not submerge the radio in water. Ensure excess
before attaching an accessory or replacing the dust cover. detergent does not get trapped in between the
If the radio is exposed to salt water or contaminants, universal connector, controls, or crevices.
perform the following cleaning procedure. Clean the radio once a month for maintenance. For a
harsher environment such as in petrochemical plants or in
1 Mix one tablespoon of mild dishwashing detergent a high salt density marine environment, clean the radio
with one gallon of water to produce a 0.5% solution. more often.
2 Clean only the external surfaces of the radio with the 2.7
solution. Apply the solution sparingly with a stiff,
nonmetallic, short-bristled brush. Removing the Universal Connector
Cover (Dust Cover)
3 Dry the radio thoroughly with a soft and lint-free
cloth. Ensure the contact surface of the universal 1 Push the latch downwards.
connector is clean and dry.
2 Lift the cover up and slide down the dust cover from
the universal connector to remove it.
42
English
Replace the dust cover when the universal connector is not NOTICE:
in use. During the initial power-up after a software version
update to R02.07.00.0000 or later, a GNSS
2.8 firmware upgrade takes place for 20 seconds. After
the upgrade, the radio resets and turns on. This
Turning the Radio On firmware upgrade is only applicable for portable
models with the latest software and hardware.
Rotate the On/Off/Volume Control knob clockwise
until it clicks. If your radio does not power up, check your battery. Make
sure that the battery is charged and properly attached.
If successful, your radio shows the following indications: Contact your dealer if your radio still does not power up.
• A tone sounds.
2.9
NOTICE:
If the Tones/Alerts function is disabled, there is Turning the Radio Off
no tone upon powering up.
Rotate the On/Off/Volume Control knob
• The green LED lights up.
counterclockwise until it clicks.
• The display shows MOTOTRBO (TM), followed by a
welcome message or image. The display shows Powering Down.
• The Home screen lights up.
2.10
Adjusting the Volume
To adjust the volume of your radio, perform one of
the following actions:
43
English
• To increase the volume, turn the On/Off/Volume

Control knob clockwise.
• To decrease the volume, turn the On/Off/Volume
Control knob counterclockwise.
NOTICE:
Your radio can be programmed to have a
minimum volume offset where the volume
level cannot be lowered past the
programmed minimum volume.
44
English
Radio Controls 5 Push-to-Talk (PTT) Button

6 Side Button 21
This chapter explains the buttons and functions to control 7 Side Button 31
the radio.
8 Front Button P11
9 Menu/OK Button
18
1 10 4-Way Navigation Button
17
2
16
11 Back/Home Button
3
15
12 Front Button P21
4
5
14 13 Display
13
6 14 Microphone
7 12
8 11
15 Speaker
9 16 Universal Connector for Accessories
17 Emergency Button1
10
18 Antenna
1 Channel Selector Knob
2 On/Off/Volume Control Knob
3 LED Indicator
4 Side Button 11
1 These buttons are programmable.

45
English
3.1 or
or
Using the 4–Way Navigation Button
Number - Left : Delete last
digit
You can use the 4–way navigation button, , to scroll
through options, increase/decrease values, and navigate Right : -
vertically.
Alias - -
Free Form Text Move cursor up/ Move cursor
Category Direction down one character
or right/left
or
Numeric Values Increase/ Move cursor
Menu Vertical Naviga- - Decrease one character
tion right/left
Lists Vertical Naviga- -
tion
View Details Vertical Naviga- Previous/Next
tion Item
You can use the 4–way navigation button, , as a

number, alias, or free form text editor.
Editor Catego- Direction

ry
46
English
WAVE NOTICE:
This feature is applicable to specific models only.
Wide Area Voice Environment (WAVE™) provides a new

method of making calls between two or more radios. 4.1
WAVE allows you to communicate across different WAVE OnCloud/OnPremise

networks and devices using Wi-Fi. WAVE calls are made
when the radio is connected to an IP network through Wi- 4.1.1
Fi. Switching from Radio Mode to WAVE
Your radio supports different system configurations: Mode
• WAVE OnCloud/OnPremise
The method to initiate a WAVE Call is different for each 1 Do one of the following:
system type. Refer to the appropriate section depending on
• Press the programmed WAVE button. Skip the
the system configuration of your radio.
following steps.
Table 2: WAVE Display Icons

• Press to access the menu.
The following icons appear momentarily on the display
when WAVE is enabled. 2
Press or to WAVE. Press to select.
WAVE Connected
WAVE is connected. The yellow LED double blinks.
WAVE Disconnected
WAVE is disconnected.
47
English
The display shows a momentary notice of Switching to 4.1.2

WAVE, then shows Preparing WAVE. Making WAVE Group Calls
NOTICE:
Your radio automatically enables Wi-Fi after you 1 Use the channel selector knob or buttons to select a
switch to WAVE mode. WAVE talkgroup.
If successful:
2 To call, press the PTT button.
• The blinking yellow LED turns off.
If the call is successful, the display shows the Group Call
• The display shows the WAVE connected icon,
icon and the WAVE talkgroup alias.
<Talkgroup Alias>, and <Channel Index>.
If the call is unsuccessful:
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• A negative tone sounds.
• The display shows a momentary notice of Call Failed
• The red LED blinks.
or No Participants.
• The display shows the WAVE disconnected icon and No
Connection or Activation: Fail, depending on the 4.1.3
error type.
Receiving and Responding to WAVE
NOTICE:
Synchronization occurs when new settings are Group Calls
updated to your radio. When you enter the WAVE When you receive a WAVE group call:
mode, your radio displays Syncing.... When the
• A tone sounds.
synchronization completes, your radio returns to the
home screen. • The display shows the group call icon, WAVE talkgroup
alias, and caller alias.
48
English
• Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds Switching from WAVE Mode to Radio
through the speaker.
Mode
1 Do one of the following:
2 To listen, release the PTT button.
• Press the programmed Radio Mode button. Skip
the following steps.
4.1.4
Receiving and Responding to WAVE • Press to access the menu.
Private Calls
2
When you receive a WAVE private call: Press or to Radio Mode. Press to
• A tone sounds. select.
• The display shows the private call icon and caller alias. The yellow LED double blinks.
• Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds The display shows a momentary notice of Switching to
through the speaker. Radio and then shows Preparing Radio.
When successful:
• The blinking yellow LED turns off.
2 To listen, release the PTT button. • The WAVE connected icon disappears on the status
bar. The display shows <Talkgroup Alias> and
4.1.5 <Channel Index>.
49
English
Capacity Max If the Talk Permit Tone is enabled, wait until the short alert
tone ends before talking.
Capacity Max is MOTOTRBO control channel based 5.2

trunked radio system.
MOTOTRBO digital radio products are marketed by
Programmable Buttons
Motorola Solutions primarily to business and industrial Depending on the duration of a button press, your dealer
users. MOTOTRBO uses the European can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to
Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) Digital radio functions.
Mobile Radio (DMR) standard, that is, two-slot Time
Division Multiple Access (TDMA), to pack simultaneous Short press
voice or data in a 12.5 kHz channel (6.25 kHz equivalent). Pressing and releasing rapidly.
Long press
5.1 Pressing and holding for the programmed duration.
Push-To-Talk Button NOTICE:
See Emergency Operation on page 390 for more
The Push-to-Talk (PTT) button serves two basic purposes: information on the programmed duration of the
• While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the Emergency button.
radio to transmit to other radios in the call. The
microphone is activated when the PTT button is 5.2.1
pressed. Assignable Radio Functions
• While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to The following radio functions can be assigned to the
make a new call. programmable buttons by your dealer or system
Long press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button administrator.
to listen.
50
English
Audio Profiles Call Alert

Allows the user to select the preferred audio profile. Provides direct access to the contacts list for you to
select a contact to whom a Call Alert can be sent.
Audio Routing
Toggles audio routing between internal and external Call Log
speakers. Selects the call log list.
Audio Toggle Emergency
Toggles audio routing between the internal radio Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an
speaker and the speaker of a wired accessory. emergency.
Bluetooth® Audio Switch Indoor Location
Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker Toggles Indoor Location on or off.
and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Intelligent Audio
Bluetooth Connect Toggles intelligent audio on or off.
Initiates a Bluetooth find-and-connect operation. Manual Dial
Bluetooth Disconnect Initiates a Private Call by keying in any subscriber ID.
Terminates all existing Bluetooth connections between Manual Site Roam
your radio and any Bluetooth-enabled devices. Starts the manual site search.
Bluetooth Discoverable Mic AGC
Enables your radio to enter Bluetooth Discoverable Toggles the internal microphone automatic gain control
Mode. (AGC) on or off.
Contacts Notifications
Provides direct access to the Contacts list. Provides direct access to the Notifications list.
51
English
One Touch Access Site Lock

Directly initiates a predefined Broadcast, Private, Phone When toggled on, the radio searches the current site
or Group Call, a Call Alert, or a Quick Text message. only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in
addition to the current site.
Option Board Feature
Toggles option board feature(s) on or off for option Status
board-enabled channels. Selects the status list menu.
Phone Telemetry Control
Provides direct access to the Phone Contacts list. Controls the Output Pin on a local or remote radio.
Privacy Text Message
Toggles privacy on or off. Selects the text message menu.
Radio Alias and ID Toggle Call Priority Level
Provides radio alias and ID. Enables your radio to enter Call Priority Level High/
Normal.
Remote Monitor
Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it Trill Enhancement
giving any indicators. Toggles trill enhancement on or off.
Reset Home Channel Voice Announcement On/Off
Sets a new home channel. Toggles voice announcement on or off.
Silence Home Channel Reminder Wi-Fi
Mutes the Home Channel Reminder. Toggles Wi-Fi on or off.
Site Info Zone Selection
Displays the current Capacity Max site name and ID. Allows selection from a list of zones.
Plays site announcement voice messages for the
current site when Voice Announcement is enabled.
52
English
5.2.2
Assignable Settings or Utility • Press to access the menu.
Functions 2 Press or to the menu function, and press

The following radio settings or utility functions can be
assigned to the programmable buttons. to select a function or enter a sub-menu.
Tones/Alerts 3 Do one of the following:

Toggles all tones and alerts on or off.
Backlight • Press to return to the previous screen.
Toggles display backlight on or off.
Backlight Brightness • Long press to return to the Home screen.
Adjusts the brightness level.
Your radio automatically exits the menu after a
Power Level period of inactivity and returns to the Home screen.
Toggles transmit power level between high and low.
5.3
5.2.3
Accessing Programmed Functions Status Indicators
Follow the procedure to access programmed functions in This chapter explains the status indicators and audio tones
your radio. used in the radio.

• Press the programmed button. Proceed to step 3.
53
English
5.3.1 Bluetooth Not Connected

Icons The Bluetooth feature is enabled but
there is no remote Bluetooth device
The radio display shows radio status, text entries, and connected.
menu entries. The following are the icons that appear on
the radio display. DGNA
Radio is in DGNA Talkgroup.
Table 3: Display Icons
Emergency
The following icons appear on the status bar at the top of
Radio is in Emergency mode.
the radio display. The icons are arranged left most in order
of appearance or usage, and are channel-specific. GNSS Available
GNSS feature is enabled. The icon
Battery
stays lit when a position fix is availa-
The number of bars (0–4) shown indi-
ble.
cates the charge remaining in the bat-
tery. The icon blinks when the battery GNSS Not Available
is low. GNSS feature is enabled but is not re-
ceiving data from the satellite.
Bluetooth Connected
The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The High Volume Data
icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth Radio is receiving high volume data
device is connected. and channel is busy.
54
English
Indoor Location Available 2 Over-the-Air Programming Delay Tim-

Indoor location status is on and availa- er
ble. Indicates time left before automatic re-
start of radio.
Indoor Location Unavailable2
Indoor location status is on but un- Power Level
available due to Bluetooth disabled or or Radio is set at Low power or Radio is
Beacons Scan suspended by Blue- set at High power.
tooth.
Priority 1
Mute Mode Indicates Priority Talkgroup 1.
Mute Mode is enabled and speaker is
muted. Priority 2
Indicates Priority Talkgroup 2.
Notification
Notification List has one or more
missed events. Received Signal Strength Indicator
(RSSI)
Option Board The number of bars displayed repre-
The Option Board is enabled. (Option sents the radio signal strength. Four
board enabled models only) bars indicate the strongest signal. This
icon is only displayed while receiving.
Option Board Non-Function
The Option Board is disabled. Response Inhibit
Response Inhibit is enabled.
2 Only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware.
55
English
Ring Only Vibrate

Ringing mode is enabled. Vibrate mode is enabled.
Shared Frequency Vibrate and Ring

Indicates radio is locking to shared Vibrate and Ring mode is enabled.
control channel.
Wi-Fi Excellent 3
Secure Wi-Fi signal is excellent.
The Privacy feature is enabled.
Silent Ring Wi-Fi Good3

Silent ring mode is enabled. Wi-Fi signal is good.
Site Roaming Wi-Fi Average3

The site roaming feature is enabled. Wi-Fi signal is average
Status Wi-Fi Poor3

Indicates a new status message. Wi-Fi signal is poor.
Tones Disable
Tones are turned off.
Unsecure
The Privacy feature is disabled.
3 Only applicable for DP4601e

56
English
Wi-Fi Unavailable3 Bluetooth Audio Device

Wi-Fi signal is unavailable. Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such
as a headset.
Bluetooth Data Device

Table 4: Advance Menu Icons
Bluetooth-enabled data device, such
The following icons appear beside menu items that offer a as a scanner.
choice between two options or as an indication that there is
a sub-menu offering two options. Bluetooth PTT Device
Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such
Checkbox (Checked) as a PTT-Only Device (POD).
Indicates that the option is selected.
Bluetooth Sensor Device3
Checkbox (Empty) Bluetooth-enabled sensor device,
Indicates that the option is not selec- such as gas sensor.
ted.
Solid Black Box Table 6: Call Icons

Indicates that the option selected for
The following icons appear on the display during a call.
the menu item with a sub-menu.
These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate
alias or ID type.
Table 5: Bluetooth Device Icons Bluetooth PC Call
The following icons appear next to items in the list of Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call in pro-
Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device gress.
type.
57
English
In the Contacts list, it indicates a Blue- In the Contacts list, it indicates a sub-
tooth PC Call alias (name) or ID (num- scriber alias (name) or ID (number).
ber).
Non-IP Peripheral Group call
Call Priority High Indicates a Non-IP Peripheral group
Indicating Call Priority Level High is call in progress.
enabled. In the Contacts list, it indicates a
DGNA Call group alias (name) or ID (number).
Indicates a DGNA Call is in progress.
Option Board Individual Call
Indicates an Option Board individual
Dispatch Call call in progress.
The Dispatch Call contact type is used
to send a text message to a dispatch- In the Contacts list, it indicates a sub-
er PC through a third-party Text Mes- scriber alias (name) or ID (number).
sage Server. Option Board Group Call
Group Call/All Call Indicates an Option Board group call
Indicates a Group Call or All Call in in progress.
progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a
In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number).
group alias (name) or ID (number). Phone Call as Group/All Call
Non-IP Peripheral Individual call Indicates a Phone Call as Group Call
Indicates a Non-IP Peripheral individu- or All Call in progress. In the Contacts
al call in progress. list, it indicates a group alias (name)
or ID (number).
58
English
Phone Call as Private Call Transmission in Progress (Transi-

Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call tional)
in progress. In the Contacts list, it indi- Transmitting. This is seen before indi-
cates a phone alias (name) or ID cation for Successful Transmission or
(number). Failed Transmission.
Private Call
Indicates a Private Call in progress. In Table 8: Sent Items Icons
the Contacts list, it indicates a sub-
The following icons appear at the top right corner of the
scriber alias (name) or ID (number).
display in the Sent Items folder.
In Progress
Table 7: Mini Notice Icons The text message to a subscriber
or
The following icons appear momentarily on the display after alias or ID is pending transmission,
an action to perform a task is taken. followed by waiting for acknowledge-
ment. The text message to a group
Failed Transmission (Negative) alias or ID is pending transmission.
Failed action taken.
Individual or Group Message Read
Successful Transmission (Positive) The text message has been read.
or
Successful action taken.
59
English
Individual or Group Message Unread Radio has moved out of range if Auto-Range
or The text message has not been read. Transponder System is configured.
Mute Mode is enabled.
Solid Green
Send Failed Radio is powering up.
The text message cannot be sent. Radio is transmitting.
or
Radio is sending a Call Alert or an emergency
transmission.
Sent Successfully Blinking Green
The text message has been success- Radio is receiving a call or data.
or
fully sent. Radio is retrieving Over-the-Air Programming
transmissions over the air.
Radio is detecting activity over the air.
5.3.2 NOTICE:
This activity may or may not affect the
LED Indicator programmed channel of the radio due to the
The LED indicator shows the operational status of your nature of the digital protocol.
radio. Double Blinking Green
Blinking Red Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call or data.
Radio has failed the self-test upon powering up. Solid Yellow
Radio is receiving an emergency transmission. Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable Mode.
Radio is transmitting in low battery state.
60
English
Blinking Yellow
Radio has yet to respond to a Call Alert. Continuous Tone
Double Blinking Yellow A monotone sound. Sounds continuously until
Radio has Auto Roaming enabled. termination.
Radio is actively searching for a new site.
Radio has yet to respond to a Group Call Alert. Periodic Tone
Sounds periodically depending on the duration set by
Radio is locked. the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself.
5.3.3
Repetitive Tone
Tones A single tone that repeats itself until it is terminated by
The following are the tones that sound through on the radio the user.
speaker.
Momentary Tone
High Pitched Tone Sounds once for a short duration set by the radio.
5.3.3.2
Low Pitched Tone
Indicator Tones
5.3.3.1 Indicator tones provide you with audible indications of the
Audio Tones status after an action to perform a task is taken.
Audio tones provide you with audible indications of the

status, or response to data received on the radio. Positive Indicator Tone
61
English
Out of Range
Negative Indicator Tone A radio is deemed to be out of range when the radio is
unable to detect a signal from the system or from the
5.4
current site. Typically, this indication means that the radio
Registration is outside of the geographic outbound radio frequency (RF)
coverage range.
There are a number of registration-related messages that When Out of Range is displayed on the radio, a repetitive
you may receive. tone sounds and the red LED flashes.
Contact your dealer or system administrator if the radio still
Registering receives out of range indications while being in an area
Typically, registration is sent to the system during power- with good RF coverage.
up, Talkgroup change, or during site roaming. If a radio
fails registration on a site, the radio automatically attempts Talkgroup Affiliation Failed
to roam to another site. The radio temporarily removes the
A radio tries to affiliate to the Talkgroup specified in the
site where registration was attempted from the roaming list.
channels or Unified Knob Position (UKP) during
The indication means that the radio is busy searching for a registration.
site to roam, or that the radio has found a site successfully
A radio that is in affiliation fail state is unable to make or
but is waiting for a response to the registration messages
receive calls from the Talkgroup that the radio is trying to
from the radio.
affiliate to.
When Registering is displayed on the radio, a tone
When a radio fails to affiliate with a Talkgroup, UKP Alias
sounds and the yellow LED double flashes to indicate a site
is displayed in the home screen with a highlighted
search.
background.
If the indications persist, the user should change locations
or if allowed, manually roam to another site.
62
English
Contact your dealer or system administrator if the radio assignable positions.Each Capacity Max zone contains a
receives affiliation failure indications. maximum of 16 assignable positions.
Register Denied 5.5.1

Registration denied indicators are received when the Selecting Zones
registration with the system is not accepted.
Follow the procedure to select the required zone on your
The radio does not indicate to the radio user the specific radio.
reason the registration was denied. Normally, a registration
is denied when the system operator has disabled the 1 Do one of the following:
access of the radio to the system.
• Press the programmed Zone Selection button.
When a radio is denied registration, Register Denied is Proceed to step 3.
displayed on the radio and the yellow LED double flashes
to indicate a site search.
5.5
2
Zone and Channel Press or to Zone. Press to select.
Selections The display shows and the current zone.
This chapter explains the operations to select a zone or

channel on your radio.
The radio can be programmed with a maximum of 250
Capacity Max Zones with a maximum of 160 Channels per
zone. Each Capacity Max zone contains a maximum of 16
63
English
3
Press or to the required zone. Press to
select.
The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily
and returns to the selected zone screen.
5.5.2
Selecting a Call Type
Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a call type. This Once the required zone is displayed (if you have
can be a Group Call, Broadcast Call, All Call, or Private multiple zones in your radio), turn the programmed
Call, depending on how your radio is programmed. If you Channel Selector Knob to select the call type.
change the Channel Selector Knob to a different position
(that has a call type assigned to it), this causes the radio to
re-register with the Capacity Max System. The radio 5.5.3
registers with the Talkgroup ID that has been programmed Selecting a Site
for the new Channel Selector Knob position call type.
A site provides coverage for a specific area. In a multi-site
Your radio does not operate when selected to an network, the Capacity Max radio will automatically search
unprogrammed channel, use the Channel Selector Knob to for a new site when the signal level from the current site
select a programmed channel instead. drops to an unacceptable level.
The Capacity Max system can support up to 250 sites.
64
English
5.5.4 Site Lock On/Off

Roam Request
When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only.
A Roam Request tells the radio to search for a different When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition
site, even if the signal from the current site is acceptable. to the current site.
If there are no sites available:
Press the programmed Site Lock button.
• The radio display shows Searching and continues to
search through the list of sites. If the Site Lock function is toggled on:
• The radio will return to the previous site, if the previous • You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the
site is still available. radio has locked to the current site.
NOTICE: • The display shows Site Locked.

This is programmed by your dealer. If the Site Lock function is toggled off:
• You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the
Press the programmed Manual Site Roam button. radio is unlocked.
You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switched to • The display shows Site Unlocked.
a new site. The display shows Site ID <Site
Number>.
5.5.6
5.5.5 Site Restriction
In Capacity Max system, your radio administrator has the
ability to decide which network sites your radio is and is not
allowed to use.
65
English
The radio does not have to be reprogrammed to change recorders, phone gateways, and data applications cannot
the list of allowed and disallowed sites. If your radio communicate to the radios at the site.
attempts to register at a disallowed site, your radio receives Once in Site Trunking, a radio that is involved in calls
indication that the site is denied. The radio then searches across multiple sites will only be able to communicate with
for a different network site. other radios within the same site. Communication to and
When experiencing site restrictions, your radio displays from other sites would be lost.
Register Denied and the yellow LED double flashes to NOTICE:
indicate a site search. If there are multiple sites that cover the current
location of the radio and one of the sites enters Site
5.5.7 Trunking, the radio roams to another site if within
Site Trunking coverage.
Site Trunking is only available with Capacity Max system. A 5.6

site must be able to communicate with the Trunk Controller
to be considered as System Trunking. Calls
If the site cannot communicate with the Trunk Controller in This chapter explains the operations to receive, respond to,
the system, a radio enters Site Trunking mode. While in make, and stop calls.
Site Trunking, the radio provides a periodic audible and
visual indication to the user to inform the user of their You can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID
limited functionality. after you have selected a channel by using one of these
features:
When a radio is in Site Trunking, the radio displays Site Alias Search
Trunking and a repetitive tone sounds. This method is used for Group, Private, and All Calls
The radios in Site Trunking are still able to make group and only with a keypad microphone.
individual voice calls as well as send text messages to
other radios within the same site. Voice consoles, logging
66
English
Contacts List Programmable Button

This method provides direct access to the Contacts list. This method is used for Phone Calls only.
Manual Dial (by using Contacts)
This method is used for Private and Phone Calls only 5.6.1
with a keypad microphone. Group Calls
Programmed Number Keys Your radio must be configured as part of a group to receive
This method is used for Group, Private, and All Calls a call from or make a call to the group of users.
only with a keypad microphone.
NOTICE: 5.6.1.1
You can only have one alias or ID assigned to a
number key, but you can have more than one
Making Group Calls
number key associated to an alias or ID. All the To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be
number keys on a keypad microphone can be configured as part of that group.
assigned. See Assigning Entries to
Programmable Number Keys on page 373 for 1 Do one of the following:
more information.
• Select a channel with the active group alias or ID.
Programmed One Touch Access Button See Selecting a Call Type on page 64.
This method is used for Group, Private, and Phone
• Press the programmed One Touch Access
Calls only.
button.
You can only have one ID assigned to a One Touch
Access button with a short or long programmable 2 Press the PTT button to make the call.
button press. Your radio can have multiple One Touch
The green LED lights up. The first text line shows the
Access buttons programmed.
Group Call icon and alias.
67
English
3 Do one of the following: Making Group Calls by Using the

• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak Contacts List
clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak 1
clearly into the microphone if enabled. Press to access the menu.
4 Release the PTT button to listen. 2

Press or to Contacts. Press to select.
The green LED lights up when the target radio
responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press
and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID.
to select.
5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,
you hear a short alert tone the moment the 4 Press the PTT button to make the call.
transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating
The green LED lights up.
the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT
The first line displays the subscriber alias or ID. The
button to respond to the call.
second line displays Group Call and the Group
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a Call icon.
predetermined period.
The call initiator can press to end a Group Call. 5 Do one of the following:
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
5.6.1.2 clearly into the microphone if enabled.
68
English
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak • The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right
clearly into the microphone if enabled. corner.
• The first text line shows the caller alias.
6 Release the PTT button to listen.
• The second text line displays the group call alias.
responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, • Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds
and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. through the speaker.

you hear a short alert tone the moment the • If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,
transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating you hear a short alert tone the moment the
the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
button to respond to the call. indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a
predetermined period. • If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the
PTT button to interrupt the audio from the
You hear a short tone. The display shows Call
transmitting radio and free the channel for you to
Ended.
respond.
5.6.1.3
Responding to Group Calls 2 Do one of the following:
When you receive a Group Call: • Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
• The green LED blinks.
69
English
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak • Select a channel with the active group alias or ID.
clearly into the microphone if enabled. See Selecting a Call Type on page 64.
button.
predetermined period. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The green LED lights up. The display shows the
5.6.2 Group Call icon and alias.
Broadcast Call
A Broadcast Call is a one-way voice call from any user to
an entire talkgroup. • Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
The Broadcast Call feature allows only the call initiating
user to transmit to the talkgroup, while the recipients of the • Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak
call cannot respond. clearly into the microphone if enabled.
The broadcast initiator can also end the broadcast call. To
receive a call from a group of users, or to call a group of The call initiator can press to end the Broadcast
users, the radio must be configured as part of a group. Call.
5.6.2.1
Making Broadcast Calls
70
English
5.6.2.2 • Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak

Making Broadcast Calls Using the clearly into the microphone if enabled.
Contact List
The call initiator can press to end the Broadcast
Call.
1
Press to access the menu.
5.6.2.3
2 Receiving Broadcast Calls
Follow the procedure to receive a Broadcast Call on your
3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press radio.
When you receive a Broadcast Call:
to select.
4 Press the PTT button to make the call. • The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right
The green LED blinks. corner.
The first line displays the subscriber alias or ID. The • The first text line shows the caller alias.
second line displays Group Call and the Group
• The second text line displays the group call alias.
Call icon.

71
English
• Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds If the target radio is not available prior to setting up the
through the speaker. Private Call, the following occur:
NOTICE: • A tone sounds.
Recipient users are not allowed to Talkback during • The display shows a negative mini notice.
a Broadcast Call. The display shows Talkback
Prohibit. The Talkback Prohibit Tone plays • The radio returns to the menu prior to initiating the radio
momentarily if the PTT button is pressed during a presence check.
Broadcast Call. NOTICE:
Both the call initiator and recipient are able to
5.6.3
Private Call terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing .
A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another 5.6.3.1

individual radio.
Making Private Calls
There are two ways to set up a Private Call.
Your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private
• The first call type is called Off Air Call Set-Up (OACSU). Call. If this feature is not enabled, you hear a negative
OACSU sets up the call after performing a radio indicator tone when you initiate the call. If the target radio is
presence check and completes the call automatically. not available, a short tone sounds and the display show
• The second type is called Full Off Air Call Set-Up Party Not Available.
(FOACSU). FOACSU also sets up the call after
performing a radio presence check. However, FOACSU 1 Do one of the following:
calls require user acknowledgment to complete the call • Select a channel with the active subscriber alias
and allows the user to either Accept or Decline the call. or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 64.
The type of call is configured by the system administrator.
72
English
• Press the programmed One Touch Access Making a Private Call with a One Touch
button.
Call Button
2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily make a
The green LED lights up. The display shows the Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. This
Private Call icon, the subscriber alias, and call feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable
status. button press.
You can only have one alias or ID assigned to a One
3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch
clearly into the microphone if enabled. Call buttons programmed.
4 Release the PTT button to listen. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to
make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call
alias or ID.
responds.
2 Press the PTT button to make the call.
5 The call ends when there is no voice activity for a
The LED lights up solid green.
predetermined period. You will hear a short tone.The
display shows Call Ended. The display shows the Private Call alias or ID.
3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)
terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing . and speak clearly into the microphone.
5.6.3.2 4 Release the PTT button to listen.
73
English
When the target radio responds, the LED blinks 4

green. Press or to Radio Number. Press to
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined select.
period of time, the call ends.
terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing . • Enter the subscriber ID, and press to
proceed.
5.6.3.3 • Edit the previously dialed subscriber ID, and

Making Private Calls by Using the press to proceed.
Manual Dial
1 The green LED lights up. The display shows the
Press to access the menu. destination alias.
2
Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 7 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
3
Press or to Manual Dial. Press to 8 Release the PTT button to listen.
select. The green LED lights up when the target radio
responds. The display shows the transmitting user
alias or ID.
74
English
9 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, NOTICE:

you hear a short alert tone the moment the Depending on how your radio is configured, either
transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating OACSU or Full Off Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU),
the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT responding to Private Calls may or may not require
button to respond to the call. user acknowledgment.
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a For the OACSU configuration, your radio unmutes
predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display and the call connects automatically.
shows Call Ended.
5.6.3.5
Accepting Private Calls
5.6.3.4
When you receive Private Calls configured as Full Off Air
Receiving Private Calls Call Set-Up (FOACSU):
When you receive Private Calls configured as Off Air Call • The green LED blinks.
Set-Up (OACSU):
• The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner.
• The first text line shows the caller alias. 1 To accept a Private Call configured as FOACSU, do
• Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds one of the following:
• Press or to Accept and press to
answer a Private Call.
75
English
• Press the PTT button on any entry. • The first text line shows the caller alias.
To decline a Private Call configured as FOACSU, do
one of the following:
2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
• Press or to Reject and press to
3 Release the PTT button to listen. decline a Private Call.

predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display • Press to decline a Private Call.
shows Call Ended.
NOTICE: 5.6.4
Both the call initiator and recipient are able to All Calls
terminate an on-going Private Call by
An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio
pressing . on the site or every radio at a group of sites, depending on
system configuration.
An All Call is used to make important announcements,
5.6.3.6
requiring full attention from the user. The users on the
Declining Private Calls system cannot respond to an All Call.
When you receive Private Calls configured as Full Off Air
Call Set-Up (FOACSU):
76
English
Capacity Max supports Site All Call and Multi-site All Call. • Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
The system administrator may configure one or both of clearly into the microphone if enabled.
these in your radio. • Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak
NOTICE: clearly into the microphone if enabled.
Subscribers can support System-Wide All Calls but Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call.
Motorola Solutions infrastructure does not support
System-Wide All Calls.
The call initiator can press to end the All Call.
5.6.4.1
5.6.4.2
Making All Calls
Receiving All Calls
Your radio must be programmed for you to make an All
Call. When you receive an All Call, the following occur:
• A tone sounds.
1 Select a channel with the active All Call group alias
or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 64.
• The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right
2 Press the PTT button to make the call. corner.
The green LED lights up. The display shows the • The first text line shows the caller alias ID.
Group Call icon and either All Call, Site All • The second text line displays either All Call, Site
Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the type All Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the type
of configuration. of configuration.
• Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds
3 Do one of the following: through the speaker.
77
English
The radio returns to the screen before receiving the All Call • Ability to reject or accept a phone call
when the call ends. The Phone Call capability can be enabled by assigning and
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear setting up phone numbers on the system. Check with your
a short alert tone when the transmitting radio releases the system administrator to determine how your radio has been
PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to use. programmed.
You cannot respond to an All Call.
NOTICE: 5.6.5.1
The radio stops receiving the All Call if you switch to Making Phone Calls
a different channel while receiving the call. You are
not able to continue with any menu navigation or Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio.
editing until the call ends during an All Call.
5.6.5 5.6.5.2
Phone Calls Making Phone Calls with the
A Phone Call is a call in between an individual radio or a Programmable Button
group of radios and a telephone. Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls with the
Depending on how the radio is configured, the following programmable button.
features may or may not be made available:
1 Press the programmed Phone button to enter into
• Access code
the Phone Entry list.
• Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) tone
• De-access code
• Displaying of caller alias or ID on receiving a phone call
78
English
2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press 4

Press to end the call.
to select. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows
The green LED lights up. The display shows Phone Ending Phone Call.
Call icon, subscriber alias or ID, and call status. If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds
If the call-setup is successful: and the display shows Call Ended.
• The DTMF tone sounds. If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio
returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 3 and
• You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone
step 4 or wait for the telephone user to end the call.
user.
When you press PTT button while in the Phone
• The display shows Phone Call icon, subscriber
Contacts screen, a tone sounds and the display
alias or ID, Phone Call, and call status.
shows Press OK to Place Call.
If call-setup is unsuccessful:
• A tone sounds.
• The display shows Phone Call Failed.
• Your radio returns to the Access Code input
screen. If the access code was preconfigured in
the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen
you were on prior to initiating the call.
3 Press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT

button to listen.
79
English
When the telephone user ends the call, a tone 2

sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. Press or to Contacts. Press to select.
NOTICE: The display shows the entries in alphabetical order.
During channel access, press to dismiss

the call attempt and a tone sounds. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press
During the call, when you press One Touch to select.

Access button with the deaccess code
preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as If the selected entry is empty:
the input for extra digits, your radio attempts • A negative indicator tone sounds.
to end the call.
• The display shows Phone Call Invalid #.
5.6.5.3 4
Making Phone Calls by Using the Press or to Call Phone. Press to
select.
Contacts List
The display shows Access Code: if the access code
Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio by was not preconfigured.
using the Contacts list.
1 5
Press to access the menu. Enter the access code, and press to proceed.
The display shows Calling, subscriber alias or ID,
and the Phone Call icon.
If the call is successful:
80
English
• The DTMF Tone sounds. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits
requested by the call, your radio returns to the
• You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone
screen you were on prior to initiating the call.
user.
The DTMF Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the
• The display shows the subscriber alias or ID, the
previous screen.
Phone Call icon, and Phone Call.
If the call is unsuccessful:
9
• A tone sounds. Press to end the call.
• The display shows Phone Call Failed and
then, Access Code:. 10 If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter
the deaccess code when the display shows De-
• Your radio returns to the screen you were on
prior to initiating the call if the access code has Access Code:, and press to proceed.
been preconfigured in the Contacts list.
The radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF
Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone
6 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. Call.
If the call ends successfully:
The RSSI icon disappears.
• A tone sounds.
7 Release the PTT button to listen. • The display shows Call Ended.
If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone
8 Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by the Call screen. Repeat step 9 and step 10, or wait for
the telephone user to end the call. When you press
call, and press to proceed. the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen,
81
English
as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to 4

Place Call. Press or to Phone Number. Press to
When the telephone user ends the call, a tone select.
sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. The display shows Number: and a blinking cursor.
If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits
requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to 5
the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Enter the telephone number, and press to
proceed.
The display shows Access Code: and a blinking
5.6.5.4 cursor if the access code was not preconfigured.
Making Phone Calls by Using the
Manual Dial 6
Enter the access code, and press to proceed.
Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio by
using the manual dial. The green LED lights up. The display shows the
Phone Call icon, subscriber alias, and call status.
1 If the call is successful:
• The DTMF Tone sounds.
2 • You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone
Press or to Contacts. Press to select. user.
• The display shows subscriber alias and the
3
Phone Call icon.
Press or to Manual Dial. Press to
select. If the call is unsuccessful:
82
English
• A tone sounds. • If the deaccess code was not preconfigured,

enter the deaccess code when the display shows
• The display shows Phone Call Failed and
then, Access Code:.
De-Access Code:, and press to proceed.
• Your radio returns to the screen you were on The radio returns to the previous screen.
before initiating the call if the access code has
been preconfigured in the Contacts list.
button. If the entry for the One Touch Access
button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds.
7 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows
Ending Phone Call.
9 Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by the • A tone sounds.
• The display shows Call Ended.
call, and press to proceed.
If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone
If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits Call screen. Repeat step 10, or wait for the
requested by the call, your radio returns to the telephone user to end the call.
screen you were on before initiating the call.
The DTMF Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the
previous screen. 5.6.5.5
Responding to Phone Calls as All Calls
10
Press to end the call. When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, the receiving
radio is unable to talkback or respond. The recipient user is
11 Do one of the following: also not allowed to end the All Call.
83
English
When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call: • Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds
• The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top right
corner.
1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
• The display shows either All Call, Site All Call, or
Multi Site Call depending on the type of 2 Release the PTT button to listen.
configuration and Phone Call.
• The green LED blinks. 3
through the speaker. NOTICE:
Your radio is not able to terminate a phone
call as a group call. The telephone user must
5.6.5.6
end the call. The recipient user is only
Responding to Phone Calls as Group allowed to talk back during the call.
Calls The display shows Ending Phone Call.
Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Group If the call ends successfully:
Calls on your radio. • A tone sounds.
When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call: • The display shows Call Ended.
• The display shows the Phone Call icon and Phone If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone
Call. Call screen. Repeat step 3 or wait for the telephone
• The green LED blinks. user to end the call.
84
English
5.6.5.7 NOTICE:
Responding to Phone Calls as Private Your radio is not able to terminate a phone
call as a group call. The telephone user must
Calls end the call. The recipient user is only
Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Private allowed to talk back during the call.
Calls on your radio. The display shows Ending Phone Call.
When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call: If the call ends successfully:
• The display shows the Phone Call icon and Phone • A tone sounds.
Call. • The display shows Call Ended.
• The green LED blinks. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone
• Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds Call screen. Repeat step 3 or wait for the telephone
through the speaker. user to end the call.

5.6.6
2 Release the PTT button to listen. Initiating Transmit Interrupt
3
Press to end the call. An ongoing call is interrupted, when you perform the
following actions:
• Press the Voice PTT button.
• Press the Emergency button.
The receiving radio displays Call Interrupted.
85
English
5.6.7 The Voice Interrupt feature significantly improves the

Call Preemption probability of successfully delivering a new transmission to
the intended parties when a call is in progress.
Call Preemption allows a radio to stop any in-progress
Voice Interrupt is accessible to the user only if this feature
voice transmission and initiate a priority transmission.
has been set up in the radio. Check with your dealer or
With the Call Preemption feature, the system interrupts and system administrator for more information.
preempts ongoing calls in instances where trunked
channels are unavailable. 5.6.8.1
Higher priority calls such as an Emergency Call or an All Enabling Voice Interrupt
Call preempt the transmitting radio to accommodate the
higher priority call. If no other Radio Frequency (RF) Follow the procedure to initiate Voice Interrupt on your
channels are available, an Emergency Call preempts an All radio.
Call as well. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this
feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for
5.6.8 more information.
Voice Interrupt
1 To interrupt the transmission during an on-going call,
Voice Interrupt allows the user to shut down an in-progress press the PTT button.
voice transmission.
On the interrupted radio, the display shows Call
This feature uses reverse channel signaling to stop the in- Interrupted. The radio sounds a negative indicator
progress voice transmission of a radio, if the interrupting tone until the PTT button is released.
radio is configured to Voice Interrupt, and the transmitting
radio is configured to be Voice Call Interruptible. The 2 Wait for acknowledgment.
interrupting radio is then allowed to make a voice
transmission to the participant in the stopped call. If successful:
86
English
• A positive indicator tone sounds. Call Queue

If unsuccessful:
When there are no resources available to process a call,
• A negative indicator tone sounds. Call Queue enables the call request to be placed in the
system queue for the next available resources.
3 Do one of the following: You hear a Call Queue Tone after pressing the PTT button
and radio screen displays Call In Queue indicating that
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak the radio has entered Call Queue State. The PTT button
clearly into the microphone if enabled. may be released once the Call Queue Tone is heard.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak If the call setup is successful, the following occur:
5.7 • If enabled, the Talk Permit Tone sounds.
Advanced Features • The display shows the call type icon, ID or alias.
• The radio user has up to 4 seconds to press the PTT
This chapter explains the operations of the features button to begin voice transmission.
available in your radio.
If the call setup is unsuccessful, the following occur:
Your dealer or system administrator may have customized
• If enabled, the Reject Tone sounds.
your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer
or system administrator for more information. • The display shows the failure notice screen
momentarily.
5.7.1 • The call is terminated and the radio exits the call setup.
87
English
5.7.2 Call Priority High icon appears at the top of your radio
Priority Call display.
Voice Announcement sounds Next Call: High Priority.
Priority Call allows the system to preempt one of the
ongoing non-priority calls and initiate the requested high Normal Priority
priority call when all channels are busy. The radio displays Next Call: Normal Priority.
With all channels occupied with high priority calls, the Call Priority High icon disappears.
system does not preempt any calls, and places the Voice Announcement sounds Next Call: Normal Priority.
requesting high-priority call into call queue. If the system
fails to place the requesting high-priority call into call
queue, it declares failure. 5.7.3
The default settings for Priority Call are preconfigured.

Talkgroup Scan
Press the programmable button to toggle between normal This feature allows your radio to monitor and join calls for
and high priority level. When you use the following groups defined by a Receive Group List.
features, the call priority level reverts automatically to the
When scan is enabled, your radio unmutes to any member
preconfigured setting.
in its Receive Group List.
• All voice calls
When scan is disabled, your radio does not receive
• DMR Ⅲ Text Message/Text Message transmission from any members of the Receive Group List,
• Job Ticket except for All Call, Permanent Talkgroup, and the selected
Talkgroup.
• Remote monitor
The following are the types of Priority Call:
High Priority
The radio displays Next Call: High Priority.
88
English
5.7.3.1 If scan is disabled:

Turning Talkgroup Scan On or Off • The display shows Scan Off.
Follow the procedure to turn Talkgroup Scan on or off on • The Scan icon disappears.
your radio.
• The LED turns off.
1 • A negative indicator tone sounds.
5.7.4
2 Receive Group List
Press or to Scan. Press to select.
Receive Group List is a feature that allows you to create
3 Do one of the following: and assign members on the talkgroup scan list.
This list is created when your radio is programmed and it
• Press or to Turn On. Press to determines which groups can be scanned. Your radio can
select. support a maximum of 16 members in this list.
If your radio has been programmed to edit the scan list, you
• Press or to Turn Off. Press to can:
select. • Add/remove talkgroups.
If scan is enabled: • Add, remove, and/or edit priority for talkgroups. Refer to
Editing Priority for a Talkgroup on page 91.
• The display shows Scan On and Scan icon.
• Add, remove, and/or edit affiliation talkgroups. Refer to
• The yellow LED blinks.
Adding Talkgroup Affiliation on page 92 and Removing
• A positive indicator tone sounds. Talkgroup Affiliation on page 93.
89
English
• Replace the existing scan list with a new scan list. Priority 1 (P1) and Priority 2 (P2). P1 has higher priority
than P2. In Capacity Max system, the radio receives
If a talkgroup is programmed as Permanent Talkgroup, you
transmission according to the priority order below:
are unable to edit the talkgroup from the scan list.
1 Emergency Call for P1 Talkgroup
IMPORTANT:
To add member into the list, the talkgroup must first 2 Emergency Call for P2 Talkgroup
be configured in the radio. 3 Emergency Call for Non-priority Talkgroups in the
NOTICE: Receive Group List
Receive Group List is programmed by the system 4 All Call
administrator. Check with your dealer or system
administrator for more information. 5 P1 Talkgroup Call
6 P2 Talkgroup Call
5.7.5 7 Non-priority Talkgroups in the Receive Group List
Priority Monitor See Editing Priority for a Talkgroup on page 91 for more
The Priority Monitor feature allows the radio to information on how to add, remove, and/or edit the priority
automatically receive transmission from talkgroups with of the talkgroups in the scan list.
higher priority even when radio is in a talkgroup call. NOTICE:
Radio leaves lower priority talkgroup call for higher priority This feature is programmed by the system
talkgroup call. administrator. Check with your dealer or system
NOTICE:
This feature can only be accessed when Talkgroup
Scan feature is enabled.
Priority Monitor feature applies only to members in the
Receive Group List. There are two Priority Talkgroups:
90
English
5.7.5.1 6 Press or to the required priority level. Press

Editing Priority for a Talkgroup
to select.
In the Talkgroup Scan Menu, you can view or edit the
priority of a talkgroup. If another talkgroup has been assigned to Priority 1
or Priority 2, you can choose to overwrite the current
1 priority. When the display shows Overwrite
Press to access the menu. Existing?, press or to the following
options:
2
• No to return to the previous step.
• Yes to overwrite.
3 The display shows positive mini notice before
Press or to View/Edit List. Press to returning to the previous screen. The priority icon
select. appears beside the talkgroup.
4 Press or to the required talkgroup. Press

5.7.6
to select.
Multi-Talkgroup Affiliation
The current priority is indicated by a Priority 1 or
Priority 2 icon beside the talkgroup. Your radio can be configured for up to seven talkgroups at
a site.
5 Of the 16 talkgroups in the Receive Group List, up to seven
Press or to Edit Priority. Press to talkgroups can be assigned as affiliation talkgroups. The
select. selected talkgroup and the priority talkgroups are
automatically affiliated.
91
English
5.7.6.1 6 Do one of the following:

Adding Talkgroup Affiliation
Follow the procedure to add a talkgroup affiliation. • Press or to On. Press to select.
1 • Press or to Off. Press to select.

When On is selected, appears beside the
2 talkgroup ID or alias.
If affiliation is successful, the display shows beside the
3 selected talkgroup ID or alias.
Press or to View/Edit List. Press to If affiliation is unsuccessful, remains beside the talkgroup
select. ID or alias.
4 Press or to the required talkgroup ID or NOTICE:
The radio displays List Full when a maximum of
alias. Press to select. seven talkgroups are selected for affiliation in the
scan list. To select a new talkgroup for affiliation,
The affiliation status is displayed at the View/Edit remove an existing affiliated talkgroup to make way
List. The display shows beside the selected for the new addition. See Removing Talkgroup
talkgroup ID or alias. Affiliation on page 93 for more information.
5
Press or to Edit Affiliation. Press
to select.
92
English
5.7.6.2 5
Removing Talkgroup Affiliation Press or to Edit Affiliation. Press
to select.
When the affiliation list is full and you want to select a new
talkgroup for affiliation, remove an existing affiliated
6
talkgroup to make way for the new addition. Follow the
Press or to Off. Press to select.
procedure to remove a talkgroup affiliation.
When Off is selected, disappears from beside the
1 talkgroup ID or alias.
2 5.7.7
Press or to Scan. Press to select. Talkback
3 The Talkback feature allows you to respond to a
Press or to View/Edit List. Press to transmission while scanning.
select. If your radio scans into a call from the selectable group
scan list, and if the PTT button is pressed during the
4 Press or to the required talkgroup ID or scanned call, the operation of the radio depends on
whether Talkback was enabled or disabled during radio
alias. Press to select. programming. Check with your dealer or system
The affiliation status is displayed at the View/Edit administrator for more information.
List. The display shows beside the selected Talkback Disabled
talkgroup ID or alias. The radio leaves the scanned call and attempts to
transmit on the contact for the currently selected
channel position. After the Call Hang Time on the
93
English
currently selected contact expires, the radio returns to your Bluetooth-enabled device. For high degree of
the home channel and starts the Scan Hang Time reliability, Motorola Solutions recommends to not separate
Timer. The radio resumes group scan after its Scan the radio and the accessory.
Hang Time Timer expires. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality
Talkback Enabled start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this
If the PTT button is pressed during the Group Hang problem, position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device
Time of the scanned call, the radio attempts to transmit closer to each other (within the 10 m defined range) to re-
to the scanned group. establish clear audio reception. The Bluetooth function of
your radio has maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the
NOTICE:
10 m range.
If you scan into a call for a group that is not
assigned to a channel position in the currently Your radio can support up to three simultaneous Bluetooth
selected zone and the call ends, switch to the connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique
proper zone and then select the channel position of types. For example, a headset, a scanner, a sensor device,
the group to talk back to that group. and a PTT-Only Device (POD).
Refer to the user manual of your respective Bluetooth-
5.7.8 enabled device for more details on the full capabilities of
Bluetooth® your Bluetooth-enabled device.
This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth- Your radio connects to the Bluetooth-enabled device within
enabled device (accessory) through a Bluetooth range with either the strongest signal strength, or to one
connection. Your radio supports both Motorola Solutions which it has connected to before in a prior session. Do not
and Commercially available Off-The-Shelf (COTS) turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or press the home
Bluetooth-enabled devices.
back button during the finding and connecting
Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 m (32ft) line of operation as this cancels the operation.
sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and
94
English
5.7.8.1 5.7.8.2
Turning Bluetooth On and Off Connecting to Bluetooth Devices
Follow the procedure to turn Bluetooth on and off. Follow the procedure to connect to Bluetooth devices.
Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in
1 pairing mode.
1
2
Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select.
2
3
Press or to My Status. Press to select.
The display shows On and Off. The current status is 3
indicated by a . Press or to Devices. Press to select.

• Press or to the required device. Press
• Press or to On. Press to select. The
to select.
display shows beside On.
• Press or to Find Devices to locate
• Press or to Off. Press to select. available devices. Press or to the
The display shows beside Off.
required device. Press to select.
95
English
5 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices in

Press or to Connect. Press to select.
Discoverable Mode
Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require
Follow the procedure to connect to Bluetooth devices in
additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to the
discoverable mode.
user manual of your Bluetooth-enabled device.
The display shows Connecting to <Device>. Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in
pairing mode.
Wait for acknowledgment.
1
If successful:
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows <Device> Connected and the 2
Bluetooth Connected icon. Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select.
• The display shows beside the connected device. 3

If unsuccessful: Press or to Find Me. Press to select.
The radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-
• A negative indicator tone sounds. enabled devices for a programmed duration. This is
• The display shows Connecting Failed. called Discoverable Mode.

5.7.8.3 If successful:
• The display shows <Device> Connected and the
Bluetooth Connected icon.
96
English

If unsuccessful: Press or to Disconnect. Press to
select.
The display shows Disconnecting from
• The display shows Connecting Failed. <Device>.
5.7.8.4 Wait for acknowledgment.

Disconnecting from Bluetooth Devices • A tone sounds.
Follow the procedure to disconnect from Bluetooth devices. • The display shows <Device> Disconnected and the
Bluetooth Connected icon disappears.
1
Press to access the menu. • The disappears beside the connected device.
2 5.7.8.5
Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. Switching Audio Route between
3 Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth
Press or to Devices. Press to select. Device
Follow the procedure to toggle audio routing between
4
internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth device.
Press or to the required device. Press
to select.
Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch
button.
The display shows one of the following results:

97
English
• A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio to 5

Radio. Press or to View Details. Press to
• A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio to select.
Bluetooth.
5.7.8.7
5.7.8.6 Deleting Device Name
Viewing Device Details
You can remove a disconnected device from the list of
Follow the procedure to view device details on your radio. Bluetooth-enabled devices.
1 1
Press to access the menu. Press to access the menu.
2 2
Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select.
3 3
Press or to Devices. Press to select. Press or to Devices. Press to select.
4 4
Press or to the required device. Press Press or to the required device. Press
to select. to select.
98
English
5 5 Press or to increase or to decrease values.

Press or to Delete. Press to select.
The display shows Device Deleted. Press to select.
5.7.8.8 5.7.8.9
Adjusting Bluetooth Mic Gain Values Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable
Allows control of microphone gain value in connected Mode
The Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode must be
enabled by the dealer or system administrator.
1
Press to access the menu. NOTICE:
If enabled, Bluetooth is not displayed in the Menu
2 and you cannot use any Bluetooth programmable
Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. button features.
Other Bluetooth-enabled devices can locate your radio, but
3 the devices cannot connect to the radio. The Permanent
Press or to BT Mic Gain. Press to Bluetooth Discoverable Mode enables dedicated devices to
select. use your radio position in the process of Bluetooth-based
location.
4 Press or to the BT Mic Gain type and the
current values. To edit values, press to select.
99
English
5.7.9 c. Press or to Indoor Location and press

Indoor Location
to select.
NOTICE:
Indoor Location feature is applicable for models with
the latest software and hardware. Check with your d. Press to turn on Indoor Location.
dealer or system administrator for more information. The display shows Indoor Location On. You
Indoor Location is use to keep track of the location of radio hear a positive indicator tone.
users. When Indoor Location is activated, the radio is in a One of the following scenarios occurs.
limited discoverable mode. Dedicated beacons are used to • If successful, the Indoor Location Available
locate the radio and determine its position. icon appears on the Home screen display.
• If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning
5.7.9.1 On Failed. You hear a negative indicator
Turning Indoor Location On or Off tone.
You can turn on or turn off Indoor Location by performing
one of the following actions.
e. Press to turn off Indoor Location.
• Access this feature through the menu. The display shows Indoor Location Off. You
hear a positive indicator tone.
a. Press to access the menu. One of the following scenarios occurs.
• If successful, the Indoor Location Available
b. Press or to Bluetooth and press to icon disappears on the Home screen display.
select.
100
English
• If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning • If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning
Off Failed. You hear a negative indicator Off Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a
tone. negative indicator tone.
• Access this feature by using the programmed button.

5.7.9.2
a. Long press the programmed Indoor Location
button to turn on Indoor Location. Accessing Indoor Location Beacons
The display shows Indoor Location On. You Information
hear a positive indicator tone. Follow the procedure to access Indoor Location beacons
One of the following scenarios occurs. information.
icon appears on the Home screen display. 1
On Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a
2
negative indicator tone.
Press or to Bluetooth and press to
select.
b. Press the programmed Indoor Location button
to turn off Indoor Location. 3 Press or to Indoor Location and press
The display shows Indoor Location Off. You
hear a positive indicator tone. to select.
One of the following scenarios occurs.
icon disappears on the Home screen display.
101
English
4 3
Press or to Beacons and press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
select. select.
The display shows the beacons information. 4

Press or to Site Roaming. Press to
5.7.10 select.
Multi-Site Controls
5
These features are applicable when your current radio Press or to Active Search. Press to
channel is configured to a Capacity Max system. select.
A tone sounds. The green LED blinks. The display
5.7.10.1 shows Finding Site.
Enabling Manual Site Search
If the radio finds a new site, your radio shows the following
1 Perform one of the following actions: indications:
• Press the programmed Manual Site Roam • A positive tone sounds.
button. Skip the following steps. • The LED extinguishes.
• The display shows Site <Alias> Found.
If the radio fails to find a new site, your radio shows the
2 following indications:
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. • A negative tone sounds.
• The LED extinguishes.
102
English
• The display shows Out of Range. • The display shows Site Unlocked.
If a new site is within range, but the radio is unable to
connect to it, your radio shows the following indications:
5.7.10.3
• A negative tone sounds.
Accessing Neighbor Sites List
This feature allows the user to check the adjacent sites list
• The display shows Channel Busy.
of the current home site. Follow the procedure to access
the Neighbor Sites List:
5.7.10.2
Site Lock On/Off 1
When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition
2
to the current site.
Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
Press the programmed Site Lock button. 3
If the Site Lock function is toggled on: Press or to Radio Info. Press to
• You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the select.
radio has locked to the current site.
4
• The display shows Site Locked. Press or to Neighbor Sites. Press to
If the Site Lock function is toggled off: select.

radio is unlocked.
103
English
5.7.11 Setting New Home Channels

Home Channel Reminder When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can set a
This feature provides a reminder when the radio is not set new home channel.
to the home channel for a period of time.
If this feature is enabled when your radio is not set to the
home channel for a period of time, the following occurs • Press the Reset Home Channel programmable
periodically: button to set the current channel as the new
Home Channel. Skip the following steps.
• The Home Channel Reminder tone and announcement
The first line of the display shows the channel
sound.
alias and the second line shows New Home Ch.
• The display shows Non Home Channel.
5.7.11.1
Muting the Home Channel Reminder 2
When the Home Channel Reminder sounds, you can
temporarily mute the reminder.
3
Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
Press the programmed Silence Home Channel
select.
Reminder button.
The display shows HCR Silenced. 4
Press or to Home Channel. Press to
select.
5.7.11.2
104
English
5 Press or to the desired new home channel Initiating Remote Monitor

Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your
alias. Press to select.
radio.
The display shows beside the selected home
channel alias. 1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button.
2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press

5.7.12
Remote Monitor to select.
This feature is used to turn on the microphone of a target The display shows a transitional mini notice,
radio with a subscriber alias or ID. You can use this feature indicating the request is in progress. The green LED
to remotely monitor any audible activity surrounding the lights up.
target radio.
Both your radio and the target radio must be programmed 3 Wait for acknowledgment.
to allow you to use this feature. If successful:
If initiated, the green LED blinks once on the target radio. • A positive indicator tone sounds.
This feature automatically stops after a programmed
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
duration or when there is any user operation on the target
radio. • The audio from the monitored radio starts playing
for a programmed duration, and the display
5.7.12.1 shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an
alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off.
If unsuccessful:
105
English
• A negative indicator tone sounds. 4

• The display shows a negative mini notice. Press or to Remote Mon.. Press to
select.
The display shows a transitional mini notice,
5.7.12.2 indicating the request is in progress. The green LED
lights up.
Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the
Contacts List 5 Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
radio by using the Contacts list.
1 • The display shows a positive mini notice.
• The audio from the monitored radio starts playing
2 for a programmed duration, and the display
Press or to Contacts. Press to select. shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an
3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press If unsuccessful:
to select.
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
106
English
5.7.12.3
Initiating Remote Monitors by Using • Edit the previously dialed ID, and press to
proceed.
the Manual Dial
Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your 6
radio by using the manual dial. Press or to Remote Mon.. Press to
select.
1 The display shows a transitional mini notice,
Press to access the menu. indicating the request is in progress. The green LED
lights up.
2
7 Wait for acknowledgment.
3 If successful:
Press or to Manual Dial. Press to • A positive indicator tone sounds.
select.
4 • The audio from the monitored radio starts playing
Press or to Radio Number. Press to for a programmed duration, and the display
select. shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an
If unsuccessful:
• Enter the subscriber alias or ID, and press • A negative indicator tone sounds.
to proceed. • The display shows a negative mini notice.
107
English
5.7.13 • Call Alias

Contacts Settings • Call ID
Contacts provides address book capabilities on your radio. NOTICE:
Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you
initiate a call. The entries are alphabetically sorted. can make privacy-enabled Group Calls, Private
Calls, All Calls, and Phone Calls on that channel.
Each entry, depending on context, associates with the
Only target radios with the same Privacy Key, or the
different call types: Group Call, Private Call, Broadcast Call,
same Key Value and Key ID as your radio are able
Site All Call, Multi-site All Call, PC Call, or Dispatch Call.
to decrypt the transmission.
PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They are only
available with the applications. Refer to the data 5.7.13.1
applications documentation for further details.
Assigning Entries to Programmable
Contacts menu allows you to assign each entry to a
programmable number key or more on a keypad Number Keys
microphone. If an entry is assigned to a number key, your Follow the procedure to assign entries to programmable
radio can perform a quick dial on the entry. number keys on your radio.
NOTICE:
You see a checkmark before each number key that 1
is assigned to an entry. If the checkmark is before Press to access the menu.
Empty, you have not assign a number key to the
entry. 2
Each entry within Contacts displays the following
information:
• Call Type
108
English
3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press 5.7.13.2

Removing Associations Between
to select. Entries and Programmable Number
4 Keys
Press or to Program Key. Press to Follow the procedure to remove the associations between
select. entries and programmable number keys on your radio.
5 Do one of the following: 1 Do one of the following:

• If the desired number key has not been assigned • Long press the programmed number key to the
to an entry, press or to the desired required alias or ID. Proceed to step 4.
number key. Press to select.

• If the desired number key has been assigned to
an entry, the display shows The Key is 2
Already Assigned and then, the first text line Press or to Contacts. Press to select.
shows Overwrite?. Do one of the following:
Press or to Yes. Press to select.
The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and to select.
the display shows Contact Saved and a positive
mini notice. 4
Press or to Program Key. Press to
Press or to No to return to the previous select.
step.
109
English
5 2
Press or to Empty. Press to select. Press or to Contacts. Press to select.
The first text line shows Clear from all keys.
3
Press or to New Contact. Press to
6 select.
NOTICE: 4 Press or to select contact type Radio
When an entry is deleted, the association
between the entry and its programmed Contact or Phone Contact. Press to select.
number key(s) is removed.
5 Enter the contact number with the keypad, and press
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows
Contact Saved. to proceed.
The screen automatically returns to the previous
menu. 6 Enter the contact name with the keypad, and press
to proceed.
5.7.13.3
Adding New Contacts 7 Press or to the required ringer type. Press
Follow the procedure to add new contacts on your radio. to select.
1 A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows

Press to access the menu. a positive mini notice.
110
English
5.7.14 5
Call Indicator Settings Press or to Call Ringers. Press to
select.
This feature allows you to configure call or text message
ringing tones. 6
Press or to Private Call. Press to
5.7.14.1 select.
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers
for Private Calls
1 • Press or to the required tone. Press
Press to access the menu. to select.
The display shows and the selected tone.
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. • Press or to Off. Press to select.
If the ringing tones were earlier enabled, the
3 display shows beside Off.
select. If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the
display does not show beside Off.
4
Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press to
select.
111
English
5.7.14.2 6
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers Press or to Text Message. Press to
select.
for Text Messages
The display shows and the current tone.
1
Press to access the menu. 7 Do one of the following:
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. • Press or to the required tone. Press
to select.
3 The display shows and the selected tone.
select. • Press or to Off. Press to select.
4
display shows beside Off.
select. If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the
5
Press or to Call Ringers. Press to
select.
112
English
5.7.14.3 7 Do one of the following:

for Call Alerts • Press or to the required tone. Press
to select.
1 The display shows and the selected tone.
• Press or to Off. Press to select.
2 If the ringing tones were earlier enabled, the
3 If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the
Press or to Radio Settings. Press to display does not show beside Off.
select.
4 5.7.14.4
Press or to Tones/Alert. Press to Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers
select. for Telemetry Status with Text
5 Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers
Press or to Call Ringers. Press to for telemetry status with text on your radio.
select.
1
6 Press to access the menu.
Press or to Call Alert. Press to
select.
113
English
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. • Press or to Turn Off. Press to
select.
3 The display shows Telemetry Ringer Off and
Press or to Radio Settings. Press to a appears left of Turn Off.
select.
5.7.14.5
4
Press or to Tones/Alert. Press to Assigning Ring Styles
select. The radio can be programmed to sound one of eleven
predefined ringing tones when receiving a Private Call, a
5 Call Alert, or a Text Message from a particular contact.The
Press or to Call Ringers. Press to radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate through
select. the list.
6 1
Press or to Telemetry. Press to select. Press to access the menu.
The current tone is indicated by a .
2
The entries are alphabetically sorted.
• Press or to the preferred tone. Press
to select. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press

The display shows Tone <Number> Selected
and a appears left of the selected tone. to select.
114
English
4 displays the All Tone Mute icon. If All Tones status is

Press or to View/Edit. Press to select. enabled, the related ring alert type is displayed.
The radio vibrates once if it is a momentary ring style. The
5 radio vibrates repetitively if it is a repetitive ring style. When
Press until display shows Ringer menu set to Ring and Vibrate, the radio sounds a specific ring
A indicates the current selected tone. tone if there is any incoming radio transaction (for example,
Call Alert or Message). It sounds like a positive indicator
tone or missed call.
6
Press or to the required tone. Press to For radios with batteries that support the vibrate feature
select. and are attached to a vibrating belt clip, the available Ring
Alert Type options are Silent, Ring, Vibrate, and Ring and
The display shows a positive mini notice. Vibrate.
For radios with batteries that do not support the vibrate
feature and are not attached to a vibrating belt clip, Ring
5.7.14.6 Alert Type is automatically set to Ring. The available Ring
Selecting a Ring Alert Type Alert Type options are Silent and Ring.
NOTICE: You can select a Ring Alert Type by performing one of the
The programmed Ring Alert Type button is following actions.
assigned by your dealer or system administrator.
• Press the programmed Ring Alert Type button to
Check with your dealer or system administrator to
access the Ring Alert Type menu.
determine how your radio has been programmed.
You can program the radio calls to one predetermined a. Press or to Ring, Vibrate, Ring &
vibrate call. If All Tones status is disabled, the radio
Vibrate or Silent and press to select.
115
English
• Access this feature through the menu. Configuring Vibrate Style

NOTICE:
a. Press to access the menu.
The programmed Vibrate Style button is assigned
by your dealer or system administrator. Check with
b. Press or to Utilities and press to your dealer or system administrator to determine
select. how your radio has been programmed.
c. Press or to Radio Settings and press Vibrate Style is enabled when the Vibrating Belt Clip is
attached to the radio with a battery that supports the vibrate
to select. feature.
d. Press or to Tones/Alerts and press You can configure the vibrate style by performing one of
the following actions.
to select.
• Press the programmed Vibrate Style button to
e. Press or to Ring Alert Type and press access the Vibrate Style menu.
to select. a. Press or to Short, Medium, or Long and
f. Press or to Ring, Vibrate, Ring & press to select.

• Access this feature via the menu.
5.7.14.7 a. Press to access the menu.
b. Press or to Utilities and press to

select.
116
English
c. Press or to Radio Settings and press Call Log Features

to select. Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered,
and missed Private Calls. The call log feature is used to
d. Press or to Tones/Alerts and press view and manage recent calls.
to select. Missed Call Alerts may be included in the call logs,

depending on the system configuration on your radio. You
e. Press or to Vibrate Style and press can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:
• Store Alias or ID to Contacts
to select.
• Delete Call
f. Press or to Short, Medium, or Long and
• View Details
press to select.
5.7.15.1
5.7.14.8 Viewing Recent Calls
Escalating Alarm Tone Volume
1
The radio can be programmed to continually alert, when a
radio call remains unanswered. This is done by
automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time.
2
This feature is known as Escalert. Follow the procedure to
Press or to Call Log. Press to select.
escalate alarm tone volume on your radio.
3 Press or to the preferred list. The options are
5.7.15 Missed, Answered, and Outgoing lists.
117
English

Press to select.
The display shows the most recent entry. to select.
5
4 Press or to view the list.
Press or to Store. Press to select.
You can start a call with the alias or ID the display is
The display shows a blinking cursor.
currently showing by pressing the PTT button.
6 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias.

5.7.15.2
Storing Aliases or IDs from the Call List Press to select.
Follow the procedure to store aliases or IDs on your radio You can store an ID without an alias.
from the Call list. The display shows a positive mini notice.
1
Press to access the menu. 5.7.15.3
2
Deleting Calls from the Call List
Press or to Call Log. Press to select. Follow the procedure to delete calls on your radio from the
Call list.
3
Press or to the required list. Press to 1
select. Press to access the menu.
118
English
2
Press or to Call Log. Press to select. • Press or to No. Press to select.
The radio returns to the previous screen.
3
Press or to the required list. Press to 5.7.15.4
select.
Viewing Details from the Call List
If the list is empty:
Follow the procedure to view details on your radio from the
• A tone sounds. Call list.
• The display shows List Empty.
1
2
to select. Press or to Call Log. Press to select.
5 3
Press or to Delete Entry?. Press to Press or to the required list. Press to
select. select.
6 Do one of the following: 4 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press
• Press to select Yes to delete the entry. to select.

The display shows Entry Deleted.
119
English
5 • The radio is configured to allow you to press the PTT

Press or to View Details. Press to button and continue with other Talkgroup
select. communication. Pressing the PTT button on the call
alert entry will not allow the user to respond to the call
The display shows the details. initiator. The user must navigate to the Missed Call Log
option at the Call Log menu and respond to the Call
Alert from there.
5.7.16
An Off Air Call Set-Up (OACSU) private call allows the user
Call Alert Operation to respond immediately while a Full Off Air Call Set-Up
Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user (FOACSU) private call requires user acknowledgment for
to call you back when they are able to do so. the call. OACSU type calls are therefore, recommended
being used for the Call Alert feature. See Private Call on
This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs only page 72.
and is accessible through the menu by using Contacts or a
programmed One Touch Access button.
5.7.16.1
In Capacity Max, the Call Alert feature allows a radio user
or a dispatcher to send an alert to another radio user
Making Call Alerts
requesting the radio user to call back the initiating radio Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your radio.
user when available. Voice communication is not involved
in this feature. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button.
The Call Alert Operation can be configured by the dealer or The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber
the system administrator in two ways: alias or ID. The green LED lights up.
• The radio is configured to allow you to press the PTT
button to respond directly to the call initiator by making a
Private Call.
120
English
2 Wait for acknowledgment. 4

If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, the Press or to Call Alert. Press to
display shows a positive mini notice. select.
If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received, the The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber
display shows a negative mini notice. alias or ID. The green LED lights up.

5.7.16.2 • If the acknowledgment is received, the display
Making Call Alerts by Using the shows a positive mini notice.
Contacts List • If the acknowledgment is not received, the
display shows a negative mini notice.
1
5.7.16.3
2 Responding to Call Alerts
When you receive a Call Alert:
3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press • A repetitive tone sounds.
to select. • The yellow LED blinks.
121
English
• The display shows the notification list listing a Call Alert The Caller Aliases list can store up to 500 Caller Aliases of
with the alias or ID of the calling radio. transmitting radio. You can view or make Private Calls from
the Caller Aliases list. When you turn off your radio, the
Depending on the configuration by your dealer or history of receiving Caller Aliases is removed from the
system administrator, you can respond to a Call Alert Caller Aliases list.
by doing one of the following:
• Press the PTT button and respond with a Private 5.7.17.1
Call directly to the caller. Viewing the Caller Aliases List
• Press the PTT button to continue normal You can access the Caller Aliases list to view the
talkgroup communication. transmitting Caller Alias details.
The Call Alert is moved to the Missed Call option
at the Call Log menu. You can respond to the 1
caller from the Missed Called log. Press to access the menu.
See Notification List on page 159 and Call Log Features on 2
page 117 for more information. Press or to Caller Aliases. Press to
select.
5.7.17
Dynamic Caller Alias 3
Press or to the preferred list. Press to
This feature allows a Caller Alias to be configured in the select.
radio.
When in a call, the receiving radio displays the Caller Alias 4
of the transmitting radio. Press or to View Details. Press to
select.
122
English
5.7.17.2 When Mute Mode is initiated, all audio indicators are muted
Initiating Private Call From the Caller except higher priority features such as emergency
operations.
Aliases List
When Mute Mode is exited, your radio resumes playing
You can access the Caller Aliases list to initiate Private ongoing tones and audio transmissions.
Call.
IMPORTANT:
You can only enable either Face Down or Man
1
Down one at a time. Both features cannot be
enabled together.
2
Press or to Caller Aliases. Press to 5.7.18.1
select. Turning On Mute Mode
3 Press Follow the procedure to turn on Mute Mode.
or to the <required Caller
Alias>.
Do one of the following:
4 To call, press and hold the PTT button. • Access this feature by using the programmed
Mute Mode button.
5.7.18 • Access this feature by placing the radio in a face-

down position momentarily.
Mute Mode
Depending on radio model, the Face Down feature
Mute Mode provides an option to silence all audio can be enabled either through the radio menu or by
indicators on your radio.
123
English
your system administrator. Check with your dealer or Setting Mute Mode Timer
system administrator for more information.
Mute Mode feature can be enabled for a pre-configured
IMPORTANT: amount of time by setting the Mute Mode Timer. The timer
User can only enable either Man Down or duration is configured in the radio menu and can range
Face Down at a time. Both features cannot between 0.5–6 hours. Mute Mode is exited once the timer
be enabled together. expires.
NOTICE: If the timer is left at 0, the radio remains in Mute mode for
Face Down feature is applicable to DP4601e an indefinite period until the radio is moved to a face-up
only. position or the programmed Mute Mode button is pressed.
The following occurs when Mute mode is enabled: NOTICE:
• Positive Indicator Tone sounds. Face Down feature is applicable to DP4601e only.
• Display shows Mute Mode On.

1
• The red LED light starts blinking and remains blinking Press to access the menu.
until Mute Mode is exited.
• Display shows Mute Mode icon on home screen. 2
• Radio is muted.
• Mute Mode Timer begins counting down the duration 3
that is configured. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
select.
5.7.18.2
124
English
4 • Negative Indicator Tone sounds.

Press or to Mute Timer. Press to • Display shows Mute Mode Off.
select.
• The blinking red LED turns off.
5 Press or to edit the numeric value of each • Mute Mode icon disappears from home screen.
• Your radio unmutes and speaker state is restored.
digit, and press .
• If the timer has not expired, Mute mode timer is
stopped.
5.7.18.3
NOTICE:
Exiting Mute Mode Mute Mode is also exited if the user transmits voice
This feature can be exited automatically once the Mute or switches to an unprogrammed channel.
Mode Timer expires.
5.7.19
Do one of the following to exit Mute mode manually: Emergency Operation
• Press the programmed Mute Mode button.
An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical situation.
• Press the PTT button on any entry. You are able to initiate an Emergency at any time even
• Place the radio in a face-up position momentarily. when there is activity on the current channel.
In Capacity Max, the receiving radio can only support a
single Emergency Alarm at a time. If initiated, a second
NOTICE: Emergency Alarm will override the first alarm.
Face Down feature is applicable to
DP4601e only. When an Emergency Alarm is received, the recipient may
choose to either delete the alarm and exit the Alarm List, or
The following occurs when Mute mode is disabled:
125
English
respond to the Emergency Alarm by pressing the PTT • Emergency Alarm with Call
button and transmitting non-emergency voice. • Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow
Your dealer or system administrator can set the duration of In addition, each alarm has the following types:
a button press for the programmed Emergency button,
except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons: Regular
Radio transmits an alarm signal and shows audio
Short Press and/or visual indicators.
Duration between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds.
Silent
Long Press Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or
Duration between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds. visual indicators. Radio receives calls without any
The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency sound through the speaker, until the programmed hot
On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned mic transmission period is over and/or you press the
operation of the Emergency button. PTT button.
NOTICE: Silent with Voice
If short press the Emergency button is assigned to Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or
turn on the Emergency mode, then long press the visual indicators, but allow incoming calls to sound
Emergency button is assigned to exit the through the speaker. If hot mic is enabled, the incoming
Emergency mode. calls sound through the speaker after the programmed
hot mic transmission period is over. The indicators only
If long press the Emergency button is assigned to
appear once you press the PTT button.
turn on the Emergency mode, then short press the
Emergency button is assigned to exit the NOTICE:
Emergency mode. Only one of the Emergency Alarms above can be
assigned to the programmed Emergency button.
Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:
• Emergency Alarm
126
English
5.7.19.1 NOTICE:
Sending Emergency Alarms If programmed, the Emergency Search tone
sounds. This tone is muted when the radio
This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm, a transmits or receives voice, and stops when
non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication on a the radio exits Emergency mode. The
group of radios. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Emergency Search tone can be programmed
Alarms on your radio. by the dealer or system administrator.
Your radio does not display any audio or visual indicators
during Emergency mode when it is set to Silent.
1 Press the programmed Emergency On button. If successful:
You see one of these results: • The Emergency tone sounds.
• The display shows Tx Alarms and the • The green LED blinks.
destination alias. • The display shows Alarm Sent.
• The display shows Tx Telegram and the If unsuccessful after all retries have been exhausted:
destination alias.
• A tone sounds.
The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon
appears. • The display shows Alarm Failed.
127
English
The radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode and 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button.
returns to the Home screen.
The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination
alias. The Emergency icon appears.The green LED
NOTICE: lights up.
When configured for Emergency Alarm only, the
NOTICE:
emergency process consists only of the Emergency
If your radio is programmed, the Emergency
Alarm delivery. The emergency ends when an
Search tone sounds. This tone is muted
acknowledgment is received from the system, or
when the radio transmits or receives voice,
when channel access attempts have been
and stops when the radio exits Emergency
exhausted.
mode.
No voice call is associated with the sending of an
If an Emergency Alarm acknowledgment is
Emergency Alarm when operating as Emergency
successfully received:
Alarm Only.
• The Emergency tone sounds.
5.7.19.2 • The green LED blinks.
Sending Emergency Alarms with Call • The display shows Alarm Sent.
This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with • Your radio enters the Emergency call mode when
Call to a group of radios or a dispatcher. Upon the display shows Emergency and the destination
acknowledgment by the infrastructure within the group, a group alias.
group of radios can communicate over a programmed
If an Emergency Alarm acknowledgment is not
Emergency channel.
successfully received:
The radio must be configured for Emergency Alarm and
• All retries are exhausted.
Call to perform an emergency call after the alarm process.
• A low-pitched tone sounds.
128
English
• The display shows Alarm Failed. 6 Press the Emergency Off button to exit the
• The radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode. Emergency mode.
The radio returns to the Home screen.
2 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission. NOTICE:
Depending on how your radio is
The green LED lights up.The display shows the programmed, you may or may not hear a
Group Call icon. Talk Permit tone. Your radio dealer or system
administrator can provide more information
3 Do one of the following: on how your radio has been programmed for
Emergency.
The Emergency Call initiator may press
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak
to end an on-going emergency call. The radio
returns to a call idle state but the emergency
call screen remains open.
The display shows the caller and group aliases.
5.7.19.3
Sending Emergency Alarms with Voice
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,
you hear a short alert tone the moment the
to Follow
transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with
the channel is free for you to respond. Voice to Follow to a group of radios. Your radio microphone
is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate
129
English
with the group of radios without pressing the PTT button. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms with voice
This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. to follow on your radio.
If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled,
1 Press the programmed Emergency On button.
repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are made for a
programmed duration. During Emergency Cycle Mode, You see one of these results:
received calls sound through the speaker.
• The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination
If you press the PTT button during the programmed alias.
receiving period, you hear a prohibit tone, indicating that
• The display shows Tx Telegram and the
you should release the PTT button. The radio ignores the
destination alias.
PTT button press and remains in Emergency mode.
The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon
If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to
appears.
press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio
continues to transmit until you release the PTT button.
If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radio does not 2 Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speak clearly
retry to send the request, and enters the hot mic state into the microphone.
directly. The radio automatically stops transmitting when:
NOTICE: • The cycling duration between hot mic and
Some accessories may not support hot mic. Check receiving calls expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode
with your dealer or system administrator for more is enabled.
information.
• The hot mic duration expires, if Emergency Cycle
Mode is disabled.
130
English
3 Press the Emergency Off button to exit the 2

Emergency mode. Press to view the action options and details of
The radio returns to the Home screen. the entry in the Alarm List.
3
5.7.19.4 Press and select Yes to exit the Alarm list.
Receiving Emergency Alarms The radio returns to the home screen with an
Emergency Icon displayed at the top, indicating the
The receiving radio can only support a single Emergency unresolved Emergency Alarm. The Emergency Icon
Alarm at a time. If initiated, a second Emergency Alarm will disappears once the entry in the Alarm List is
override the first alarm. Follow the procedure to receive deleted.
and view Emergency Alarms on your radio.
When you receive an Emergency Alarm: 4
• A tone sounds. Press to access the menu.
• The red LED blinks. 5 Select Alarm List to revisit the Alarm list.
• The display shows the Emergency Alarm List, the
Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or alias of
5.7.19.5
the transmitting radio.
Responding to Emergency Alarms
1 When an Emergency Alarm is received, the recipient may
Press to view the alarm. choose to either delete the alarm and exit the Alarm List, or
respond to the Emergency Alarm by pressing the PTT
button and transmitting non-emergency voice. Follow the
procedure to respond to Emergency Alarms on your radio.
131
English
1 If the Emergency Alarm Indication is enabled, the • The display shows the Emergency Call icon, the
Emergency Alarm List appears when the radio Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or
receives an Emergency Alarm. Press or to alias of the transmitting radio.
the required alias or ID. NOTICE:
If the Emergency Call Indication is not
2 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, enabled, the display shows the Group Call
you hear a short alert tone the moment the icon, Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and
transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the ID or alias of the transmitting radio.
button to transmit non-emergency voice to the same
group the Emergency Alarm targeted.
5.7.19.6
The green LED lights up. Responding to Emergency Alarms with
Call
Follow the procedure to respond to Emergency Alarms with
Call on your radio.
When you receive an Emergency Call:
clearly into the microphone if enabled. • The Emergency Call Tone sounds if the Emergency Call
Indication and Emergency Call Decode Tone is enabled.
4 Release the PTT button to listen. The Emergency Call Tone will not sound if only the
Emergency Call Indication is enabled.
When the emergency initiating radio responds:
• The display shows the Emergency Call icon at the top
right corner.
132
English
• The text line shows the Emergency Talkgroup ID or NOTICE:

alias, and the ID or alias of the transmitting radio. If the Emergency Call Indication is not
enabled, the display shows the Group Call
icon, Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and
the ID or alias of the transmitting radio.
transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating 5.7.19.7
the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT Exiting Emergency Mode
The green LED lights up. Press the programmed Emergency Off button.
Your radio shows the following indications:

clearly into the microphone if enabled. • The tone ceased.
• The red LED extinguished.
• When acknowlegment is received, the display of the
When the emergency initiating radio responds: transmitting radio shows Cancel Emer Success. If no
• The display shows the Emergency Call icon, the
Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or
alias of the transmitting radio.
133
English
acknowledgement is received, the display shows NOTICE:

Cancel Emer Failed. The maximum character length is only applicable for
models with the latest software and hardware. For
NOTICE:
radio models with older software and hardware, the
If the Cancel Emergency configuration is
maximum length of a text message is 140
enabled on the transmitting radio, the emergency
characters. Contact your dealer for more
alarm in your receiving radio will cease and the
information.
status is added to the Alarm List of the receiving
radio.
5.7.20.1
5.7.20 Text Messages
Text Messaging The text messages are stored in an Inbox, and sorted
according to the most recently received.
Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text
message, from another radio or a text message application. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer
There are two types of text messages, Digital Mobile Radio
expires. Long press at any time to return to the Home
(DMR) Short Text Message and text message. The
screen.
maximum length of a DMR Short Text Message is 23
characters. The maximum length of a text message is 280
characters, including the subject line. The subject line only 5.7.20.1.1
appears when you receive messages from e-mail Viewing Text Messages
applications.
1
134
English
2 2
Press or to Messages. Press to select. Press or to Messages. Press to select.
3 3
Press or to Inbox. Press to select. Press or to Inbox. Press to select.
If the Inbox is empty:
4 Press or to the required message. Press
• A tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is turned on. to select.
You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status text
4 Press or to the required message. Press message.
to select. The display shows Telemetry: <Status Text

Message>.
The display shows a subject line if the message is
from an e-mail application.
5
Long press to return to the Home screen.
5.7.20.1.2
Viewing Telemetry Status Text Messages 5.7.20.1.3
Follow the procedure to view a telemetry status text Viewing Saved Text Messages
message from the inbox.
1 • Press the programmed Text Message button.
Press to access the menu. Proceed to step 3.
135
English
NOTICE:
• Press to access the menu. The radio exits the Text Message alert screen and
sets up a Private or Group Call to the sender of the
2 message if the PTT button is pressed.
Press or to Messages. Press to select.
3
Press or to Drafts. Press to select.
• Press or to Read. Press to select.
The display shows the text message. The display
4 Press or to the required message. Press shows a subject line if the message is from an e-
mail application.
to select.
• Press or to Read Later. Press to

5.7.20.1.4 select.
Responding to Text Messages The radio returns to the screen you were on prior
to receiving the text message.
When you receive a text message:
• The display shows the Notification list with the alias or
• Press or to Delete. Press to select.
ID of the sender.
• The display shows the Message icon. 2
Press to return to the Inbox.
136
English
5.7.20.1.5 5
Responding to Text Messages with Quick Press to access the sub-menu.
Text

• Press or to Reply. Press to select.
• Press the programmed Text Message button.
Proceed to Step 3.
• Press or to Quick Reply. Press to
select.
A blinking cursor appears. You can write or edit your
message, if required.
2
7
3 Press once message is composed.
Press or to Inbox. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice,
confirming the message is being sent.
to select. 8 Wait for acknowledgment.
The display shows a subject line if the message is If successful:

from an e-mail application. • A tone sounds.
If unsuccessful:
137
English
• A tone sounds. • The display shows a positive mini notice.

• The display shows a negative mini notice. If unsuccessful:
• The radio returns to the Resend option screen. • A tone sounds.
5.7.20.1.6
Forwarding Text Messages 5.7.20.1.7
When you are at the Resend option screen: Resending Text Messages
When you are at the Resend option screen:
1
Press or to Forward, and press to send
the same message to another subscriber or group Press to resend the same message to the
alias or ID. same subscriber or group alias or ID.
2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press If successful:
to select.
If unsuccessful:
confirming your message is being sent.
3 Wait for acknowledgment. • The display shows a negative mini notice.
If successful: • The radio returns to the Resend option screen.
• A tone sounds.
138
English
5.7.20.1.8 5
Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox Press or to Yes. Press to select.
The display shows a positive mini notice.
Proceed to step 3. 5.7.20.1.9
Deleting Saved Text Messages from the
• Press to access the menu. Drafts Folder
2 1 Do one of the following:
Proceed to step 3.
3
Press or to Inbox. Press to select.
If the Inbox is empty:
• The display shows List Empty. 2
• A tone sounds. Press or to Messages. Press to select.
4 3
Press or to Delete All. Press to Press or to Drafts. Press to select.
select.
to select.
139
English
5 The radio supports a maximum of five In-Progress

Press or to Delete. Press to delete the messages at one time. During this period, the radio cannot
text message. send any new message and automatically marks it with a
Send Failed icon.
5.7.20.2
If you long press at any time, the radio returns to the
Sent Text Messages Home screen.
Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in NOTICE:
Sent Items folder. The most recent sent text message is If the channel type, for example a conventional
always added to the top of the Sent Items folder. You can digital or Capacity Plus channel, is not a match, you
resend, forward or delete a Sent text message. can only edit, forward, or delete a Sent message.
The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a maximum of
30 last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next 5.7.20.2.1
sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text Viewing Sent Text Messages
message in the folder.
If you exit the message sending screen while the message 1 Do one of the following:
is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message • Press the programmed Text Message button.
in the Sent Items folder without providing any indication in Proceed to step 3.
the display or via sound.
If the radio changes mode or powers down before the • Press to access the menu.
status of the message in Sent Items folder is updated, the
radio cannot complete any In-Progress messages and 2
automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. Press or to Messages. Press to select.
140
English
3 2
Press or to Sent Items. Press to Press or to Resend. Press to select.
select. The display shows a transitional mini notice,
If the Sent Items folder is empty: confirming your message is being sent.
• A low tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is turned
on. If successful:
• A tone sounds.
to select. If unsuccessful:
The display shows a subject line if the message is • A tone sounds.
• The radio proceeds to the Resend option screen.
5.7.20.2.2 See Resending Text Messages on page 138 for
Sending Sent Text Messages more information.
When you are viewing a Sent message:
1
Press .
141
English
5.7.20.2.3 4
Deleting All Sent Text Messages from the Press or to Delete All. Press to
Sent Items Folder select.
Follow the procedure to delete all sent text messages from 5 Do one of the following:
the Sent Items folder on your radio.
• Press or to Yes. Press to select.
Proceed to step 3.
• Press or to No. Press to select.
2 5.7.20.3
Press or to Messages. Press to select. Quick Text Messages
3
Press or to Sent Items. Press to 5.7.20.3.1
select. Sending Quick Text Messages
If the Sent Items folder is empty: Follow the procedure to send predefined Quick Text
• The display shows List Empty. messages on your radio to a predefined alias.
• A tone sounds.
142
English
1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. based scrambling solution. The signaling and user
identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled.
confirming the message is being sent. Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channel to
send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a
necessary requirement for receiving a transmission. While
2 Wait for acknowledgment. on a privacy-enabled channel, the radio is still able to
If successful: receive clear or unscrambled transmissions.
• A positive indicator tone sounds. Your radio supports Enhanced Privacy.
• The display shows a positive mini notice. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or data transmission,
your radio must be programmed to have the same Key
If unsuccessful:
Value and Key ID for Privacy as the transmitting radio.
If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different
• The display shows a negative mini notice. Key Value and Key ID, you hear nothing at all for
• The radio proceeds to the Resend option screen. Enhanced Privacy.
See Resending Text Messages on page 138 for On a privacy-enabled channel, your radio is able to receive
more information. clear or unscrambled calls, depending on how your radio is
programmed. In addition, your radio may play a warning
tone or not, depending on how it is programmed.
5.7.21 NOTICE:
Privacy This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band
channels that are in the same frequency.
This feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by
unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-
143
English
The green LED lights up when the radio is transmitting, and Sending Status Messages
blinks rapidly when the radio is receiving an ongoing
privacy-enabled transmission. Follow the procedure below to send a status message.
NOTICE: 1 Do one of the following:

Some radio models may not offer this Privacy
feature, or may have a different configuration. • Press the programmed One Touch Access
Check with your dealer or system administrator for button. Skip the following steps.
more information.
5.7.21.1
Status Message 2
Press or to Status. Press to select.
This feature allows the user to send status messages to
other radios. 3
The Quick Status list is configured by using CPS-RM and Press or to Quick Status. Press to
comprises up to a maximum of 99 statuses. select.
The maximum length for each status message is 16 4 Press or to the required status message.
characters.
NOTICE: Press to select.
Every status has a corresponding digital value
ranging from 0–99. An alias can be specified to 5 Press or to the required subscriber alias or
each status for ease of reference.
ID, or group alias or ID. Press to select.
5.7.21.1.1
If successful:
144
English
• A positive indicator tone sounds. 3 Press or to the required subscriber alias or

ID, or group alias or ID. Press to select.
• The display shows a positive mini notice momentarily
before returning to the Quick Status screen. If successful:
• The display shows beside the sent status message. • A positive indicator tone sounds.
If unsuccessful: • The LED turns off.
• A negative indicator tone sounds. • The display shows a positive mini notice momentarily
• The LED turns off. before returning to the Quick Status screen.
• The display shows the failure notice momentarily before • The display shows beside the sent status message.
returning to the Quick Status screen. If unsuccessful:
5.7.21.1.2
Sending Status Message by Using • The LED turns off.
Programmable Button • The display shows the failure notice momentarily before
returning to the Quick Status screen.
Follow the procedure to send a status message by using
the programmable button.
5.7.21.1.3
1 Press the programmed Status Message button. Sending a Status Message by Using the
Contacts List
2 Press or to the required status message. Follow the procedure to send a status message by using
the contacts list.
Press to select. The contact list is displayed.
145
English
1 If unsuccessful:
Press to access the menu. • A negative indicator tone sounds.
2
Press or to Contacts. Press to select. • The display shows the failure notice momentarily before
returning to the Quick Status screen.
3 Press or to the required subscriber alias or
5.7.21.1.4
ID, or group alias or ID. Press to select. Sending Status Message by Using Manual
4 Dial
Press or to Send Status. Press to Follow the procedure to send a status message by using
select. the manual dial.
5 Press or to the required status message. 1

Press to select.
2
If successful: Press or to Contacts. Press to select.
3
• The display shows a positive mini notice momentarily select.
before returning to the Quick Status screen.
• The display shows beside the sent status message.
146
English
4 • The LED turns off.

Press or to Radio Number. Press to • The display shows the failure notice momentarily before
select. returning to the Quick Status screen.
5 Enter the required subscriber alias or ID, or group

5.7.21.1.5
alias or ID, and press to proceed. Viewing Status Messages
Follow the procedure to view status messages.
6
Press or to Send Status. Press to 1

Press to select.
3
If successful: Press or to Inbox. Press to select.
4 Press or to the required status message.
• The display shows a positive mini notice momentarily Press to select.
before returning to the Quick Status screen.
The content of the status message is displayed to
• The display shows beside the sent status message. the radio user.
If unsuccessful:
147
English
Received status messages can also be viewed by 6

accessing the Notification List. See Notification List on Press or to Reply. Press to select.
page 159 for more information.
7 Press or to the required status message.
5.7.21.1.6
Responding to Status Messages Press to select.
Follow the procedure to reply status messages. If successful:
1
Press to access the menu. • The LED turns off.
• The display shows a positive mini notice before
2 returning to the Inbox screen.
• The display shows beside the sent status message.
3 If unsuccessful:
Press or to Inbox. Press to select.
4 Press or to the required status message. • The LED turns off.
• The display shows the failure notice momentarily before
Press to select.
returning to the Inbox screen.
5
The content of the status is displayed. Press to
select.
148
English
5.7.21.1.7 7
Deleting a Status Message Press or to Yes. Press to select.
Follow the procedure to delete a status message from your • The display shows a positive mini notice before
radio. returning to the Inbox screen.
1
5.7.21.1.8
Deleting All Status Messages
2 Follow the procedure to delete all status messages from
Press or to Status. Press to select. your radio.
3 1
Press or to Inbox. Press to select. Press to access the menu.

Press to select.
3
5 Press or to Inbox. Press to select.
The content of the status is displayed. Press to
select. 4
Press or to Delete All. Press to
6 select.
149
English

• The display shows List Empty. • Press or to On. Press to select. The
5.7.21.2
Turning Privacy On or Off • Press or to Off. Press to select.
Follow the procedure to turn privacy on or off on your radio.
1 Do one of the following: 5.7.22

• Press the programmed Privacy button. Skip the Response Inhibit
steps below. This feature helps prevent your radio from responding to
any incoming transmissions.
• Press to access the menu. NOTICE:
Contact your dealer to determine how your radio
2 has been programmed.
If enabled, your radio does not generate any outgoing
3 transmissions in respond to incoming transmissions, such
Press or to Radio Settings. Press to as Radio Check, Call Alert, Radio Disable, Remote Monitor,
select. Automatic Registration Service (ARS), Responding to
Private Messages, and Sending GNSS location reports.
4
Press or to Privacy. Press to select.
150
English
Your radio cannot receive Confirmed Private Calls when may want to disable a stolen radio to prevent unauthorized
this feature is enabled. However, your radio is able to users from using it, and enable the radio when it is
manually send transmission. recovered.
A radio can be disabled (stunned) or enabled (revived)
5.7.22.1 either through the console or through a command initiated
Turning Response Inhibit On or Off by another radio.
Follow the procedure to enable or disable Response Inhibit Once a radio is disabled, the radio sounds a negative
on your radio. indicator tone and the home screen shows Channel
Denied.
Press the programmed Response Inhibit button. When a radio is stunned, the radio cannot request nor
receive any user initiated services on the system that
If successful: performed the Stun procedure. However, the radio can
• A positive indicator tone sounds. switch to another system. The radio continues to send
GNSS location reports and can be monitored remotely
• The display shows a momentary positive mini notice.
when it was stunned.
If unsuccessful:
NOTICE:
• A negative indicator tone sounds. The dealer or system administrator may
• The display shows a momentary negative mini notice. permanently disable a radio. See Radio Kill on page
155 for more information.
5.7.23
5.7.23.1
Stun/Revive
Stunning a Radio
This feature allows you to enable or disable any radio in the
system. For example, the dealer or system administrator Follow the procedure to disable a radio.
151
English
1 Press the programmed Radio Disable button. Stunning a Radio by Using the
2 Press
Contacts List
or to the required alias or ID. Press
Follow the procedure to disable a radio by using the
to select. Contacts List.
The display shows Radio Disable: <Subscriber
1
Alias or ID>. The green LED blinks.

• A positive indicator tone sounds. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press
to select.
If unsuccessful:
• The display shows a negative mini notice. Press or to Radio Disable. Press to
select.
The display shows Radio Disable: <Subscriber
5.7.23.2 Alias or ID>. The green LED blinks.

If successful:
152
English
• A positive indicator tone sounds. 4

• The display shows a positive mini notice. Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed.
If unsuccessful:
5
• A negative indicator tone sounds. Press or to Radio Disable. Press to
• The display shows a negative mini notice. select.
indicating the request is in progress. The green LED
5.7.23.3 blinks.
Stunning a Radio by Using the Manual

Dial
If successful:
Follow the procedure to disable a radio by using the
manual dial. • A positive indicator tone sounds.
1 If unsuccessful:
2 • The display shows a negative mini notice.
3
Press or to Manual Dial. Press to 5.7.23.4
select. Reviving a Radio
Follow the procedure to enable a radio.
153
English
1 Press the programmed Radio Enable button. Reviving a Radio by Using the
2 Press
Contacts List
Follow the procedure to enable a radio by using the
to select. Contacts List.
The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber
1
Alias or ID>. The green LED lights up.

• A positive indicator tone sounds. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press
to select.
If unsuccessful:
• The display shows a negative mini notice. Press or to Radio Enable. Press to
select.
The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber
5.7.23.5 Alias or ID>. The green LED lights up.

If successful:
154
English

• The display shows a positive mini notice. Press or to Private Call. Press to
select.
If unsuccessful:
The first text line shows Radio Number:.
5
Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed.
5.7.23.6 6
Reviving a Radio by Using the Manual Press or to Radio Enable. Press to
select.
Dial
Follow the procedure to enable a radio by using the Manual
Dial.
5.7.24
1
Press to access the menu. Radio Kill
This feature is an enhanced security measure to restrict
2
unauthorized access to a radio.
Radio Kill causes a radio to be rendered inoperable. For
3 example, the dealer may want to kill a stolen or misplaced
Press or to Manual Dial. Press to radio to prevent unauthorized usage.
select.
155
English
When powered on, a killed radio displays Radio Killed Password Lock
on the screen momentarily to indicate the killed state.
You can set a password to restrict access to your radio.
NOTICE:
Each time you turn on your radio, you are asked to enter
A killed radio can only be revived at a Motorola
the password.
Solutions service depot. Contact your dealer for
more information. Your radio supports a 4-digit password input.
Your radio is unable to receive calls in locked state.
5.7.25
Lone Worker 5.7.26.1
This feature prompts an emergency to be raised if there is Accessing the Radio by Using
no user activity, such as any radio button press or Password
activation of the channel selector, for a predefined time.
Turn on your radio.
Following no user activity for a programmed duration, the
radio pre-warns you using an audio indicator once the 1 Enter the four-digit password.
inactivity timer expires.
a To edit the numeric value of each digit, press
If there is still no acknowledgment by you before the
or . To enter and move to the next digit, press
predefined reminder timer expires, the radio initiates an
emergency condition as programmed by the dealer.
.
5.7.26 2
Press to confirm the password.
If you enter the password correctly, the radio powers up.
156
English
If you enter the wrong password after the first and second 5.7.26.2
attempt, your radio shows the following indications: Turning Password Lock On or Off
• A continuous tone sounds. Follow the procedure to turn password lock on or off on
• The display shows Wrong Password. your radio.
Repeat step 1.
1
If you enter the wrong password after the third attempt, Press to access the menu.
your radio shows the following indications:
• A tone sounds. 2
• The yellow LED double blinks.
• The display shows Wrong Password and then, Radio 3
Locked. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
select.
• Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes.
NOTICE: 4
In locked state, your radio responds to inputs from Press or to Passwd Lock. Press to
the On/Off/Volume Control Knob and select.
programmed Backlight button only.
Wait for the 15-minute locked state timer to end and then 5 Enter the current four-digit password.
repeat step 1. • Use a keypad microphone.
NOTICE: • Press or to edit the numeric value of
If you turn off and turn your radio on again, the 15-
minute timer restarts. each digit, and press to enter and move to
the next digit.
157
English
A positive indicator tone sounds for every digit Do one of the following:
pressed. • If the radio is powered on, wait for 15 minutes and then
repeat the steps in Accessing the Radio by Using
6
Password on page 156 to access the radio.
Press to enter the password.
• If the radio is powered off, power up the radio. Your
If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong radio restarts the 15-minute timer for locked state.
Password and automatically returns to the previous A tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. The
menu. display shows Radio Locked.
7 Do one of the following: Wait for 15 minutes and then repeat the steps in
Accessing the Radio by Using Password on page 156 to
access the radio.
• Press or to Turn On. Press to
select.
5.7.26.4
The display shows beside Turn On.
Changing Passwords
• Press or to Turn Off. Press to Follow the procedure to change passwords on your radio.
select.
The display shows beside Turn Off. 1
5.7.26.3 2
Unlocking Radios in Locked State Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
Your radio is unable to receive calls in locked state. Follow
the procedure to unlock your radio in locked state.
158
English
3 8 Re-enter the new four-digit password, and press

select. to proceed.
If successful, the display shows Password Changed.
4
If unsuccessful, the display shows Passwords Do
Press or to Passwd Lock. Press to
Not Match.
select.
5 menu.
Enter the current four-digit password, and press
to proceed.
If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong 5.7.27
Password and automatically returns to the previous Notification List
menu.
Your radio has a Notification list that collects all your
6 unread events on the channel, such as unread text
Press or to Change PWD. Press to messages, telemetry messages, missed calls, and call
select. alerts.
The display shows the Notification icon when the
7 Notification list has one or more events.
Enter a new four-digit password, and press to
The list supports a maximum of 40 unread events. When
proceed.
the list is full, the next event automatically replaces the
oldest event. After the events are read, they are removed
from the Notification list.
159
English
For text messages, missed calls, and call alert events, the 4
maximum number of notifications are 30 text messages Press or to the required event. Press to
and 10 missed calls or call alerts. This maximum number select.
depends on individual feature (job tickets or text messages
or missed calls or call alerts) list capability.
5.7.27.1
Accessing Notification List 5.7.28
Follow the procedure to access the Notification list on your

Over-the-Air Programming
radio. Your dealer can remotely update your radio by using Over-
the-Air Programming (OTAP) without physical connection.
1 Do one of the following: Additionally, some settings can also be configured by using
• Press the programmed Notification button. Skip OTAP.
the steps below. When your radio undergoes OTAP, the green LED blinks.
When your radio receives high volume data:
• The display shows the High Volume Data icon.
2 • The channel becomes busy.
Press to access the menu. • A negative tone sounds if you press the PTT button.
3 When OTAP completes, depending on the configuration:

Press or to Notification. Press to • A tone sounds. The display shows Updating
select. Restarting. Your radio restarts by powering off and on
again.
160
English
• You can select Restart Now or Postpone. When you The display shows the RSSI icon at the top right corner.
select Postpone, your radio returns to the previous See Display Icons for more information on the RSSI icon.
screen. The display shows the OTAP Delay Timer icon
until the automatic restart occurs. 5.7.29.1
When your radio powers up after automatic restart: Viewing RSSI Values
• If successful, the display shows Sw Update
Completed.
At the home screen, press three times and
• If the program update is unsuccessful, a tone sounds,
the red LED blinks once, and the display shows Sw immediately press , all in 5 seconds.
Update Failed. The display shows the current RSSI values.
NOTICE:
If the programming update is unsuccessful, the To return to the home screen, press and hold .
software update failure indications appear every
time you turn on your radio. Contact your dealer to
reprogram your radio with the latest software to 5.7.30
eliminate the software update failure indications. Front Panel Programming
See Checking Software Update Information on page 191 You are able to customize certain feature parameters in
for the updated software version. Front Panel Programming (FPP) to enhance the use of
your radio.
5.7.29 The following buttons are used as required while navigating
Received Signal Strength Indicator through the feature parameters.
Up/Down Navigation Button
This feature allows you to view the Received Signal Press to navigate through options horizontally or
Strength Indicator (RSSI) values. vertically, or increase or decrease values.
161
English
Menu/OK Button Editing Mode Parameters

Press to select the option or enter a sub-menu.
Use the following buttons as required while navigating
Return/Home Button through the feature parameters.
Short press to return to the previous menu or exit the
selection screen. • , – Scroll through options, increase/decrease
values, or navigate vertically.
Long press at any time to return to the Home screen.
5.7.30.1 • – Select the option or enter a sub-menu.

Entering Front Panel Programming
• – Short-press to return to previous menu or to exit
Mode the selection screen. Long-press to return to Home
screen.
1
5.7.31
2 Wi-Fi Operation
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. This feature allows you to set up and connect to a Wi-Fi
network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio firmware,
3 codeplug, and resources such as language packs and
Press or to Program Radio. Press to voice announcement.
select.
NOTICE:
This feature is applicable to DP4601e only.
5.7.30.2
Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
162
English
Your radio supports WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal and WPA/ Turning Wi-Fi On or Off

WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks.
WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal Wi-Fi network 1 Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button.
Uses pre-shared key (password) based authentication. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or
Pre-shared key can be entered by using the menu or Turning Off Wi-Fi.
CPS/RM.
2 Access this feature using the menu.
WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network
Uses certificate-based authentication.
a Press to access the menu.
Your radio must be pre-configured with a certificate.
NOTICE: b Press or to WiFi and press to
Check with your dealer or system administrator select.
to connect to WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi
network.
c Press or to WiFi On and press to
The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned by select.
your dealer or system administrator. Check with your dealer
or system administrator to determine how your radio has
been programmed. d Press to turn on/off Wi-Fi.
Voice Announcements for the programmed Wi-Fi On or If Wi-Fi is on, the display shows beside
Off button can be customized through CPS according to Enabled.
user requirements. Check with your dealer or system If Wi-Fi is off, the disappears from beside
administrator for more information. Enabled.
5.7.31.1
163
English
5.7.31.2 3
Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Press or to WiFi Control and press
to select.
Using a Designated Radio (Individual
Control) 4 Press or to select On or Off.
You can turn Wi-Fi on or off remotely in Individual Control
(One to One). 5
Press to select.
NOTICE:
Only radio with specific CPS setting supports this If successful, the display shows a positive mini notice.
function, check with your dealer or system
If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini notice.
1 Do one of the following: 5.7.31.3
• Long press the programmable button. Use the

Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by
Using a Designated Radio (Group
keypad to enter the ID and press to select. Control)
Proceed to step 3.
You can turn Wi-Fi on or off remotely in Group Control
(One to Many).
NOTICE:
2 Only radio with specific CPS setting supports this
Press or to Contacts and press to function, check with your dealer or system
select. administrator for more information.
164
English
1 Connecting to a Network Access Point

When you turn on Wi-Fi, the radio scans and connects to a
network access point.
2
Press or to Contacts and press to NOTICE:
select. You can also connect to a network access point
using the menu.
3 Press or to select the required subscriber The WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi network access points
alias or ID. are pre-configured. Check with your dealer or
system administrator to determine how your radio
Press or to WiFi Control and press
to select.
1
5 Press or to select On or Off.
2
6 Press or to WiFi and press to select.
Press to select.
3
If successful, the display shows Sent Successfully.
Press or to Networks and press to
If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini notice. select.
5.7.31.4
165
English
4 Press or to a network access point and If the connection is unsuccessful, the radio displays shows
the failure notice screen momentarily and automatically
press to select. returns to the previous menu.
NOTICE:
5.7.31.5
For WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi, if a network
access point is not preconfigured, the Checking Wi-Fi Connection Status
Connect option is not available. Press the programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button for the
connection status by using Voice Announcement. Voice
5 Announcement sounds Wi-Fi is Off, Wi-Fi is On but No
Press or to Connect and press to Connection, or Wi-Fi is On with Connection.
select.
• The display shows WiFi Off when the Wi-Fi is
6 For WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi, password is configured turned off.
by using RM.
• The display shows WiFi On, Connected when the
If the preconfigured password is correct, your radio radio is connected to a network.
automatically connects to the selected network
• The display shows WiFi On, Disconnected when
access point.
the Wi-Fi is turned on but the radio is not connected
If the preconfigured password is incorrect, the to any network.
display shows Authentication Failure, and
Voice Announcements for the Wi-Fi status query
automatically returns to the previous menu.
results can be customized through CPS according to
If the connection is successful, the radio displays a notice

and the network access point is saved into the profile list.
166
English
user requirements. Check with your dealer or system

administrator for more information. c. Press or to Networks and press to
NOTICE: select.
The programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button When you enter the Networks menu, the radio
is assigned by your dealer or system automatically refreshes the network list.
administrator. Check with your dealer or
system administrator to determine how your • If you are already in the Networks menu, perform the
radio has been programmed. following action to refresh the network list.
5.7.31.6 Press or to Refresh and press to

Refreshing the Network List select.
The radio refreshes and displays the latest network
• Perform the following actions to refresh the network list.
list through the menu.
5.7.31.7
Adding a Network
b. Press or to WiFi and press to NOTICE:
select. This task is not applicable to WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi
networks.
167
English
If a preferred network is not in the available network list, 7

perform the following actions to add a network. Enter the password and press .
1 The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate

that the network is successfully saved.
2
5.7.31.8
Press or to WiFi and press to select.
Viewing Details of Network Access
3 Points
select. You can view details of network access points.
4 1
Press or to Add Network and press to Press to access the menu.
select.
2
5 Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press Press or to WiFi and press to select.
. 3
6 select.
Press or to Open and press to select.
4 Press or to a network access point and
press to select.
168
English
5 5.7.31.9
Press or to View Details and press Removing Network Access Points
to select.
NOTICE:
NOTICE: This task is not applicable to Enterprise Wi-Fi
WPA-Personal Wi-Fi and WPA-Enterprise networks.
Wi-Fi display different details of Network
Access Points. Perform the following actions to remove network access
points from the profile list.
WPA-Personal Wi-Fi
For a connected network access point, your radio 1
displays Service Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Press to access the menu.
Media Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet
Protocol (IP) address. 2
For a non-connected network access point, your radio Press or to WiFi and press to select.
displays SSID and Security Mode.
3
WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi
For a connected network access point, your radio
select.
displays SSID, Security Mode, Identity, Extended
Authentication Protocol (EAP) Method, Phase 2
4 Press or to the selected network access
Authentication, Cert Name, MAC address, IP address,
Gateway, DNS1, and DNS2.
point and press to select.
For a non-connected network access point, your radio
displays SSID, Security Mode, Identity, EAP Method, 5
Phase 2 Authentication, and Cert Name. Press or to Remove and press to select.
169
English
6 • Lock Keypad and Channel Selector Knob

Press or to Yes and press to select. Contact your dealer to determine how your radio has been
The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate programmed.
that the selected network access point is
successfully removed. 5.8.1.1
Enabling the Keypad Lock Option
5.8 The following steps are applicable for either Lock Keypad,
Utilities Lock Channel Selector Knob, or Lock Keypad and Channel
Selector Knob option depending on how your radio has
This chapter explains the operations of the utility functions been configured.
Press the programmed Keypad Lock button.
5.8.1 The display shows Locked.
Keypad Lock Options
5.8.1.2
With this feature, you can avoid accidentally pressing
buttons or changing channels when your radio is not in use. Disabling the Keypad Lock Option
You can choose to either lock your keypad, channel The following steps are applicable for either Lock Keypad,
selector knob, or both; depending on your requirements. Lock Channel Selector Knob, or Lock Keypad and Channel
Your dealer can use CPS/RM to configure one of the Selector Knob option depending on how your radio has
following options: been configured.
• Lock Keypad
• Lock Channel Selector Knob
170
English
Press the programmed Keypad Lock button. The current cable type is indicated by a .
The display shows Unlocked.

5.8.3
5.8.2 Setting Menu Timer
Identifying Cable Type You can set the time your radio stays in the menu before it
automatically switches to the Home screen. Follow the
Do the following steps to select the type of cable your radio procedure to set the menu timer.
uses.
1
2
2 Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
3
3 Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select.
select.
4
4 Press or to Display. Press to select.
Press or to Cable Type. Press to
select. 5
Press or to Menu Timer. Press to
5 Press or to change the selected option. select.
171
English
6 5.8.4.1
Press or to the required setting. Press Setting Text-to-Speech
to select.
Follow the procedure to set the Text-to-Speech feature.
5.8.4 1
Text-to-Speech Press to access the menu.
The Text-to-Speech feature can only be enabled by your 2

dealer. If Text-to-Speech is enabled, the Voice Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
Announcement feature is automatically disabled. If Voice
Announcement is enabled, then the Text-to-Speech feature 3
is automatically disabled. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the select.
following features:
4 Press or to Voice Announcement. Press
• Current Channel
• Current Zone to select.
• Programmed button feature on or off
5 Press or to any of the following features.
• Content of received text messages
• Content of received Job Tickets Press to select.
This audio indicator can be customized per customer The available features are as follows:
requirements. This feature is typically useful when the user • All
is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the
display. • Messages
172
English
• Job Tickets 3 Press or to Radio Settings and press

• Channel
to select.
• Zone
• Program Button 4
Press or to AF Suppressor and press
appears beside the selected setting.
to select.
You can also use or buttons to change the

5.8.5 selected option.
Turning the Acoustic Feedback
5 Do one of the following.
Suppressor Feature On or Off
This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback in • Press to enable Acoustic Feedback
received calls. Suppressor. The display shows beside
Enabled.
1
• Press to disable Acoustic Feedback
2 Suppressor. The disappears from beside
Press or to Utilities and press to Enabled.
select.
173
English
5.8.6 3
Turning Global Navigation Satellite Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
System On or Off 4
Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a satellite Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
navigation system that determines the radio precise select.
location. GNSS includes Global Positioning System (GPS),
Global Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS), and 5
BeiDou Navigation Satellite System (BDS). Press or to GNSS. Press to select.
NOTICE: 6
Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS, Press to enable or disable GNSS.
and BDS. GNSS constellation is configured by using
CPS. Check with your dealer or system If enabled, appears beside Enabled.
administrator to determine how your radio has been If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
programmed.
1 5.8.7
2 Do one of the following steps to toggle GNSS on or Turning Introduction Screen On or
off on your radio. Off
• Press the programmed GNSS button. You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen by
following the procedure.
• Press to access the menu. Proceed to the
next step.
174
English
1 5.8.8
Press to access the menu. Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or
2 Off
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts, if
needed, except for incoming Emergency alert tone . Follow
3 the procedure to turn tones and alerts on or off on your
Press or to Radio Settings. Press to radio.
select.
4
Press or to Display. Press to select. • Press the programmed Tones/Alerts button. Skip
5
Press or to Intro Screen. Press to • Press to access the menu.
select.
2
Press to enable or disable the Introduction
Screen. 3
The display shows one of the following results: Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
select.
• If enabled, appears beside Enabled.
4
• If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
select.
175
English
5 3
Press or to All Tones. Press to select. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
select.
6
Press to enable or disable all tones and alerts. 4
The display shows one of the following results: Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press to
select.
• If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 5
Press or to Vol. Offset. Press to
select.
5.8.9
Setting Tones/Alerts Volume Offset 6 Press or to the required volume offset level.
Levels A feedback tone sounds with each corresponding
volume offset level.
This feature adjusts the volume of the tones or alerts,
allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice volume.
Follow the procedure to set the tones and alerts volume 7 Do one of the following:
offset levels on your radio.
• Press to select. The required volume offset
1 level is saved.
2 • Press to exit. The changes are discarded.

176
English
5.8.10 6
Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Off Press to enable or disable the Talk Permit
Tone.
Follow the procedure to turn Talk Permit Tone on or off on
your radio. The display shows one of the following results:
1
Press to access the menu. • If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 5.8.11
3
Turning Power Up Tone On or Off
Press or to Radio Settings. Press to Follow the procedure to turn Power Up Tone on or off on
select. your radio.
4 1
Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press to Press to access the menu.
select.
2
Press or to Talk Permit. Press to
select. 3
select.
177
English
4 2
Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press to Press or to Contacts. Press to select.
select.
5
Press or to Power Up. Press to select. to select.
6 4
Press to enable or disable the Power Up Tone. Press or to Message Alert. Press to
The display shows one of the following results: select.
• Press or to Momentary. Press to
5.8.12 select.
Setting Text Message Alert Tones The display shows beside Momentary.
You can customize the text message alert tone for each
• Press or to Repetitive. Press to
entry in the Contacts list. Follow the procedure to set the
select.
text message alert tones on your radio.
The display shows beside Repetitive.
1
178
English
5.8.13
Power Levels • Press to access the menu.
You can customize the power setting to high or low for 2

each channel. Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
High
This enables communication with radios located at a 3
considerable distance from you. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
select.
Low
This enables communication with radios in closer 4
proximity. Press or to Power. Press to select.
NOTICE:
This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band 5 Do one of the following:
• Press or to High. Press to select.
5.8.13.1 The display shows beside High.
Setting Power Levels
Follow the procedure to set the power levels on your radio. • Press or to Low. Press to select.
The display shows beside Low.
6
• Press the programmed Power Level button. Skip Long press to return to the Home screen.
the steps below.
179
English
5.8.14 5 Press or to decrease or increase the display

Adjusting Display Brightness
brightness. Press to select.
Follow the procedure to adjust the display brightness on
your radio.
5.8.15
1 Do one of the following: Setting Display Backlight Timer
• Press the programmed Brightness button. Skip
You can set the display backlight timer of the radio as
needed. The setting also affects the Menu Navigation
Buttons and keypad backlighting accordingly. Follow the
• Press to access the menu. procedure to set the backlight timer on your radio.

• Press the programmed Backlight button. Skip
3
select. • Press to access the menu.
4 2
Press or to Brightness. Press to Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
select.
3
The display shows the progress bar.
select.
180
English
4 3
Press or to Display. Press to select. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
select.
5
Press or to Backlight Timer. Press 4 Press or to Backlight Auto.
to select.
5
The display backlight and keypad backlighting are Press to enable or disable Backlight Auto.
automatically turned off as the LED indicator is disabled. The display shows one of the following results:
See Turning LED Indicators On or Off on page 181 for
more information. • If enabled, appears beside Enabled.
5.8.16
Turning Backlight Auto On or Off
You can enable and disable the backlight of the radio to 5.8.17
turn on automatically as needed. If enabled, the backlight is Turning LED Indicators On or Off
turned on when the radio receives a call, Notification List
Follow the procedure to turn the LED indicators on or off on
event, or Emergency Alarm.
your radio.
1
1
2
2
181
English
3 2
Press or to Radio Settings. Press to Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
select.
3
Press or to LED Indicator. Press to select.
select.
4
5 Press or to Languages. Press to select.
Press to enable or disable the LED indicator.
5 Press or to the required language. Press
• If enabled, appears beside Enabled. to select.
• If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. The display shows beside the selected language.
5.8.18 5.8.19
Setting Languages Turning Option Board On or Off
Follow the procedure to set the languages on your radio. Option board capabilities within each channel can be
assigned to programmable buttons. Follow the procedure
1 to turn option board on or off on your radio.
Press the programmed Option Board button.
182
English
5.8.20 3
Turning Voice Announcement On or Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
select.
Off
This feature enables the radio to audibly indicates the 4 Press or to Voice Announcement. Press
current zone or channel the user has just assigned, or the
programmable button the user has just pressed. to select.
This is typically useful when the user has difficulty reading
5
the content shown on the display.
Press to enable or disable Voice
This audio indicator can be customized according to Announcement.
customer requirements. Follow the procedure to turn Voice
Announcement on or off on your radio. • If enabled, appears beside Enabled.
• Press the programmed Voice Announcement
button. Skip the following steps. 5.8.21
Turning Digital Microphone AGC On
• Press to access the menu. or Off
2 The Digital Microphone Automatic Gain Control (AGC)
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. controls the microphone gain of the radio automatically
while transmitting on a digital system.
This feature suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to
a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of
183
English
audio. Follow the procedure to turn Digital Microphone 5.8.22

AGC on or off on your radio. Switching Audio Route between
1 Internal Radio Speaker and Wired
Press to access the menu. Accessory
2 Follow the procedure to toggle audio routing between
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. internal radio speaker and wired accessory.
You can toggle audio routing between the internal radio
3 speaker and the speaker of a wired accessory with the
Press or to Radio Settings. Press to condition that:
select.
• The wired accessory with speaker is attached.
4 • The audio is not routed to an external Bluetooth
Press or to Mic AGC-D. Press to accessory.
select.
Press the programmed Audio Toggle button.
5
Press to enable or disable Digital Microphone A tone sounds when the audio route has switched.
AGC.
Powering down the radio or detaching the accessory resets
The display shows one of the following results: the audio routing to the internal radio speaker.
184
English
5.8.23 3
Turning Intelligent Audio On or Off Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
select.
Your radio automatically adjusts the audio volume to
overcome current background noise in the environment, 4 Press or to Intelligent Audio. Press
inclusive of both stationary and non-stationary noise
sources. This is a receive-only feature and does not affect
to select.
transmission audio. Follow the procedure to turn Intelligent
Audio on or off on your radio.
NOTICE: • Press or to On. Press to select. The

This feature is not applicable during a Bluetooth display shows beside On.
session.
1 Do one of the following: • Press or to Off. Press to select.

• Press the programmed Intelligent Audio button.
Skip the steps below.
5.8.24
• Press to access the menu. Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off
You can enable this feature when you are speaking in a
2
language that contains many words with alveolar trill
(rolling "R") pronunciations. Follow the procedure to turn
Trill Enhancement on or off on your radio.
185
English
• Press the programmed Trill Enhancement Turning the Microphone Dynamic

button. Skip the steps below. Distortion Control Feature On or Off
This feature allows you to enable the radio to automatically
• Press to access the menu. monitor the microphone input and adjust the microphone
gain value to avoid audio clipping.
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 1
3
Press or to Radio Settings. Press to 2
select. Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
4 3
Press or to Trill Enhance. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
select. select.
5 Do one of the following: 4
Press or to Mic Distortion. Press to
• Press or to On. Press to select. The select.
186
English
4
• Press to enable Microphone Dynamic Press or to Audio Ambience. Press to
Distortion Control. If enabled, appears beside select.
Enabled.
5
• Press to disable Microphone Dynamic Press or to the required setting. Press
to select.
Distortion Control. If disabled, disappears
beside Enabled. The settings are as follows.
• Choose Default for the default factory settings.
5.8.26 • Choose Loud to increase speaker loudness when
Setting Audio Ambience using in noisy surroundings.
Follow the procedure to set the audio ambience on your • Choose Work Group to reduce acoustic feedback
radio according to your environment. when using with a group of radios that are near to
each other.
1 The display shows beside the selected setting.
2 5.8.27
Setting Audio Profiles
3 Follow the procedure to set audio profiles on your radio.
select. 1
187
English
2 preference for tinnier, more nasal, or deeper

Press or to Utilities. Press to select. sounds.
The display shows beside the selected setting.
3
select. 5.8.28
4 General Radio Information

Press or to Audio Profiles. Press to Your radio contains information on various general
select. parameters.
5 The general information of your radio is as follows:

Press or to the required setting. Press • Battery information.
to select.
• Radio alias and ID.
The settings are as follows.
• Firmware and Codeplug versions.
• Choose Default to disable the previously
• Software update.
selected audio profile and return to the default
factory settings. • GNSS information.
• Choose Level 1, Level 2, or Level 3 for audio • Site information.
profiles intended to compensate for noise-
induced hearing loss that is typical for adults over
40 years of age.
• Choose Treble Boost, Mid Boost, or Bass
Boost for audio profiles that align with your
188
English
• Received Signal Strength Indicator. 4

NOTICE: Press or to Battery Info. Press to
select.
Press to return to the previous screen. Long NOTICE:
For IMPRES batteries only: The display
press to return to the Home screen. The radio reads Recondition Battery when the
exits the current screen once the inactivity timer battery requires reconditioning in an IMPRES
expires. charger. After the reconditioning process, the
display then shows the battery information.
5.8.28.1
The display shows the battery information.
Accessing Battery Information NOTICE:
Displays information of your radio battery. For non-supported battery, the display shows
Unknown Battery.
1
5.8.28.2
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Checking Radio Alias and ID

Press or to Radio Info. Press to • Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID
select. button. Skip the following steps.
A positive indicator tone sounds.
189
English
You can press the programmed Radio Alias and 2

ID button to return to the previous screen. Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
• Press to access the menu. 3

Press or to Radio Info. Press to
2 select.
4
3 Press or to Versions. Press to select.
Press or to Radio Info. Press to The display shows the current firmware and
select. codeplug versions.
4
Press or to My ID. Press to select. 5.8.28.4
The first text line shows the radio alias. The second Checking GNSS Information
text line shows the radio ID.
Displays the GNSS information on your radio, such as
values of:
5.8.28.3 • Latitude
Checking Firmware and Codeplug • Longitude
Versions • Altitude
• Direction
1
Press to access the menu. • Velocity
190
English
• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) Checking Software Update Information

• Satellites This feature shows the date and time of the latest software
• Version update carried out through OTAP or Wi-Fi. Follow the
procedure to check the software update information on
1 your radio.
1
2
select. 3
4 select.
Press or to GNSS Info. Press to select.
4
5 Press or to SW Update. Press to select.
Press or to the required item. Press to The display shows the date and time of the latest
select. The display shows the requested GNSS software update.
information.
Software Update menu is only available after at least one
5.8.28.5 successful OTAP or Wi-Fi session. See Over-the-Air
Programming on page 427 for more information.
191
English
5.8.28.6 Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate

Displaying Site Information Details
Follow the procedure to display the current site name your
radio is on. You can view the details of the selected Enterprise Wi-Fi
Certificate.
1
Press to access the menu. 1
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 2
3
Press or to Radio Info. Press to 3
select. Press or to Certificate Menu. Press
to select.
4 appears beside ready certificates.
Press or to Site Info. Press to select.
4 Press or to the required certificate. Press
The display shows the current site name.
to select.
5.8.29
Your radio displays the full details of the certificate.
NOTICE:
For unready certificates, the display shows only
Status.
192
English
Connect Plus The microphone is activated when the PTT button is

pressed.
Connect Plus is a full trunking solution based on DMR • While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to
technology. Connect Plus uses a dedicated control channel make a new call (see Making a Radio Call on page
for channel requests and allocations. 209).
If the Talk Permit Tone (see Turning the Talk Permit Tone
6.1 On or Off on page 287) is enabled, wait until the short alert
Additional Radio Controls in tone ends before talking.
Connect Plus Mode 6.1.2
This chapter explains the additional radio controls available Programmable Buttons
to the radio user through preprogrammed means such as Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as
programmable buttons and assignable radio functions. shortcuts to radio functions depending on the duration of a
button press:
6.1.1 Short press
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button Pressing and releasing rapidly.
The PTT button on the side of the radio serves two basic
purposes:
• While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the
radio to transmit to other radios in the call.
Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT
button to listen.
193
English
Long press Bluetooth Disconnect

Pressing and holding for the programmed duration. Terminates all existing Bluetooth connections between
your radio and any Bluetooth-enabled devices.
NOTICE:
The programmed duration of a button press is Bluetooth Discoverable
applicable for all assignable radio/utility functions or Enables your radio to enter Bluetooth Discoverable
settings. See Emergency Operation on page 240 for Mode.
more information on the programmed duration of the Busy Queue Cancellation
Emergency button. Exits the busy mode when a non-Emergency call in the
Busy Queue was initiated. Emergency calls, once
6.1.2.1 accepted into the Busy Queue, cannot be cancelled.
Assignable Radio Functions Call Log
Selects the call log list.
Beacon On/Off
Toggles the Beacon feature on or off. Requires Channel Announcement
purchase of Connect Plus Man Down feature. Plays zone and channel announcement voice
messages for the current channel.
Beacon Reset
Resets (cancels) the Beacon tone, but it does not turn Contacts
the Beacon feature off. Requires purchase of Connect Provides direct access to the Contacts list.
Plus Man Down feature. Emergency On/Off
®
Bluetooth Audio Switch Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an
Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker emergency.
and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Indoor Location
Bluetooth Connect Toggles Indoor Location on or off.
Initiates a Bluetooth find-and-connect operation.
194
English
Intelligent Audio Radio Disable

Toggles intelligent audio on or off. Allows a target radio to be remotely disabled.
Man Down Alarms On/Off Remote Monitor
Toggles all configured Man Down Alarms on or off. Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it
Requires purchase of Connect Plus Man Down feature. giving any indicators.
Man Down Alarms Reset Reset Home Channel
If pressed while a Man Down feature Alert Tone is Sets a new home channel.
playing, the tone is cancelled and feature timers are Ring Alert Type
reset, but it does not turn the Man Down Alarms off. Provides direct access to the Ring Alert Type Setting.
Requires purchase of Man Down feature.
Roam Request
Manual Dial Requests to search for a different site.
Depending on the programming, initiates a Private or
Phone Call by keying in any subscriber ID or phone Scan
number. Toggles scan on or off.
One Touch Access Silence Home Channel Reminder
Directly initiates a predefined Private Call, a Call Alert, a Mutes the Home Channel Reminder.
Quick Text message, or Home Revert. Site Lock On/Off
Privacy When toggled on, the radio searches the current site
Toggles privacy on or off. only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in
addition to the current site.
Radio Check
Determines if a radio is active in a system. Text Message
Selects the text message menu.
Radio Enable
Allows a target radio to be remotely enabled. Vibrate Style
Configures the vibrate style.
195
English
Voice Announcement On/Off Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)

Toggles voice announcement on or off. Toggles the satellite navigation system on or off.
Wi-Fi Power Level
Toggles Wi-Fi on or off. Toggles transmit power level between high and low.
Zone Unassigned
Allows selection from a list of zones. Indicates that the button function has not yet been
assigned.
6.1.2.2
6.1.3
Assignable Settings or Utility
Identifying Status Indicators in
Functions
Connect Plus Mode
AF Suppressor
Toggles the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor feature on The radio display shows radio status, text entries, and
or off. menu entries.
All Tones/Alerts
6.1.3.1
Toggles all tones and alerts on or off.
Display Icons
Backlight
Toggles display backlight on or off. The following are icons that appear on the display of the
radio. Icons are displayed on the status bar, arranged left-
Backlight Brightness
Adjusts the brightness level.
Display Mode
Toggles the day/night display mode on or off.
196
English
most in order of appearance/usage and are channel Indoor Location Available 4

specific.
Indoor location status is on and available.
Received Signal Strength Indicator Indoor Location Unavailable 4

(RSSI) Indoor location status is on but unavailable
The number of bars displayed represents due to Bluetooth disabled or Beacons
the radio signal strength. Four bars indi- Scan suspended by Bluetooth.
cate the strongest signal. This icon is only
Mute Mode
displayed while receiving.
Mute Mode is enabled and speaker is mut-
Bluetooth Not Connected ed.
The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there Notification
is no remote Bluetooth device connected.
Notification List has one or more missed
Bluetooth Connected events.
The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon Power Level
stays lit when a remote Bluetooth device is or
Radio is set at Low power or Radio is set
connected.
at High power.
High Volume Data
Tones Disable
Radio is receiving high volume data and
channel is busy.
4 Only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware
197
English
Option Board Unsecure

The Option Board is enabled. The Privacy feature is disabled.
Option Board Non-Function Site Roaming

The Option Board is disabled. The site roaming feature is enabled.
GNSS Available Battery

The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled. The The number of bars (0 – 4) shown indi-
icon stays lit when a position fix is availa- cates the charge remaining in the battery.
ble. Blinks when the battery is low.
GNSS Not Available/Out of Range Contact

The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled but is Radio contact is available.
not receiving data from the satellite.
Call Log
Scan Radio call log.
Scan feature is enabled.
Message
Emergency Incoming message.
Radio is in Emergency mode.
Ring Only
Secure Ringing mode is enabled.
The Privacy feature is enabled.
Silent Ring
Silent ring mode is enabled.
198
English
Vibrate Call Icons

Vibrate mode is enabled. The following icons appear on your radio display during a
call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate
Vibrate and Ring
ID type.
Vibrate and Ring mode is enabled.
Wi-Fi Excellent 5 Private Call

Wi-Fi signal is excellent. Indicates a Private Call in progress. In
the Contacts list, it indicates a subscrib-
Wi-Fi Good 5 er alias (name) or ID (number).
Wi-Fi signal is good.
Group Call/Site All Call
Wi-Fi Average 5
Indicates a Group Call or Site All Call in
Wi-Fi signal is average. progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates
a group alias (name) or ID (number).
Wi-Fi Poor 5
Phone Call as Private Call
Wi-Fi signal is poor.
Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call in
Wi-Fi Unavailable 5 progress.
Wi-Fi signal is unavailable.
6.1.3.2

199
English
6.1.3.3 Sent Successfully

Advanced Menu Icons The text message has been successfully sent.
The following icons appear beside menu items that offer a OR
a sub-menu offering two options.
Send Failed
Checkbox (Empty)
The text message has not been sent.
Indicates the option is not selected. OR
Checkbox (Checked)
Indicates the option is selected.
In Progress
Solid Black Box
• The text message to a group alias or ID is
Indicates the option selected for the OR pending transmission.
menu item with a sub-menu.
• The text message to a subscriber alias or
ID is pending transmission, followed by
6.1.3.4 waiting for acknowledgement.
Sent Item Icons Individual or Group Message Read
The following icons appear at the top right corner of the The text message has been read.
radio display in the Sent Items folder. OR
200
English
Individual or Group Message Unread Bluetooth Sensor Device

Bluetooth-enabled sensor device,
The text message has not been read.
OR such as gas sensor.
6.1.3.6
LED Indicator
6.1.3.5
The LED indicator shows the operational status of your
Bluetooth Device Icons radio.
The following icons also appear next to items in the list of
Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device
Blinking red Battery mismatch occurs or radio is
type.
transmitting at low battery condition,
receiving an emergency transmission
Bluetooth Data Device or has failed the self-test upon power-
Bluetooth-enabled data device, such as ing up, or has moved out of range if ra-
a scanner. dio is configured with Auto-Range
Transponder System. Mute Mode is
Bluetooth Audio Device enabled.
Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such Rapidly Radio is receiving over-the-air file
as a headset. blinking red transfer (Option Board firmware file,
Network Frequency file or Option
Bluetooth PTT Device Board Codeplug file) or upgrading to a
Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such as new Option Board firmware file.
a PTT-Only Device (POD).
201
English
Blinking Radio is receiving a Call Alert, re- High pitched tone Low pitched tone
green and ceived a text message or Scan is ena-
yellow bled and is receiving activity. Indicator tones provide you with audible indications of the
Solid yellow Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable status after an action to perform a task is taken.
Mode.
Double Radio is actively searching for a new Positive Indicator Tone
blinking yel- site.
low Negative Indicator Tone
Blinking yel- Radio is receiving a Call Alert or Scan

low is enabled and is idle (radio will remain 6.1.3.8
muted to any activity). Alert Tones
Solid green Radio is powering up or transmitting. Alert tones provide you with audible indications of the
Blinking Radio is powering up, receiving a call status, or response to data received on the radio.
green or data.
Double Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled Continuous Tone A monotone sound.
blinking call. Sounds continuously until
green termination.
Periodic Tone Sounds periodically de-
6.1.3.7 pending on the duration
set by the radio. Tone
Indicator Tones starts, stops, and repeats
The following are the tones that sound through the radio itself.
speaker.
202
English
Repetitive Tone A single tone that repeats 6.2.1

itself until it is terminated Selecting a Site
by the user.
A site provides coverage for a specific area. A Connect
Momentary Tone Sounds only once for a Plus site has a site controller and a maximum of 15
short period of time de- repeaters. In a multi-site network, the Connect Plus radio
fined by the radio. will automatically search for a new site when the signal
level from the current site drops to an unacceptable level.
6.1.4
6.2.1.1
Switching Between Connect Plus
Roam Request
and Non-Connect Plus Modes
A Roam Request tells the radio to search for a different
To switch to a non-Connect Plus mode, you must change
site, even if the signal from the current site is acceptable.
to another zone, if programmed by your dealer or system
administrator. Check with your dealer or system If there are no sites available:
administrator to see if your radio has been programmed • The radio displays Searching and Selected Channel
with non-Connect Plus zones, and what features are Alias and continues to search through the list of sites.
available while operating in non-Connect Plus zones.
6.2
Making and Receiving Calls

in Connect Plus Mode
This section explains general radio operations and call
features that are available in your radio.
203
English
• The radio will return to the previous site, if the previous • You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the
site is still available. radio is unlocked.
NOTICE: • The display shows Site Unlocked.
This is programmed by your dealer.
Press the programmed Roam Request button. 6.2.1.3

You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switched to Site Restriction
a new site. The display shows Site ID <Site
Your Connect Plus radio system administrator has the
Number>.
ability to decide which network sites your radio is and is not
allowed to use. Your radio does not need to be
reprogrammed to change the list of allowed and disallowed
6.2.1.2
sites. If your radio attempts to register at a disallowed site,
Site Lock On/Off you see a brief message stating: Site <number given>
When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. Not Allowed. The radio then searches for a different
When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition network site.
to the current site.
6.2.2
Press the programmed Site Lock button. Selecting a Zone
If the Site Lock function is toggled on:
The radio can be programmed with a maximum of 16
• You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the Connect Plus Zones and each Connect Plus zone contains
radio has locked to the current site. a maximum of 16 assignable positions on the Channel
Selector Knob.
• The display shows Site Locked.
If the Site Lock function is toggled off:
204
English
Each assignable knob position can be used to start one of 2 Select the required zone.
the following voice call types:
• Group Call Radio Control Steps
• Multi-group Call or Press or and scroll to
• Site All Call the required zone.
• Private Call
3
Press to select.
1 Access the Zone feature by performing the following:
Radio Con- Steps and returns to the selected zone screen.
trols
Programmed Press the programmed Zone 6.2.3
Zone Selec- Selection button.
tion button Using Multiple Networks
Radio menu If your radio has been programmed to use multiple Connect
Plus networks, you can select a different network by
a Press to access the
switching to the Connect Plus zone that is assigned to the
menu.
desired network. These network-to-zone assignments are
b Press or to Zone configured by your dealer through radio programming.
and press to select.
The current zone is displayed and indicated by a .
205
English
6.2.4
Selecting a Call Type
Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a call type. This
can be a Group Call, Multi-group Call, Site All Call or
Private Call, depending on how your radio is programmed.
If you change the Channel Selector Knob to a different
position (that has a call type assigned to it), this causes the
radio to re-register with the Connect Plus site. The radio
registers with the Registration Group ID that has been
programmed for the new Channel Selector Knob position
call type. Once the required zone is displayed (if you have
If you select a position that has no call type assigned to it, multiple zones in your radio), turn the programmed
your radio sounds a continuous tone and the display shows Channel Selector Knob to select the call type.
Unprogrammed. Your radio does not operate when selected
to an unprogrammed channel, use the Channel Selector 6.2.5
Knob to select a programmed channel instead.
Receiving and Responding to a
Radio Call
Once the channel, subscriber ID or call type is displayed,
you can proceed to receive and respond to calls.
206
English
The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through
and blinks green when the radio is receiving. the radio speaker.
NOTICE:
The LED lights up solid green while the radio is 1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm)
transmitting and double blinks green when the radio from your mouth.
is receiving a privacy-enabled call. To unscramble a The LED lights up solid green.
privacy-enabled call, your radio must have the same
Privacy Key, OR the same Key Value and Key ID
2 Wait for one of the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if
(programmed by your dealer), as the transmitting
enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.
radio (the radio you are receiving the call from).
See Privacy on page 261 for more information. 3 Release the PTT button to listen.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
6.2.5.1 period of time, the call ends.
Receiving and Responding to a Group
NOTICE:
Call See Making a Group Call on page 210 for details on
To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be making a Group Call.
configured as part of that group.
6.2.5.2
When you receive a Group Call (while on the Home
screen), the LED blinks green.The Group Call icon appears Receiving and Responding to a Private
in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller Call
alias. The second text line displays the group call alias.
A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another
individual radio.
207
English
When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinks green. The Receiving a Site All Call
Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first
text line shows the caller alias. Your radio unmutes and the A Site All Call is a call from an individual radio to every
incoming call sounds through the speaker of the radio. radio on the site. It is used to make important
announcements requiring the user's full attention.
1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) When you receive an Site All Call, a tone sounds and the
from your mouth. LED blinks green.
The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The
first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line
The LED lights up solid green. displays Site All Call. Your radio unmutes and the
incoming call sounds through the radio speaker.
3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), Once the Site All Call ends, the radio returns to the
and speak clearly into the microphone. previous screen before receiving the call. A Site All Call
does not wait for a predetermined period of time before
4 Release the PTT button to listen. ending.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of You cannot respond to a Site All Call.
time, the call ends. NOTICE:
You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. See Making a Site All Call on page 212 for details
on making a Site All Call.
See Making a Private Call on page 211 for details on
making a Private Call. The radio stops receiving the Site All Call if you
switch to a different channel while receiving the call.
During a Site All Call, you will not be able to use any
6.2.5.3
programmed button functions until the call ends.
208
English
6.2.5.4 Receiving an Inbound Phone Talkgroup

Receiving an Inbound Private Phone Call
Call
When you receive an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call, the
When you receive an Inbound Private Phone Call, the Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first
Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right text line shows Call1.
corner. The first text line shows Phone Call.
Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen.
1 Press and hold the PTT button to answer and talk.
Release the PTT button to listen.
6.2.5.6
2 Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call
Long press to end the call. When you receive an Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call, the
The first line of the display shows Ending. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first
second line of the display shows Phone Call.... text line shows Multigroup Call. The radio unmutes and
The display returns to the Phone Call screen. the incoming multi-group call sounds through the radio
The display shows Phone Call Ended. speaker.
6.2.6
6.2.5.5 Making a Radio Call
After selecting your channel, you can select a subscriber
alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:
• The Channel Selector Knob.
209
English
• A programmed One Touch Access button – The One Making a Group Call
Touch Access feature allows you to make a Private Call
to a predefined ID easily. This feature can be assigned To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be
to a short or long programmable button press. You can configured as part of that group.
only have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access
button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch 1 Select the channel with the active group alias or ID.
Access buttons programmed. See Selecting a Call Type on page 206.
• The Contacts list (see Contacts Settings on page 227).
2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm)
NOTICE: from your mouth.
Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled
on the channel to send a privacy-enabled 3 Press the PTT button to make the call.
transmission. Only target radios with the same Key
The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call icon
Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to
appears in the top right corner. The first text line
unscramble the transmission.
shows the group call alias.
See Privacy on page 261 for more information.
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),
6.2.6.1 and speak clearly into the microphone.
Making a Call with the Channel
Selector Knob
When the target radio responds, the LED blinks
This feature allows the radio users to make different call
green, the radio unmutes and the response sounds
types : Group Call, Private Call, Site All Call, Multi-group
through the radio speaker. You see the Group Call
Call.
icon, the group alias or ID, and transmitting radio
alias or ID on your display.
6.2.6.1.1
210
English
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm)
period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the from your mouth.
screen you were on prior to initiating the call.
6.2.6.1.2 The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon
Making a Private Call appears on the top right corner. The first text line
shows the target subscriber alias. The second text
While you can receive and/or respond to a Private Call line displays the call status.
initiated by an authorized individual radio, your radio must
be programmed for you to initiate a Private Call.
You will hear a negative indicator tone, when you make a and speak clearly into the microphone.
Private Call using the Contacts list, Call Log, One Touch
Access button, or the Channel Selector Knob, if this 5 Release the PTT button to listen.
feature is not enabled.
Use the Text Message or Call Alert features to contact an green.
individual radio. See Text Messaging on page 134 or Call
Alert Operation on page 236 for more information. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone.
1 Do one of the following. The display shows Call Ended.
• Select the channel with the active subscriber Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio
alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If the
206. target radio is not available, you hear a short tone and see
• Press the programmed One Touch Access negative mini notice on the display.
button.
211
English
6.2.6.1.3 Making a Multi-group Call

Making a Site All Call
This feature allows you to transmit to all users on multiple
This feature allows you to transmit to all users on the site groups. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to
that are currently not engaged in another call. Your radio use this feature.
must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. NOTICE:
Users on the channel/site cannot respond to an Site All Users on the groups cannot respond to a Multi-
Call. group Call.
1 Select the channel with the active Site All Call group 1 Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select the Multi-
alias. See Selecting a Call Type on page 206. group alias or ID.
2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) 2 Press the PTT button to make the call.
from your mouth. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows
the Multi-group alias or ID.
Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)
The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call icon and speak clearly into the microphone.
shows Site All Call.

and speak clearly into the microphone.
6.2.6.1.4
212
English
6.2.6.1.5 The display shows the Private Call alias or ID.

Making a Private Call with a One Touch
Call Button 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)
NOTICE: and speak clearly into the microphone.
Programmable buttons press must be initiated from
the Home screen. 5 Release the PTT button to listen.
The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily make a When the target radio responds, the LED blinks
Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. This green.
feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
button press. period of time, the call ends.
You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a One
Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch 6.3
Call buttons programmed.
Advanced Features in
1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to Connect Plus Mode
make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call
alias or ID. This chapter explains the operations of the features
from your mouth. 6.3.1

Home Channel Reminder
The LED lights up solid green. This feature provides a reminder when the radio is not set
to the home channel for a period of time.
213
English
If this feature is enabled by using the CPS, the Home Muting the Home Channel Reminder
Channel Reminder tone and announcement sound, the first
line of the display shows Non and the second line shows When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can
Home Channel periodically when the radio is not set to the temporarily mute the reminder by performing the following
home channel for a period of time. action.
You can respond to the reminder by performing one of the
Press the Silence Home Channel Reminder
following actions:
programmable button.
• Return to the home channel.
The first line of the display shows HCR and the
• Mute the reminder temporarily by using the second line shows Silenced.
• Set a new home channel by using the programmable
button. 6.3.1.2
Setting a New Home Channel
6.3.1.1 When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can set a
new home channel by performing one of the following
actions:
• Press the Reset Home Channel programmable

button.
The first line of the display shows the channel alias
and the second line shows New Home Ch.
• Set a new home channel via the menu:
214
English
If one of these failures occurs, your radio attempts to roam

a. Press to access the menu. to a different Connect Plus site. This search process may
result in your radio finding an operable Connect Plus site,
or it may result in your radio finding a Fallback Channel (if
your radio is enabled for Auto Fallback).
select.
A Fallback Channel is a repeater that is normally part of an
c. Press or to Radio Settings and press
operable Connect Plus site, but cannot communicate with
either the site controller or Connect Plus network at that
to select.
moment. In Fallback mode, the repeater operates as a
d. Press or to Home Channel and press single digital repeater. Auto Fallback Mode supports non-
emergency Group Calls only. No other call types are
to select. supported in Fallback Mode.
e. Select from the list of valid channels.
6.3.2.1
channel alias.
Indications of Auto Fallback Mode
When your radio is using a Fallback channel, you hear the
intermittent Fallback Tone approximately once every 15
6.3.2 seconds (except while transmitting). The display
Auto Fallback periodically shows a brief message, Fallback Channel.
Your radio only permits PTT on the selected Group Contact
Auto Fallback is a system feature that allows you to
(Group Call, Multigroup Call, or Site All Call). It does not
continue to make and receive non-emergency calls on the
allow you to make other types of calls.
selected Group Contact, if certain types of failures occur in
the Connect Plus system.
215
English
6.3.2.2 Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback

Mode
NOTICE:
Calls are heard only by radios that are monitoring
the same Fallback channel and selected to the
same Group. Calls are not networked to other sites
or other repeaters.
Emergency voice calls or Emergency Alerts are not
available in Fallback mode. If you press the
emergency button in Fallback mode, the radio
provides an invalid key press tone. Display-
equipped radios also show the message, “Feature
not available”.
Private (radio to radio) and Phone calls are not
available in Fallback mode. If you attempt a call to a
private contact, you will receive a denial tone. At this
point you should select a desired group contact.
Other non-supported calls include Remote Monitor,
Call Alert, Radio Check, Radio Enable, Radio
Disable, Text messaging, Location Updates, and
packet data calls.
Enhanced Traffic Channel Access (ETCA) is not
supported in Auto Fallback mode. If two or more
radio users press PTT at the same time (or at
216
English
almost the same time), it is possible that both radios your radio) to force your radio to search for and register on
transmit until PTT is released. In this event, it is an available site. If no other site is available, your radio
possible that none of the transmissions will be returns to Auto Fallback mode after searching is complete.
understood by receiving radios. If you drive out of coverage of your Fallback repeater, your
Making calls in Fallback mode is similar to normal radio enters Search mode (display indicates Searching).
functioning. Simply select the group contact you wish to
use (using the radio’s normal channel selection method), 6.3.3
and then press the PTT to start your call. It is possible that Radio Check
the channel may be in use already by another group. If the
channel is in use, you receive a busy tone and the display If enabled, this feature allows you to determine if another
will say “Channel Busy”. You may select Group, Multi-group radio is active in a system without disturbing the user of
or Site All Call contacts using your radio’s normal channel that radio. No audible or visual notification is shown on the
selection method. While the radio is operating on the target radio.
Fallback Channel, the Multigroup operates just like other This feature is only applicable for subscriber IDs.
Groups. It is only heard by radios that are currently
selected to the same Multi-group.
6.3.3.1
6.3.2.3
Sending a Radio Check
Returning to Normal Operation 1 Access the Radio Check feature.
If the site returns to normal trunking operation while you are
in range of your Fallback repeater, your radio automatically Radio Steps
exits Auto Fallback mode. You hear a registration "beep" Control
when the radio successfully registers. If you are in the
Program- a Press the programmed Radio
range of an operable site (that is not in Fallback mode), you
med Ra- Check button.
may press the Roam Request button (if programmed for
217
English
Radio Steps 2 Wait for acknowledgment.

Control If the target radio is active in the system, a tone
dio sounds and the display briefly shows Target Radio
b Press or to the required
Check subscriber alias or ID and press Available.
button If the target radio is not active in the system, a tone
to select. sounds and the display briefly shows Target Radio
Not Available.
Menu
a Press to access the menu. Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen
when initiated via Menu.
b Press or to Contacts
Radio returns to the Home Screen if initiated via the
c Press or to the required
subscriber alias or ID and press 6.3.4
to select. Remote Monitor
d Press or to Radio Use the Remote Monitor feature to turn on the microphone
of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDs only). The green
Check and press to select. LED will blink once on the target subscriber. You can use
this feature to monitor, remotely, any audible activity
The display shows the Target Alias, indicating the surrounding the target radio.
request is in progress. The LED lights up solid Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this
green. feature.
218
English
6.3.4.1 Radio Steps

Initiating Remote Monitor Control
NOTICE: b Press or to Contacts
Remote Monitor automatically stops after a
programmed duration or when there is any attempt and press to select.
to initiate transmission, change channels or power
down the radio. c Press or to the required
subscriber alias or ID and press
1 Access the Remote Monitor feature.
to select.
Radio Steps d Press or to Manual Di‐
Control
al and press to select.
Pro- a Press the programmed Remote
gram- Monitor button. e Press or to Remote
med Re-
mote b Press or to the required Mon. and press to select.
Monitor subscriber alias or ID and press
Button The first text line shows Rem. Monitor. The second
to select. text line displays the Target Alias, indicating the
request is in progress. The LED lights up blinking
Menu
green.
219
English
2 Wait for acknowledgment. Starting and Stopping Scan

If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and NOTICE:
the display momentarily shows Rem. Monitor This procedure turns the Scan feature On or Off for
Successful. Your radio starts playing audio from all Connect Plus zones with the same Network ID as
the monitored radio for a programmed duration and your currently selected zone. It is important to note
display shows Rem. Monitor, followed by target that even when the Scan feature is turned on via
alias. Once the timer expires, the radio sounds an this procedure, scan may still be disabled for some
alert tone and the LED turns off. (or all) groups on your scan list. See Editing the
If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative Scan List on page 222 for more information.
indicator tone the display shows Rem. Monitor You can start and stop scanning by pressing the
Failed. programmed Scan button OR follow the procedure
described next.
6.3.5 1
Scan
This feature allows your radio to monitor and join calls for 2
groups defined in a pre-programmed scan list. When scan Press or to Scan and press to select.
is enabled, the scan icon appears on the status bar and the
LED blinks yellow when idle. 3 Press or to Turn On or Turn Off and press
6.3.5.1 to select.
• The display shows Scan On if scan is enabled.
220
English
• The Scan menu shows Turn Off if scan is 4 Release the PTT button to listen.
enabled.
If you do not respond within the hang time, the radio
• The display shows Scan Off if scan is disabled. returns to scanning other groups.
• The Scan menu shows Turn On if scan is
disabled. 6.3.6
User Configurable Scan
6.3.5.2 If the Edit List menu is enabled, a user is able to Add and
Remove the scan members from the Add Member menu. A
Responding to a Transmission During Scan List member must be a regular Group Contact (for
a Scan example, not Multi-group or Site All Call/Network Wide All
Call) that is currently assigned to a Channel Selector
During scanning, your radio stops on a group where activity
position in a Connect Plus Zone with the same Network ID
is detected. The radio continuously listens for any member
as the currently selected Zone. The Talkgroup alias must
in the scan list when idle on the control channel.
not match any Talkgroup that has been included in the
current Zone Scan List.
from your mouth. Scan can be turned on or off from the menu or by pressing
a programmed Scan On/Off button.
2 Press the PTT button during hang time. This feature functions only when the radio is not currently
The LED lights up solid green. involved in a call. If you are presently listening to a call,
your radio cannot scan for other group calls, and is
therefore unaware they are in progress. Once your call is
finished, your radio returns to the control channel time slot
and is able to scan for groups that are in the scan list.
221
English
6.3.7 NOTICE:
Editing the Scan List A Scan List member must be a regular Group
Contact (not Multi-group or Site All Call/Network
NOTICE: Wide All Call) that is currently assigned to a
If the scan list entry happens to be the currently Channel Selector position in a Connect Plus Zone
selected group, the radio listens for activity on this with the same Network ID as the currently selected
group regardless of whether the list entry currently Zone.
shows a check mark or not. Whenever a radio is not The Talkgroup alias must not match any Talkgroup
in a call, the radio listens for activity on its Selected that has been included in the current Zone Scan
Group, Multi-group, the Site All Call, and its Default List.
Emergency Revert Group (if configured for one).
This operation cannot be disabled. If Scan is 1
enabled the radio will also listen for activity on Press to access the menu.
enabled Zone Scan List members.
Your scan list determines which groups can be scanned. 2 Press or to View/Edit List and press
The list is created when your radio is programmed. If your
radio has been programmed to allow you to edit the scan to select.
list, you can:
3 Press or to the desired Group name.
• Enable/disable scan for individual groups on the list.
If a check mark precedes the Group name, then
• Add and Remove the scan members from the Add scan is currently enabled for this Group.
Member menu. Refer to Add or Delete a Group via the
Add Members Menu on page 223. If there is no check mark preceding the Group name,
then scan is currently disabled for this Group.
222
English
4 Add or Delete a Group via the Add

to select the desired Group.
Members Menu
The display shows Enable if scan is currently
disabled for the Group. The Connect Plus radio does not allow a duplicate group
number or a duplicate group alias to be placed on a zone
The display shows Disable if scan is currently scan list (or to be shown as a "scan candidate"). Thus, the
enabled for the Group. list of "scan candidates" described in step 6 and step 7
sometimes changes after adding or deleting a group from
5 Select the displayed option (Enable or Disable) and the zone scan list.
press to select. If your radio has been programmed to allow you to edit the
scan list, you can use the Add Members menu to add a
Depending on which option was selected, the radio
group to the scan list of the currently selected zone, or to
momentarily displays Scan Enabled or Scan delete a group from the scan list of the currently selected
Disabled as confirmation. zone.
The radio displays the Zone scan list again. If scan was 1
enabled for the Group, the check mark displays before the Press to access the menu.
Group name. If scan was disabled for the Group, the check
mark is removed before the Group name. 2
Press or to Scan option and press to
6.3.8 select.
223
English
3 Your radio displays the first entry in a list of groups

Press or to <Add Members> and press assigned to a channel position in that zone. The
to select. groups on the list are called "scan candidates",
because they can be added to the scan list of your
The display shows Add Members from Zone n (n = currently selected zone (or they are already on the
the Connect Plus zone number of the first Connect zone scan list).
Plus zone in your radio with the same Network ID as
your currently selected zone). If the zone does not have any groups that can be
added to the scan list, the radio displays No
Candidates.
• If the group you want to add to the scan list is 7 Press or to scroll through the list of
assigned to a channel selector position in that candidate groups.
zone, go to step 6.
If a plus sign (+) is displayed immediately before the
• If the group you want to add to the scan list is group alias, this indicates the group is currently on
assigned to a channel selector position in a the scan list for the selected zone.
different Connect Plus zone, go to step 5.
If the plus sign (+) is not displayed immediately
before the alias, the group is not currently on the
5 Press or to scroll a list of Connect Plus scan list, but can be added.
zones that have the same Network ID as the
currently selected zone. 8
Press when the desired group alias is
6 After locating the Connect Plus zone where the displayed.
desired group is assigned to a channel selector
If this group is not currently on the scan list for the
position, press to select. currently selected zone, the Add (Group Alias)
message is displayed.
224
English
If this group is already on the scan list for the Understanding Scan Operation
currently selected zone, the Delete (Group Alias)
message is displayed. NOTICE:
If the Radio joins a call for a Zone Scan List
9 member from a different Zone and Call Hang Timer
Press to accept the displayed message (Add or expires before you are able to respond, in order to
Delete). respond, you must navigate to the Zone and
Channel of the Scan List Member and start a new
If deleting a group from the list, you will know the
call.
operation is successful because the plus sign (+) will
no longer display immediately before the alias. There are some circumstances in which you can miss calls
for groups that are in your scan list. When you miss a call
If adding a group to the list, you will know the
for one of the following reasons, this does not indicate a
operation is successful because the plus sign (+) will problem with your radio. This is a normal scan operation for
display before the alias. Connect Plus.
If you are attempting to add a group, and the list is • Scan feature is not turned on (check for the scan icon
already full, the radio displays List Full. If this on the display).
should occur, it will be necessary to delete a group
from the scan list prior to adding a new one. • Scan list member has been disabled via the menu (see
Editing the Scan List on page 222).
10 • You are participating in a call already.
When finished, press as many times as
necessary to return to the desired menu. • No member of the scanned group is registered at your
site (Multisite systems only).
6.3.9
225
English
6.3.10 NOTICE:
Scan Talkback For Capacity Max, if you scan into a call for a group
that is not assigned to a channel position in the
If your radio scans into a call from the selectable group currently selected zone and the call ends, switch to
scan list, and if the PTT button is pressed during the the proper zone and then select the channel
scanned call, the operation of the radio depends on position of the group to talk back to that group.
whether Scan Talkback was enabled or disabled during
For Connect Plus, if you scan into a call for a group
radio programming.
that is not assigned to a channel position in the
Scan Talkback Disabled currently selected zone and you miss the Hang
The radio leaves the scanned call and attempts to Time of the call, switch to the proper zone and then
transmit on the contact for the currently selected select the channel position of the group to talk back
channel position. After the Call Hang Time on the to that group.
currently selected contact expires, the radio returns to
If you scan into a call for a group that is not
the home channel and starts the Scan Hang Time
assigned to a channel position in the currently
Timer. The radio resumes group scan after its Scan
selected zone and you miss the Hang Time of the
Hang Time Timer expires.
call, switch to the proper zone and then select the
Scan Talkback Enabled channel position of the group to talk back to that
If the PTT button is pressed during the Group Hang group.
Time of the scanned call, the radio attempts to transmit
to the scanned group. 6.3.11
Editing Priority for a Talkgroup
The Priority Monitor feature allows the radio to
automatically receive transmission from the talkgroup with
226
English
higher priority when it is in another call. A tone sounds 5

when the radio switches to the call with higher priority. Press or to Edit Priority and press
There are two levels of priority for the talkgroups: P1 and to select.
P2. P1 has higher priority than P2.
NOTICE: 6 Press or to the required priority level and
If Default Emergency Revert Group ID is configured
in MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS, press to select.
there are three levels of priority for talkgroups: P0, The display shows positive mini notice before
P1, and P2. P0 is the permanent Emergency Revert returning to the previous screen. The priority icon
Group ID and the highest priority. Check with your appears on the left of the talkgroup.
dealer or system administrator for more information.
1 6.3.12
Contacts Settings
2 NOTICE:
Press or to Scan and press to select. You can add, or edit subscriber IDs for Connect
Plus Contacts. Deleting subscriber IDs can only be
3 Press or to View/Edit List and press performed by your dealer.
If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you
to select. can make a privacy-enabled voice call on that
channel. Only target radios with the same Privacy
4 Press or to the required talkgroup and press Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID as your
radio are able to unscramble the transmission.
to select. Access to Contact Lists depends on the zone configuration:
227
English
• If only one zone is configured in the radio, the Contact 6.3.12.1

List directly displays the list from the current selected Making a Private Call from Contacts
zone.
• If multiple zones are configured in the radio, the Zone 1
Contact Folder displays all zones with identical network Press to access the menu.
IDs as the current selected zone. The user can access
the contacts in these zones. 2
Contacts provide “address-book” capabilities on your radio. Press or to Contacts and press to
Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to select.
initiate a call. The entries are alphabetically sorted.
Each zone provides a Contact List with up to 100 contacts.
The following contact types are available: 3 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm)
from your mouth.
• Private Call
• Group Call 4 Press the PTT button to make the call.
• Multigroup Call The LED lights up solid green. The display shows
the destination alias.
• Site All Call Voice
• Site All Call Text 5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),
• Dispatch Call and speak clearly into the microphone.
The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text
message to a dispatcher PC through a third-party Text
Message Server.
228
English
6 Release the PTT button to listen. The entries are alphabetically sorted.
When the target radio responds, the LED blinks 3 Key in the first character of the required alias, and
green and the display shows the transmitting user's
then press the or button to locate the
ID.
required alias.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
period of time, the call ends. 4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm)
from your mouth.
You hear a short tone. The display shows Call
Ended.
The LED lights up solid green. The display shows
the destination alias.
6.3.12.2
Making a Call Alias Search
You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve and speak clearly into the microphone.
the required subscriber alias.
This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. 7 Release the PTT button to listen.
1 green.
Press to access the menu. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
period of time, the call ends.
2
Press or to Contacts and press to The display shows Call Ended.
select.
229
English
6.3.13 4
Call Indicator Settings Press or to Tones/Alert and press to
select.
This feature allows the radio users to configure call or text
message ringing tones. 5
Press or to Call Ringers and press
6.3.13.1 to select.
Activating and Deactivating Call
6
Ringers for Call Alert Press or to Call Alert and press to
You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a received select.
Call Alert. The current tone is indicated by a .
1 7
Press to access the menu. Press or to the required tone and press
to select.
2
Press or to Utilities and press to appears beside selected tone.
select.
3 Press or to Radio Settings and press
to select.
230
English
6.3.13.2 6
Activating and Deactivating Call Press or to Private Call and press
to select.
Ringers for Private Calls
You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received
6.3.13.3
Private Call.
Activating and Deactivating Call
1 Ringers for Text Message
You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Text
2 Message.
Press or to Utilities and press to
select. 1
2
to select. Press or to Utilities and press to
select.
4
Press or to Tones/Alerts and press 3 Press or to Radio Settings and press
to select.
to select.
5
Press or to Call Ringers and press 4
to select. Press or to Tones/Alerts and press
to select.
231
English
5 displays the All Tone Mute icon. If All Tones status is

Press or to Call Ringers and press enabled, the related ring alert type is displayed.
to select. The radio vibrates once if it is a momentary ring style. The
radio vibrates repetitively if it is a repetitive ring style. When
6 set to Ring and Vibrate, the radio sounds a specific ring
Press or to Text Message and press tone if there is any incoming radio transaction (for example,
to select. Call Alert or Message). It sounds like a positive indicator
The current tone is indicated by a . tone or missed call.
For radios with batteries that support the vibrate feature
7 and are attached to a vibrating belt clip, the available Ring
Press or to the required tone and press Alert Type options are Silent, Ring, Vibrate, and Ring and
to select. Vibrate.
appears beside selected tone. For radios with batteries that do not support the vibrate
feature and are not attached to a vibrating belt clip, Ring
Alert Type is automatically set to Ring. The available Ring
6.3.13.4 Alert Type options are Silent and Ring.
Selecting a Ring Alert Type You can select a Ring Alert Type by performing one of the
following actions.
NOTICE:
The programmed Ring Alert Type button is • Press the programmed Ring Alert Type button to
assigned by your dealer or system administrator. access the Ring Alert Type menu.
determine how your radio has been programmed. a. Press or to Ring, Vibrate, Ring &
You can program the radio calls to one predetermined Vibrate or Silent and press to select.
vibrate call. If All Tones status is disabled, the radio
232
English
• Access this feature through the menu. Configuring Vibrate Style

NOTICE:
by your dealer or system administrator. Check with
b. Press or to Utilities and press to your dealer or system administrator to determine
select. how your radio has been programmed.
c. Press or to Radio Settings and press Vibrate Style is enabled when the Vibrating Belt Clip is
to select. feature.
d. Press or to Tones/Alerts and press You can configure the vibrate style by performing one of
to select.
e. Press or to Ring Alert Type and press access the Vibrate Style menu.
to select. a. Press or to Short, Medium, or Long and
f. Press or to Ring, Vibrate, Ring & press to select.

• Access this feature via the menu.
6.3.13.5 a. Press to access the menu.

select.
233
English
c. Press or to Radio Settings and press Call Log

to select. Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered,
and missed Private Calls. Use the call log feature to view
d. Press or to Tones/Alerts and press and manage recent calls.
to select. You can perform the following tasks in each of your call
lists:
e. Press or to Vibrate Style and press
• Delete
to select. • View Details
f. Press or to Short, Medium, or Long and
6.3.14.1
press to select. Viewing Recent Calls
The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing.
6.3.13.6
Escalating Alarm Tone Volume 1
You can program your radio to continually alert you when a Press to access the menu.
automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. 2
This feature is known as Escalert. Press or to Call Log and press to
select.
6.3.14
234
English
3 When you select a call list and it contains no entries,

Press or to preferred list and press to the display shows List Empty.
select.
4 Press or to the required alias or ID and
The display shows the most recent entry at the top of
the list.
press to select.
4 Press or to view the list. 5

Press or to Delete and press to select.
Press the PTT button to start a Private Call with the
current selected alias or ID.
6.3.14.2 • Press to select Yes to delete the entry. The

Deleting a Call from a Call List display shows Entry Deleted.
1 • Press or to No, and press the button

Press to access the menu. to return to the previous screen.
2
Press or to Call Log and press to 6.3.14.3
select. Viewing Details from a Call List
3 1
Press or to the required list and press Press to access the menu.
to select.
235
English
2 6.3.15.1
Press or to Call Log and press to Responding to Call Alerts
select.
When you receive a Call Alert:
3 • A repetitive tone sounds.
Press or to the required list and press
to select.
• The display shows the notification list listing a Call Alert
4 Press or to the required alias or ID and with the alias or ID of the calling radio.
press to select. Depending on the configuration by your dealer or

system administrator, you can respond to a Call Alert
5 by doing one of the following:
Press or to View Details and press • Press the PTT button and respond with a Private
to select. Call directly to the caller.
Display shows details of call list. • Press the PTT button to continue normal
talkgroup communication.
The Call Alert is moved to the Missed Call option
6.3.15 at the Call Log menu. You can respond to the
Call Alert Operation caller from the Missed Called log.
Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user See Notification List on page 159 and Call Log Features on
to call you back when they are able to do so. page 117 for more information.
This feature is accessible through the menu by using
Contacts.
236
English
6.3.15.2 The LED lights up solid green when your radio is

Making a Call Alert from the Contact sending the Call Alert.
List If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the

display shows Call Alert Successful.
1 If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,
Press to access the menu. the display shows Call Alert Failed.
2
Press or to Contacts and press to 6.3.15.3
select.
Making a Call Alert with the One Touch
3 Use one of the steps described next to select the Access Button
required subscriber alias or ID:
• select the subscriber alias directly Press the programmed One Touch Access button
to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias.
• Press or to the required subscriber
The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber
alias and press to select. alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been
sent.
4 The LED lights up solid green when your radio is
Press or to Call Alert and press to sending the Call Alert.
select. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the
The display shows Call Alert: <Subscriber display shows Call Alert Successful.
Alias or ID>Call Alert and the subscriber alias
or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent.
237
English
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, • Access this feature by using the programmed
the display shows Call Alert Failed. Mute Mode button.
• Access this feature by placing the radio in a face-
6.3.16 Depending on radio model, the Face Down feature
Mute Mode can be enabled either through the radio menu or by
your system administrator. Check with your dealer or
Mute Mode provides an option to silence all audio
IMPORTANT:
When Mute Mode is initiated, all audio indicators are muted
User can only enable either Man Down or
except higher priority features such as emergency
Face Down at a time. Both features cannot
operations.
be enabled together.
NOTICE:
ongoing tones and audio transmissions.
Face Down feature is applicable to DP4601e
IMPORTANT: only.
Down one at a time. Both features cannot be The following occurs when Mute mode is enabled:
enabled together. • Positive Indicator Tone sounds.
6.3.16.1
• The red LED light starts blinking and remains blinking
Turning On Mute Mode until Mute Mode is exited.
Follow the procedure to turn on Mute Mode.
• Display shows Mute Mode icon on home screen.
Do one of the following: • Radio is muted.
238
English
• Mute Mode Timer begins counting down the duration 3

that is configured. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
select.
6.3.16.2
Setting Mute Mode Timer 4
Press or to Mute Timer. Press to
Mute Mode feature can be enabled for a pre-configured select.
amount of time by setting the Mute Mode Timer. The timer
duration is configured in the radio menu and can range 5 Press or to edit the numeric value of each
between 0.5–6 hours. Mute Mode is exited once the timer
expires. digit, and press .
If the timer is left at 0, the radio remains in Mute mode for
an indefinite period until the radio is moved to a face-up
6.3.16.3
position or the programmed Mute Mode button is pressed.
Exiting Mute Mode
NOTICE:
Face Down feature is applicable to DP4601e only. This feature can be exited automatically once the Mute
Mode Timer expires.
1
Press to access the menu. Do one of the following to exit Mute mode manually:
• Press the programmed Mute Mode button.
2
• Press the PTT button on any entry.
239
English
• Place the radio in a face-up position momentarily. Emergency Operation

NOTICE:
NOTICE: If your radio is programmed for Silent or Silent with
Face Down feature is applicable to Voice emergency initiation, in most cases it
DP4601e only. automatically exits silent operation after the
Emergency Call or Emergency Alert is finished. The
The following occurs when Mute mode is disabled:
exception to this rule is when Emergency Alert is the
• Negative Indicator Tone sounds. configured Emergency Mode and Silent is the
• Display shows Mute Mode Off. configured Emergency Type. If your radio is
programmed in this manner, the silent operation
• The blinking red LED turns off. continues until you cancel silent operation by
• Mute Mode icon disappears from home screen. pressing PTT or the button configured for
Emergency Off.
• Your radio unmutes and speaker state is restored.
Emergency voice calls and Emergency Alerts are
• If the timer has not expired, Mute mode timer is
not supported when operating in Connect Plus Auto
stopped.
Fallback mode. For more information see the Auto
NOTICE: Fallback on page 215.
Mute Mode is also exited if the user transmits voice
An Emergency Alert is used to indicate a critical situation.
or switches to an unprogrammed channel.
You can initiate an Emergency at any time on any screen
display, even when there is activity on the current channel.
6.3.17 Pressing the Emergency button initiates the programmed
Emergency mode. The programmed Emergency mode may
also be initiated by triggering the optional Man Down
feature. The Emergency feature may be disabled in your
radio.
240
English
Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for the Emergency Call with Voice to Follow
programmed Emergency button, except for long press, For the first transmission on the assigned emergency
which is similar with all other buttons: time slot, the microphone is automatically unmuted and
you may talk without pressing the PTT button. The
Short press
microphone stays “hot” in this fashion for a time period
Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds.
programmed into the radio. For subsequent
Long press transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must
Between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds. press the PTT button.
The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency Emergency Alert
On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned An Emergency Alert is not a voice call. It is an
operation of the Emergency button. emergency notification that is sent to radios that are
• If the short press for the Emergency button is assigned configured to receive these alerts. The radio sends an
to turn on the Emergency mode, then the long press for emergency alert by using the control channel of the
the Emergency button is assigned to exit the currently registered site. The Emergency Alert is
Emergency mode. received by radios in the Connect Plus network that are
programmed to receive them (no matter which network
• If the long press for the Emergency button is assigned site they are registered to).
to turn on the Emergency mode, then the short press for
the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Only one of the Emergency Modes can be assigned to the
Emergency mode. Emergency button per zone. In addition, each Emergency
mode has the following types:
When your radio is selected to a Connect Plus zone, it
supports three Emergency modes: Regular
Radio initiates an Emergency and shows audio and/or
Emergency Call visual indicators.
You must press the PTT button to talk on the assigned
emergency time slot.
241
English
Silent Depending on how your radio has been programmed, the

Radio initiates an Emergency without any audio or Emergency Details screen (or Alarm List screen) will stay
visual indicators. The radio suppresses all audio or on your radio display even after the Emergency ends. You
visual indications of the Emergency until you press the can save the emergency details to the Alarm List, or you
PTT button to start a voice transmission. can delete the emergency details as described in the
following sections.
Silent with Voice
The same as Silent operation, except that the radio also
unmutes for some voice transmissions. 6.3.17.2
Saving the Emergency Details to the
6.3.17.1 Alarm List
Receiving an Incoming Emergency
Saving the emergency details to the Alarm List allows you
Your radio may be programmed to sound an alert tone and to view the details again at a later time by selecting Alarm
also display information about the incoming Emergency. If List from the Main Menu.
so programmed, upon receiving the incoming Emergency,
the display shows the Emergency Details screen with the 1 While the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen
emergency icon, the Alias or ID of the radio that requested
the Emergency, the Group Contact being used for the is displayed, press .
Emergency, and one additional line of information. The
The Exit Alarm List screen displays.
additional information is the name of the zone that contains
the Group Contact.
2 Perform one of the following actions:
At the present time, the radio displays only the most
recently decoded Emergency. If a new Emergency is
received before the prior Emergency is cleared, the details • Select Yes and press to save the
for the new Emergency replace the details of the previous emergency details to the Alarm List, and to exit
Emergency. the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen.
242
English
Responding to an Emergency Call

• Select No and press to return to the
Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen. NOTICE:
If you do not respond to the Emergency Call within
the time allotted for the Emergency Call Hang Time,
6.3.17.3 the Emergency call will end. If you want to speak to
Deleting the Emergency Details the group after the Emergency Call Hang Time
expires, you must first select the channel position
1 While the Emergency Details screen is displayed, assigned to the group (if not already selected).
Then, press PTT to start a non-Emergency Call to
press . the group.
The Delete screen displays.
1 When receiving an Emergency Call, press any
button to stop all Emergency Call received
2 Perform one of the following actions: indications.
• Select Yes and press to delete the 2 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission
emergency details. on the Emergency group.
All radios that are monitoring this group hear your
• Select No and press to return to the transmission.
Emergency Details screen.
3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)
6.3.17.4
The LED lights up green.
243
English
4 Release the PTT button to listen. Ignore Emergency Revert Call

When the emergency initiating radio responds, the This feature enhancement provides an option for your radio
LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon, the to disregard an active Emergency Revert Call.
group ID, and transmitting radio ID on your display.
To enable Ignore Emergency Revert Call, your radio must
be configured through the Connect Plus Customer
Programming Software (CPCPS).
6.3.17.5
Responding to an Emergency Alert When the feature is enabled, the radio does not display
Emergency Call indications and does not receive any audio
NOTICE: on the default Emergency Revert Group ID.
The Group contact used for the Emergency Alert
Contact with your dealer for more information.
should not be used for voice communication. This
could prevent other radios from sending and
receiving Emergency Alerts on the same group.
An Emergency Alert from a radio indicates that the user is
in an urgent situation. You may respond to the alert by
initiating a private call to the radio who declared the
emergency, initiating a group call to a designated talk
group, sending the radio a Call Alert, initiating a Remote
Monitor of that radio, etc. The proper response is
determined by your organization and the individual
situation.
6.3.17.6
244
English
6.3.17.7 If you press the PTT button during this time, the
Initiating an Emergency Call Emergency call continues.
NOTICE:
If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any 6.3.17.8
audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice
until you press the PTT button to initiate a voice to Follow
transmission.
If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not Your radio must be programmed for this type of operation.
initially display any audio or visual indicators that the When enabled for this operation, when you press the
radio is in Emergency mode. However, your radio programmed Emergency button, and when your radio
unmutes for the transmissions of radios responding receives the time slot assignment, the microphone is
to your emergency. The emergency indicators only automatically activated without pressing the PTT button.
appear once you press the PTT button to initiate a This activated microphone state is also known as "hot mic".
voice transmission from your radio. The "hot mic" applies to the first voice transmission from
For both “Silent” and “Silent with Voice” operation, your radio during the Emergency call. For subsequent
the radio automatically exits silent operation after transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press
the Emergency Call is finished. the PTT button.
1 Press the programmed Emergency button. 1 Press the programmed Emergency button.
2 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission 2 The microphone remains active for the "hot mic" time
on the Emergency group. specified in your radio codeplug programming.
When you release the PTT button, the Emergency During this time, the LED lights up green.
call continues for the time allotted for the Emergency
Call Hang Time.
245
English
3 Press and hold the PTT button to talk longer than the sounds and the radio displays Alarm Sent. If the
programmed duration. Emergency Alert is unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone
sounds and the radio displays Alarm Failed.
6.3.17.9
6.3.17.10
Initiating an Emergency Alert Exiting Emergency Mode
NOTICE: NOTICE:
If your radio is programmed for "Silent" or "Silent If the Emergency call ends due to the expiration of
with Voice", it will not provide any audio or visual the Emergency Hang Time, but the emergency
indications that it is sending an Emergency Alert. If condition is not over, press the Emergency button
programmed for "Silent", the silent operation again to restart the process.
continues indefinitely until you press PTT or the
button configured for "Emergency Off". If If you initiate an Emergency Alert by pressing the
programmed for "Silent with Voice", the radio programmed Emergency button, your radio automatically
automatically cancels silent operation when the site exits Emergency mode after receiving a response from the
controller broadcasts the Emergency Alert. Connect Plus system.
If you initiate an Emergency call by pressing the
Press the orange Emergency button. programmed Emergency button, your radio will be
Upon transmitting the Emergency Alert to the site assigned a channel automatically when one becomes
controller, the radio display shows the Emergency available. Once your radio has transmitted a message
icon, the Group contact used for the Emergency indicating the emergency, you cannot cancel your
Alert, and TX Alarm. Emergency call. However, if you pressed the button by
accident or the emergency no longer exists, you may wish
to say this over the assigned channel. When you release
Once the Emergency Alert is successfully sent and is being
the PTT button, the Emergency call is discontinued after
broadcast for other radios to hear, a positive indicator tone
the Emergency Call Hang Time expires.
246
English
If your radio was configured for Emergency with Voice to understand how the Alarm works, what indication (tones)
Follow, use the “hot mic” period to explain your error, then your radio provides, and the action you should take.
press and release the PTT button to discontinue the The purpose of the Man Down Alarms is to alert others
transmission. The Emergency call is discontinued after the when you might be in danger. This is accomplished by
Emergency Call Hang Time expires. programming your radio to detect a certain angle of tilt, lack
of movement, or movement, depending on which Man
6.3.18 Down Alarm(s) is/are enabled. If your radio detects a
Man Down Alarms disallowed movement type, and if the condition is not
corrected in a certain period of time, the radio starts to play
NOTICE: an Alert Tone (if so programmed). At this point you should
This feature is applicable to DP4600e/DP4601e immediately take one or more of the corrective actions
only. discussed below, depending on which Man Down Alarm(s)
Man Down Alarms are not supported when has/have been enabled for your radio. If you do not take
operating in Fallback mode. For more information corrective action within a certain period of time, your radio
see the Auto Fallback on page 215. automatically starts an Emergency (either an Emergency
Call or Emergency Alert).
This section describes the Connect Plus Man Down
Feature. This is a purchasable feature that may or may not • Tilt Alarm – When your radio is tilted at or beyond a
apply to your radio. specified angle for a period of time, it plays an Alert
Tone (if so programmed). To prevent the radio from
Your Connect Plus portable radio can be enabled and automatically starting an Emergency Call or Emergency
programmed for one or more of the Man Down Alarms. Alert, restore the radio to the vertical position
Your dealer or radio system administrator can tell you immediately.
whether or not this applies to your radio and which specific
Man Down Alarms have been enabled and programmed. • Anti-Movement Alarm – When your radio is motionless
for a period of time, it plays an Alert Tone (if so
If your radio has been programmed for one or more of the programmed). To prevent the radio from automatically
following Man Down Alarms, it is important for you to
247
English
starting an Emergency Call or Emergency Alert, move Turning Man Down Alarms On and Off
the radio immediately.
NOTICE:
• Movement Alarm – When your radio is in motion for a
The programmed Man Down button and Man Down
period of time, it plays an Alert Tone (if so
settings are configured using CPS. Check with your
programmed). To prevent the radio from automatically
dealer or system administrator to determine how
starting an Emergency Call or Emergency Alert, stop the
your radio has been programmed.
radio’s motion immediately.
If you enable Man Down to maximum sensitivity and
Your dealer or radio system administrator can tell you
set Vibrate Style to high, the radio automatically
which of the above alarms (if any) has been enabled
restricts Vibrate Style to medium. This function
through radio programming. It is possible to enable both
prevents high Vibrate Style from initiating the Man
the Tilt and Anti- Movement Alarms. In that case, the Alert
Down emergency feature.
Tone plays when the radio detects the first movement
violation. The procedure for turning the Man Down Alarms On and
Off depends on how your radio is programmed. If
Instead of taking the corrective actions discussed above,
programmed with a Man Down Alarms On/Off button, use
you can also prevent the radio from starting the Emergency
the button to toggle the Man Down Alarms On and Off. This
call or Emergency Alert by using a programmable button, if
applies to all of the Man Down Alarms enabled for your
your radio has been configured in this manner. This is
radio.
discussed in the next two sections.
When using the programmable button to toggle the Man
6.3.18.1 Down Alarms On, your radio plays a tone that rises in pitch
and displays a brief confirmation message.
In order to hear the tones described above when turning
the Man Down Alarms On and Off, the MOTOTRBO radio
and Connect Plus Option Board must both be enabled for
keypad tones.
248
English
If your radio has been programmed so that Man Down 5 Press or to Enable or Disable and press
Alarms can be turned On and Off using the menu, perform
the following procedure. to select.
1
Resetting the Man Down Alarms
2
Press or to Utilities and press to If your radio has been programmed with either a Man Down
select. Alarms Reset button, or the Man Down Alarms menu
option, it is possible to reset the Man Down Alarms without
3 turning them On or Off. This stops any Man Down Alert
Press or to Connect Plus and press Tone that is currently playing, and it also resets the Alarm
to select. timers. However, it is still necessary to correct the
movement violation by taking the appropriate corrective
4 Press or to Man Down Alarm and press action described in the Man Down Alarms section. If the
movement violation is not corrected within a period of time,
to select. the Alert Tone starts playing again.
If Man Down Alarm is currently disabled, the Enable The procedure for resetting the Man Down Alarms depends
option is shown. on how your radio is programmed. If programmed with a
Man Down Alarms Reset button, use the button to Reset
If Man Down Alarm is currently enabled, the the Man Down Alarms. This applies to all of the Man Down
Disable option is shown. Alarms enabled for your radio.
When using the programmable button to reset the Man
Down Alarms, the radio shows a brief confirmation
message.
249
English
If your radio has been programmed so that Man Down Beacon Feature
Alarms can be Reset via the menu, follow the procedure
below. The Beacon feature is part of Connect Plus Man Down, a
purchasable feature. Your dealer or Radio System
1 Administrator can tell you if the Beacon feature applies to
Press to access the menu. your radio.
If your radio has been enabled and programmed for one or
2 more of the Man Down Alarms, it can also be enabled for
Press or to Utilities and press to the Beacon feature.
select.
If your radio automatically starts an Emergency Call or
3 Emergency Alert due to one of the Man Down Alarms, and
Press or to Connect Plus and press if your radio is also enabled for the Beacon feature, the
to select. radio starts to periodically emit a high pitched tone
approximately once every ten seconds. The interval can
4 Press vary depending on whether you are talking on your radio.
or to Man Down Alarm and press
The purpose of the Beacon tone is to help searchers locate
you. If your radio has also been enabled for the “Visual
to select.
Beacon”, the radio’s backlight comes on for a few seconds
every time the Beacon tone plays.
5
Press or to Reset and press to select. You can stop your radio from playing the Beacon tone by
using a programmable button, if your radio has been
The radio displays a brief confirmation message.
configured in this manner. This is discussed in the next two
sections. If your radio does not have the programmable
button or menu option, you can stop the Beacon tone by
6.3.19
turning the radio off and then on again, or by changing to a
250
English
different zone (if your radio has been programmed for more 2
than one zone). Press or to Utilities and press to
select.
6.3.19.1
Turning Beacon On and Off 3
Press or to Connect Plus and press
The procedure for turning the Beacon On and Off depends to select.
on how your radio is programmed. If programmed with a
Beacon On/Off button, use the button to toggle the Beacon 4
On and Off. Press or to Beacon and press to select.
• When using the programmable button to toggle the If Beacon is currently disabled, the Enable option is
Beacon On, your radio plays a tone that rises in pitch shown.
and shows a brief confirmation message.
If Beacon is currently enabled, the Disable option is
• When using the programmable button to toggle the shown.
Beacon Off, your radio plays a tone that falls in pitch
and shows a brief confirmation message. 5 Press or to Enable or Disable and press
In order to hear the tones described above when turning
the Beacon On and Off, the MOTOTRBO radio and to select.
Connect Plus Option Board must both be enabled for The radio shows a brief message to confirm that
keypad tones. If your radio has been programmed so that Man Down Beacon was enabled (or disabled).
the Beacon can be turned On and Off via the menu, follow
the procedure below.
1
251
English
6.3.19.2 4
Resetting the Beacon Press or to Beacon and press to select.
If your radio has been programmed with either the Beacon 5
Reset button, or the Beacon menu option, it is possible to Press or to Reset and press to select.
reset the Beacon. This stops the Beacon Tone (and also
the Visual Beacon) without turning the Beacon feature Off. The radio displays a brief confirmation message.
The procedure for resetting the Beacon depends on how
your radio is programmed. If programmed with a Beacon
Reset button, use the button to Reset the Beacon. When 6.3.20
using the programmable button to reset the Man Down Text Messaging
Alarms, your radio shows a brief confirmation message. If
your radio has been programmed so that the Beacon can Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text
be Reset via the menu, follow the procedure below. message, from another radio or a text message application.
There are two types of text messages, Digital Mobile Radio
1 (DMR) Short Text Message and text message. The
Press to access the menu. maximum length of a DMR Short Text Message is 23
characters. The maximum length of a text message is 280
2 characters, including the subject line. The subject line only
select.
3
Press or to Connect Plus and press
to select.
252
English
appears when you receive messages from e-mail • Press or to Manual Dial, and press
applications.
NOTICE: to select. The first line of the display shows
The maximum character length is only applicable for Number:. The second line of the display shows a
models with the latest software and hardware. For blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID
radio models with older software and hardware, the
maximum length of a text message is 140 and press .
characters. Contact your dealer for more The display shows Sending Message, confirming
information. your message is being sent.
If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds
6.3.20.1 and the display shows Message Sent.
Sending a Quick Text Message If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds
Your radio supports a maximum of 10 Quick Text and the display shows Message Send Failed.
messages as programmed by your dealer. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns
While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can edit you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-
each message before sending it. to-Send Text Messages on page 254).
If you are sending the message, perform the

following to select a recipient:
• Press or to the required alias and press
to select.
253
English
6.3.20.2 Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages

Sending Quick Text Messages with the You can select one of the following options while at the
One Touch Access Button Resend option screen:
• Resend
To send a predefined Quick Text message to a
predefined alias, press the programmed One Touch • Forward
Access button.
6.3.20.3.1
The display shows Sending Message.
Resending a Text Message
If message is successfully sent, your radio shows the
following indications:
• A positive tone sounds. Press to resend the same message to the
same subscriber/group alias or ID.
• The display shows Message Sent.
If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds
If message fails to be sent, your radio shows the following and the display shows the positive mini notice.
indications:
If the message cannot be sent, the display shows
• A negative tone sounds. the negative mini notice.
• The display shows Message Send Failed.
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to
the Resend option screen.
See Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 254.
6.3.20.3
254
English
6.3.20.3.2 Managing Sent Text Messages

Forwarding a Text Message
Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in
Select Forward to send the message to another Sent Items. The most recent sent text message is always
subscriber/group alias or ID. added to the top of the Sent Items list.
1 30 last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next
Press or to Forward and press to sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text
select. message in the folder.
2 To select the message recipient, press or to NOTICE:
the required alias or ID and press to select. Long press at any time to return to the Home
screen.
The display shows Sending Message, confirming your
message is being sent. 6.3.20.4.1
If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the Viewing a Sent Text Message
display shows Message Sent.
If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the 1 Access the Text Message feature.
display shows Message Send Failed.
Radio Steps
Controls
6.3.20.4
Pro- Press the programmed Text Mes-
gram- sage button.
med
255
English
Radio Steps Sending a Sent Text Message

Controls
You can select one of the following options while viewing a
Text sent text message:
Message • Resend
button
• Forward
Menu
• Delete
b Press or to Messages 1
Press again while viewing the message.
2 or to one of the following options and press
2
Press or to Sent Items and press to to select.
select.
Option Steps
3 Press or to the required message and press Forward Select Forward to send the selec-
ted text message to another sub-
to select. scriber/group alias or ID (see For-
The icon at the top right corner of the screen warding a Text Message on page
indicates the status of the message (see Sent Item 255).
Icons on page 200). Delete Select Delete to delete the text
message.
6.3.20.4.2
256
English
Option Steps of the message in the Sent Items folder without any
audio or visual indication.
Resend Select Resend to resend the selec-
If the radio changes mode or powers down before
ted text message to the same sub-
the status of the message in Sent Items is updated,
scriber/group alias or ID.
the radio cannot complete any In-Progress
The display shows Sending Mes‐ messages and automatically marks it with a Send
sage, confirming that the same Failed icon.
message is being sent to the same
The radio supports a maximum of five In-Progress
target radio.
messages at one time. During this period, the radio
If the message is sent successfully, cannot send any new message and automatically
a tone sounds and the display marks it with a Send Failed icon.
shows Message Sent.
If the message cannot be sent, a 6.3.20.4.3
low tone sounds and the display
shows Message Send Failed.
Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent
Items
If the message fails to send, the ra-
dio returns you to the Resend option
1 Access the Text Message feature.
screen. Press to resend the
message to the same subscriber/ Radio Con- Steps
group alias or ID. trols
Programmed Press the programmed Text
If you exit the message sending screen while the Text Mes- Message button.
message is being sent, the radio updates the status sage button
257
English
Radio Con- Steps

trols • Press or to Yes and press to select.
The display shows positive mini notice.
Menu
a Press to access the • Press or to No and press to return to
menu. the previous screen.
b Press or to Mes‐
6.3.20.5
sages and press to se-
lect. Receiving a Text Message
When your radio receives a message, the display shows
2 the Notification List with the alias or ID of the sender and
Press or to Sent Items and press to the Message icon.
select. You can select one of the following options when receiving
When you select Sent Items and it contains no text a text message:
messages, the display shows List Empty. • Read
• Read Later
3
Press or to Delete All and press to • Delete
select.
4 Choose one of the following.
258
English
6.3.20.6 • Forward
Reading a Text Message • Delete
• Delete All
1
Press or to Read? and press to select. NOTICE:
If the channel type is not a match, you can only
Selected message in the Inbox opens. forward, delete, or delete all Received messages.
Long press at any time to return to the Home

screen.
• Press to return to the Inbox. 6.3.20.7.1

Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox
• Press a second time to reply, forward, or
delete the text message. 1
6.3.20.7
2
Managing Received Text Messages Press or to Messages and press to
Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. The Inbox is select.
capable of storing a maximum of 30 messages.
3
Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according to the
Press or to Inbox and press to select.
most recently received.
Your radio supports the following options for text 4 Press or to view the messages.
messages:
259
English
5 Do one of the following: Radio Con- Steps

trols
• Press to select the current message, and
press again to reply, forward, or delete that
sages and press to se-
message.
lect.
• Long press to return to the Home screen.

2
Press or to Inbox and press to select.
6.3.20.7.2
Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox 3 Press or to the required message and press
1 Access the Text Message feature. to select.
4
Radio Con- Steps
Press once more to access the sub-menu.
trols
Programmed Press the programmed Text 5
Text Mes- Message button. Press or to Delete and press to select.
sage button
6
Menu
Press or to Yes and press to select.
a Press to access the
menu. The display shows Message Deleted, and the
screen returns to the Inbox.
260
English
6.3.20.7.3 3
Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox Press or to Delete All and press to
select.
1 Access the Text Message feature.
4
Radio Con- Steps Press or to Yes and press to select.
trols The display shows Inbox Cleared.
Programmed Press the programmed Text
Text Mes- Message button.
sage button 6.3.21
Menu
Privacy
a Press to access the If enabled, this feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by
menu. unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-
based scrambling solution. The signaling and user
identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled.
sages and press to se- Your radio must have privacy enabled on the current
lect. channel selector position to send a privacy-enabled
transmission, although this is not a necessary requirement
for receiving a transmission. While on a privacy-enabled
2 channel selector position, the radio is still able to receive
Press or to Inbox and press to select. clear (unscrambled) transmissions.
When you select Inbox and it contains no text Your radio supports Enhanced Privacy.
messages, the display shows List Empty.
To unscramble a privacy-enabled call transmission, your
radio must be programmed to have the same Key Value
261
English
and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy) as the transmitting NOTICE:

radio. Some radio models may not offer this Privacy
feature. Check with your dealer or system
Key Value and Key ID, you hear nothing at all (Enhanced
Privacy).
1
If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the Home screen Press to access the menu.
shows the Secure or Unsecure icon, except when the radio
is sending or receiving an Emergency call or alarm. 2
The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting Press or to Utilities and press to
and blinks green rapidly when the radio is receiving an select.
ongoing privacy-enabled transmission.
3 Press or to Radio Settings or or
You can access this feature by performing one of the
following actions:
to Connect Plus and press to select.
• Pressing the programmed Privacy button to toggle
privacy on or off. 4 Press or to Enhanced Privacy.
• Using the Radio Menu as described by the steps
described next. If the display shows Turn On, press to enable
Privacy. The radio displays a message confirming
your selection.
If the display shows Turn Off, press to disable

Privacy. The radio displays a message confirming
your selection.
262
English
If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the secure Security

or unsecure icon appears on the status bar, except
when the radio is sending or receiving an You can enable or disable any radio in the system. For
Emergency Alert. example, you might want to disable a stolen radio, to
prevent the thief from using it, and enable that radio, when
it is recovered.
6.3.21.1 NOTICE:
Making a Privacy-Enabled (Scrambled) Performing Radio Disable and Enable is limited to
radios with these functions enabled. Check with
Call your dealer or system administrator for more
Toggle privacy on using the programmed privacy button or information.
by using the menu. Your radio must have the Privacy
feature enabled for the currently selected channel position 6.3.22.1
to send a privacy-enabled transmission. When privacy is Radio Disable
enabled for the currently selected channel position, all
voice transmissions made by your radio will be scrambled.
1 Access this feature by performing one of the
This includes Group Call, Multigroup Call, talk-back during
following actions:
scanned calls, Site All Call, Emergency Call, and Private
Call. Only receiving radios with the same Key Value and
Radio Steps
Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the
Controls
transmission.
Radio a Press the programmed Radio
6.3.22 Disable Disable button.
button
263
English
Radio Steps Radio Steps

Controls Controls
b Press or to the required d Press or to Radio Dis‐
alias or ID and press to se- able and press to select.

lect.
The display shows Radio Disable: <Target
Radio Alias or ID> and the LED blinks green.
menu a Press to access the menu.
b Press or to Contacts 2 Wait for acknowledgement.
If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and
and press to select. The the display shows Radio Disable Successful.
entries are alphabetically sorted.
If not successful, a negative indicator tone sounds
c Use one of the steps described and the display shows Radio Disable Failed.
next to select the required sub-
scriber alias or ID:
• Select the required alias or ID 6.3.22.2
directly.
Radio Enable
• Press or to the re-
quired alias or ID and 1 Access this feature by performing one of the
following actions:
press to select.
264
English
Radio Steps Radio Steps

Con- Con-
trols trols
Radio a Press the programmed Radio • Press or to the re-
Enable Enable button. quired alias or ID and press
button
b Press or to the required
to select.
alias or ID and press to se- d Press or to Radio Ena‐
lect.
ble and press to select.
Radio
menu a Press to access the menu. The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber
Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green.
b Press or to Contacts
and press to select. The en- 2 Wait for acknowledgement.

tries are alphabetically sorted. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and
c Use one of the steps described the display shows Radio Enable Successful.
next to select the required sub- If not successful, a negative indicator tone sounds
scriber alias or ID and the display shows Radio Enable Failed.
• Select the required alias or ID
directly.
265
English
6.3.23 If the password is correct, the radio proceeds to

Password Lock Features power up. See Turning the Radio On on page 43.
If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong
If enabled, this feature only allows you access your radio if
Password. Repeat step 2.
the correct password is entered upon powering up.
After the third incorrect password, the display shows
6.3.23.1 Wrong Password and then, shows Radio Locked. A
tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow.
Accessing the Radio from Password
NOTICE:
1 Power up the radio. The radio is unable to receive any call,
including emergency calls, in locked state.
The radio sounds a continuous tone.
2 Enter your current four-digit password. Press or 6.3.23.2

to edit each digit numeric value. Each digit Turning the Password Lock On or Off
changes to . Press to move to next digit. Press
1
to confirm your selection. Press to access the menu.
You hear a positive indicator tone for every digit
2
entered. Press to remove each on the display. Press or to Utilities and press to
The radio sounds a negative indicator tone, if you select.
press when the line is empty, or if you press more

than four digits.
266
English
3 Press or to Radio Settings and press The disappears from beside Enabled.
to select.
6.3.23.3
4
Press or to Passwd Lock and press to
Unlocking the Radio from Locked State
select.
1 If your radio was powered down after being in the
5 Enter the four-digit password. locked state, power up the radio.
See step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow.
on page 266. The display shows Radio Locked.
6 2 Wait for 15 minutes.

Press to proceed. Your radio restarts the 15 minutes timer for locked
If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong state when you power up.
Password, and automatically returns to the previous
menu. 3 Repeat step 1 and step 2 in Accessing the Radio
from Password on page 266.
7 If the password entered in the previous step is 6.3.23.4

correct, press to enable/disable password lock. Changing the Password
The display shows beside Enabled. 1
267
English
2 7 If the password entered in the previous step is

select. correct, or to Change Pwd and press to
select.
8 Enter a new four-digit password.
to select. See step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password
on page 266.
4
Press or to Passwd Lock and press to 9 Reenter the previously entered four-digit password.
select. See step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password
on page 266.
5 Enter the four-digit password.
See step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password 10
on page 266. Press to proceed.
If the reentered password matches the new
6 password entered earlier, the display shows
Press to proceed. Password Changed.
If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong If the reentered password does NOT match the new
Password, and automatically returns to the previous password entered earlier, the display shows
menu. Passwords Do Not Match.
menu.
268
English
6.3.24 Your radio can support up to 4 simultaneous Bluetooth

Bluetooth Operation connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique
types. For example, a headset, and a PTT-Only Device
NOTICE: (POD).
If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-related
Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled device's user
features are disabled and the Bluetooth device
manual for more details on your Bluetooth-enabled device's
database is erased.
full capabilities.
This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth-
enabled device (accessory) via a wireless Bluetooth 6.3.24.1
connection. Your radio supports both Motorola Solutions
and Commercially available Off-The-Shelf (COTS) Turning Bluetooth On and Off
1
Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32 feet) Press to access the menu.
line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your
radio and your Bluetooth-enabled device. 2
It is not recommended that you leave your radio behind and Press or to Bluetooth and press to
expect your Bluetooth-enabled device to work with a high select.
degree of reliability when they are separated.
3
At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality
will start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this Press or to My Status and press to
problem, simply position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled select.
device closer to each other (within the 10-meter/32 feet The display shows On and Off. The current status is
defined range) to re-establish clear audio reception. Your indicated by a .
radio's Bluetooth function has a maximum power of 2.5 mW
(4 dBm) at the 10-meter/32 feet range.
269
English
4 Do one of the following: 2

On your radio, press to access the menu.
• Press or to On and press to select.
3
The display shows On and a appears left of the
selected status.
select.
• Press or to Off and press to select. 4

The display shows Off and a appears left of Press or to Devices and press to
the selected status. select.

6.3.24.2
• Press or to the required device and press
Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth
Device to select.
Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or press available devices. Press or to the
during the finding and connecting operation as this cancels
the operation. required device and press to select.
1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it 6

in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth- Press or to Connect and press to
enabled device user manual. select.
Display shows Connecting to <Device>. Your
Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional
270
English
steps to complete the pairing. Refer to respective 3

Bluetooth-enabled device user manual. Press or to Bluetooth and press to
select.
If successful, the radio display shows
<Device>Connected. A tone sounds and appears 4
besides the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected Press or to Find Me and press to
icon appears on the status bar. select.
If unsuccessful, the radio display shows Connecting Your radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-
Failed. enabled devices for a programmed duration. This is
called Discoverable Mode.
6.3.24.3
5 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair it
Finding and Connecting from a with your radio.
Bluetooth Device (Discoverable Mode) Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device user
Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during the manual.
finding and connecting operation as this may cancel the
operation. 6.3.24.4
1 Turn Bluetooth On.

Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device
See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 269. 1
On your radio, press to access the menu.
2
271
English
2 6.3.24.5
Press or to Bluetooth and press to Switching Audio Route between
select.
Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth
3 Device
Press or to Devices and press to
You can toggle audio routing between internal radio
select.
speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory.
4 Press or to the required device and press Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch
button.
to select.
• A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to
5 Radio.
Press or to Disconnect and press to
select. • A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to
Bluetooth.
Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>.
6.3.24.6
additional steps to disconnect. Refer to respective
Bluetooth-enabled device user manual. Viewing Device Details
The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. A 1

positive indicator tone sounds and disappears beside the Press to access the menu.
connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon
disappears on the status bar.
272
English
2 2
Press or to Bluetooth and press to Press or to Bluetooth and press to
select. select.
3 3
Press or to Devices and press to Press or to Devices and press to
select. select.
4 Press or to the required device and press 4 Press or to the required device and press
5 5
Press or to View Details and press Press or to Delete and press to select.
to select.
The display shows Device Deleted.
6.3.24.7
6.3.24.8
Deleting Device Name
Bluetooth Mic Gain
Bluetooth-enabled devices. Allows control of the connected Bluetooth-enabled device
microphone gain value.
1
273
English
2 Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable

select.
Mode
NOTICE:
3 The Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode can
Press or to BT Mic Gain and press to only be enabled by using the MOTOTRBO CPS. If
select. enabled, the Bluetooth item will not be displayed
in the Menu and you will not be able to use any
4 Press or to the BT Mic Gain type and the Bluetooth programmable button features.
current values. Other Bluetooth-enabled devices can locate your radio, but
the devices cannot connect to the radio. It enables
To edit values, press to select. dedicated devices to use your radio position in the process
of Bluetooth-based location.
5 Press or to increase or to decrease values Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair it with your
radio. Refer to the respective user manual of Bluetooth-
and press to select. enabled device.
6.3.24.9 6.3.25
Indoor Location
NOTICE:
the latest software and hardware. Check with your
dealer or system administrator for more information.
274
English
Indoor Location is use to keep track of the location of radio One of the following scenarios occurs.
users. When Indoor Location is activated, the radio is in a
limited discoverable mode. Dedicated beacons are used to
icon appears on the Home screen display.
locate the radio and determine its position.
tone.
Turning Indoor Location On or Off
one of the following actions. e. Press to turn off Indoor Location.
b. Press or to Bluetooth and press to
select. • If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning
Off Failed. You hear a negative indicator
c. Press or to Indoor Location and press tone.
to select. • Access this feature by using the programmed button.

d. Press to turn on Indoor Location. button to turn on Indoor Location.
The display shows Indoor Location On. You The display shows Indoor Location On. You
hear a positive indicator tone. hear a positive indicator tone.
275
English
One of the following scenarios occurs. Accessing Indoor Location Beacons

• If successful, the Indoor Location Available Information
icon appears on the Home screen display.
Follow the procedure to access Indoor Location beacons
information.
1
to turn off Indoor Location. 2
The display shows Indoor Location Off. You Press or to Bluetooth and press to
hear a positive indicator tone. select.
3 Press or to Indoor Location and press
to select.
Off Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a 4
negative indicator tone. Press or to Beacons and press to
select.
6.3.25.2 The display shows the beacons information.
276
English
6.3.26 2
Notification List Press or to Notification and press
to select.
Your radio has a Notification List that collects all your
"unread" events on the channel, such as unread text 3 Press or to the required event and press
messages, missed calls, and call alerts.
The Notification icon appears on the status bar when the to select.
Notification List has one or more events.
The list supports a maximum of 40 unread events. When it Long press to return to the Home Screen.
is full, the next event automatically replaces the oldest
event.
6.3.27
NOTICE:
After the events are read, they are removed from
Wi-Fi Operation
the Notification List. This feature allows you to set up and connect to a Wi-Fi
6.3.26.1 codeplug, and resources such as language packs and
voice announcement.
Accessing the Notification List
NOTICE:
Follow the procedure to access the notification list.
1 Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
Press to access the menu. Your radio supports WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal and WPA/
277
English
WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal Wi-Fi network Turning Wi-Fi On or Off

Uses pre-shared key (password) based authentication.
Pre-shared key can be entered by using the menu or 1 Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button.
CPS/RM. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or
WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network Turning Off Wi-Fi.
Uses certificate-based authentication.
2 Access this feature using the menu.
NOTICE: a Press to access the menu.
Check with your dealer or system administrator
network. b Press or to WiFi and press to
select.
The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned by
or system administrator to determine how your radio has c Press or to WiFi On and press to
been programmed. select.
Voice Announcements for the programmed Wi-Fi On or

Off button can be customized through CPS according to d Press to turn on/off Wi-Fi.
user requirements. Check with your dealer or system If Wi-Fi is on, the display shows beside
If Wi-Fi is off, the disappears from beside
6.3.27.1
Enabled.
278
English
6.3.27.2 3
to select.
(One to One). 5
Press to select.
NOTICE:

Proceed to step 3.
(One to Many).
NOTICE:
279
English

2
using the menu.
to select.
1
2
Press to select.
3
6.3.27.4
280
English
NOTICE:
6.3.27.5
select.
by using RM.
access point.

281
English

NOTICE: select.

6.3.27.7
Adding a Network
networks.
282
English


2
6.3.27.8
3 Points
4 1
select.
2
. 3
6 select.
press to select.
283
English
5 6.3.27.9
to select.
NOTICE:
WPA-Personal Wi-Fi
3
select.
284
English
6 Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button to toggle

Press or to Yes and press to select. all tones on or off, or follow the procedure described next to
access this feature via the radio menu.
The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate
that the selected network access point is 1
successfully removed. Press to access the menu.
6.4 2
Utilities select.
This chapter explains the operations of the utility functions 3 Press or to Radio Settings and press
to select.
6.4.1
Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On 4
Press or to Tones/Alerts and press
or Off to select.
You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts
(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) if needed. 5
Press or to All Tones and press to
select.
6
Press to enable/disable all tones and alerts.
The display shows beside Enabled.
285
English
The disappears from beside Enabled. 5

Press or to Vol. Offset and press to
select.
6.4.2
6 Press or to the required volume value.
Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset
The radio sounds a feedback tone with each
Level corresponding volume value.
You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level if
needed. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/alerts, 7 Do one of the following:
allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice volume.
• Press to keep the required displayed volume
1
value.
2 • Press to exit without changing the current

Press or to Utilities and press to volume offset settings.
select.
to select.
4
Press or to Tones/Alerts and press
to select.
286
English
6.4.3
You can also use or to change the selected
Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or option.
Off
6
You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone if Press to enable/disable the Talk Permit Tone.
needed.
1 The disappears from beside Enabled.
2
6.4.4
select. Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On
3 Press
or Off
or to Radio Settings and press
You can enable and disable the Power Up Alert Tone if
to select. needed.
4 1
Press or to Tones/Alerts and press Press to access the menu.
to select.
2
5 Press or to Utilities and press to
Press or to Talk Permit and press to select.
select.
287
English
3 Press or to Radio Settings and press Setting the Power Level

to select. You can customize your radio power setting to high or low
for each Connect Plus zone.
4 High enables communication with tower sites in Connect
Press or to Tones/Alerts and press Plus mode located at a considerable distance from you.
to select. Low enables communication with tower sites in Connect
Plus mode in closer proximity.
5
Press the programmed Power Level button to toggle
Press or to Power Up and press to
transmit power level between high and low.
select.
Follow the procedure described next to access this feature
You can also use or to change the selected via the radio menu.
option.
1
Press to enable/disable the Power Up Alert
Tone. 2
select.
The disappears from beside Enabled.
to select.
6.4.5
288
English
4 2
Press or to Power and press to select. Press or to Utilities and press to
select.
5 Press or to the required setting and press
to select.
to select.
appears beside selected setting. At any time, long
4
press to return to the Home screen.
Press or to Display and press to
Screen returns to the previous menu. select.
5
6.4.6 Press or to Brightness and press to
Adjusting the Display Brightness select.
The display shows a progress bar.
You can adjust the display brightness of the radio as
needed.
6
NOTICE: Decrease display brightness by pressing or
Display brightness cannot be adjusted when Auto
Brightness is enabled. increase the display brightness by pressing .
1 Select from setting of 1 to 8. Press to confirm

Press to access the menu. your entry.
289
English
6.4.7 4
Setting the Display Backlight Timer Press or to Display and press to
select.
You can set the the radio display backlight timer as
needed. The setting also affects the Menu Navigation 5 Press or to Backlight Timer and press
Buttons and keypad backlighting accordingly.
Press the programmed Backlight button to toggle the to select.
backlight settings, or follow the procedure described next to
access this feature via the radio menu. You can use or to change the selected option.
The display backlight and keypad backlighting are
automatically turned off if the LED indicator is disabled (see 6.4.8
Turning the LED Indicator On or Off on page 292).
Turning the Introduction Screen On
1 or Off
You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen if
needed.
2
select. 1
2
to select.
select.
290
English
3 Press or to Radio Settings and press Language

to select. You can set your radio display to be in your required
language.
4
Press or to Display and press to 1
5 2
Press or to Intro Screen and press Press or to Utilities and press to
to select. select.
You can also use or to change the selected 3 Press or to Radio Settings and press
option.
to select.
6
Press to enable/disable the Introduction 4
Screen. Press or to Languages and press to
select.
The disappears from beside Enabled. You can also use or to change selected option.
5 Press or to the required language and press

6.4.9
to enable. appears beside selected
language.
291
English
6.4.10 The disappears from beside Enabled.

Turning the LED Indicator On or Off
You can enable and disable the LED Indicator if needed.
6.4.11
1 Identifying Cable Type
You can select the type of cable your radio uses.
2
1
select.
2
select.
to select.
4
Press or to LED Indicator and press
to select.
to select.
4
Press or to Cable Type and press to
option.
select.
5
Press to enable/disable the LED Indicator.
option.
292
English
5 The current cable type is indicated by a . 4 Press or to Voice Announcement and press
to select.
6.4.12
Voice Announcement You can also use or to change the selected
option.
This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the
current Zone or Channel the user has just assigned, or 5 Do one of the following:
programmable button press. This audio indicator can be
customized per customer requirements. This is typically
useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the • Press to enable Voice Announcement. The
content shown on the display. display shows beside Enabled.
1 • Press to disable Voice Announcement. The

disappears from beside Enabled.
2
Press or to Utilities and press to 6.4.13
select. Setting the Text-to-Speech Feature
3 Press or to Radio Settings and press NOTICE:
The Text-to-Speech feature can only be enabled by
to select. using the MOTOTRBO CPS. If enabled, the Voice
Announcement feature is automatically disabled,
and vice versa. Check with your dealer or system
293
English
This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the d. Press or to Voice Announce and press
following features:
• Current Channel to select.
• Current Zone e. Press or to Messages or Program

• Programmed button feature on or off Button and press to select.
• Press the programmed Voice Announcement option.
button to toggle this feature on or off.
• This audio indicator can be customized per customer
requirements. This is typically useful when the user
is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on 6.4.14
the display. Menu Timer
Set the period of time your radio stays in the menu before it
automatically switches to the Home screen.
b. Press or to Utilities and press to 1

2
to select. Press or to Utilities and press to
select.
294
English
3 Press or to Radio Settings and press suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset
value in order to provide a consistent level of audio.
to select.
1
Press or to Display and press to
select. 2
5 select.
Press or to Menu Timer and press to
select. 3 Press or to Radio Settings and press
6 Press or to the required setting and press to select.
to select. You can also use or to change the selected

option.
6.4.15 4
Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D) Press or to Mic AGC-D and press to
select.
This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain
automatically while transmitting on a digital system. It 5 Do one of the following:
• Press to enable Mic AGC-D . The display

shows beside Enabled .
295
English
Radio Steps
• Press to disable Mic AGC-D . The Con-
disappears from beside Enabled . trol
b Press or to Radio Set‐

6.4.16
Intelligent Audio tings and press to select.
Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volume to c Press or to Radio Set‐
overcome background noise in the environment, inclusive
of all stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This tings and press to select.
feature is a Receive-only feature and does not affect
d Press or to Intelligent
Transmit audio.
NOTICE: Audio and press to select.
This feature is not applicable during a Bluetooth
NOTICE:
session.
You can also use or
1 to change the selected
Press to access the menu. option.
e Do one of the following:
Radio Steps
Con-
trol • Press to enable Intelligent
Audio. The display shows be-
Menu
side Enabled.
296
English
Radio Steps
Con- • Press to disable Intelligent Audio. The
trol disappears from beside Enabled.
• Press to disable Intelligent 6.4.17

Audio. The disappears from Turning the Acoustic Feedback
beside Enabled. Suppressor Feature On or Off
This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback in
2
received calls.
select.
1
2
to select.
select.
4 Press or to Intelligent Audio and press
to select.
to select.
4
• Press to enable Intelligent Audio. The Press or to AF Suppressor and press
display shows beside Enabled. to select.
297
English
You can also use or to change the selected 2

option. Press or to Utilities and press to
select.
• Press to enable Acoustic Feedback to select.

Suppressor. The display shows beside
Enabled. You can also use or to change the selected
option.
• Press to disable Acoustic Feedback
Suppressor. The disappears from beside 4 Press or to Mic Distortion and press
Enabled.
to select.
6.4.18 5 Do one of the following:

Turning the Microphone Dynamic
Distortion Control Feature On or Off • Press to enable Microphone Dynamic
Distortion Control. The display shows beside
This feature allows you to enable the radio to automatically Enabled.
monitor the microphone input and adjust the microphone
gain value to avoid audio clipping.
• Press to disable Microphone Dynamic
1 Distortion Control. The disappears from beside
Press to access the menu. Enabled.
298
English
6.4.19 3
Turning GNSS On or Off Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
select.
Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a satellite
navigation system that determines the radio precise 4
location. GNSS includes Global Positioning System (GPS), Press or to GNSS. Press to select.
Global Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS), and
BeiDou Navigation Satellite System (BDS). 5
NOTICE: Press to enable/disable GNSS.
Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS, If enabled, appears beside Enabled.
CPS. Check with your dealer or system If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
administrator to determine how your radio has been
programmed.
See Checking the GNSS Information on page 313 for
details on retrieving GNSS information.
• Press the programmed GNSS button to toggle 6.4.20
the feature on or off. Skip the following steps.
Accessing General Radio
• Press to access the menu. Information
Your radio contains information on the following:
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. • Battery
• Degree of Tilt (Accelerometer)
• Radio Model Number Index
299
English
• Option Board Over-the-Air (OTA) Codeplug CRC 3

• Site Number Press or to Radio Info and press to
select.
• Site Info
• Radio Alias and ID 4
• Firmware and Codeplug Versions Press or to Battery Info and press
to select.
• GNSS Information
Press at any time to return to the previous screen or For IMPRES batteries ONLY: The display reads
Recondition Battery if the battery requires
long press to return to the Home screen. The radio reconditioning in an IMPRES charger. After the
exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. reconditioning process, the display then shows the
battery information.
6.4.20.1
Accessing the Battery Information
Displays information on your radio battery.
1
2
select.
300
English
6.4.20.2 2
Checking the Degree of Tilt Press or to Utilities and press to
select.
(Accelerometer)
NOTICE: 3
The measurement on the display shows the degree Press or to Radio Info and press to
select.
of tilt at the moment you press to accept the
Accelerometer option. If you change the angle of 4 Tilt the radio at the angle that triggers the Tilt Alarm.
the radio after pressing , the radio does not 5

change the measurement shown on its display. It Press or to Accelerometer and press
continues to display the measurement taken when to select.
The display shows the radio's angle of tilt (deviation
was pressed. from perpendicular vertical position) in degrees
If the portable radio has been enabled for the Man Down (example: 62 Deg.) Based on this, use MOTOTRBO
Alarms, there is a menu option to check how the radio Connect Plus Option Board CPS to configure the
measures the degree of tilt. This is a helpful feature when Activation Angle for 60 degrees (which is the closest
the dealer or Radio System Administrator uses the programmable value). The Tilt Alarm timers are
MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS to configure triggered when the Activation Angle is 60 degrees, or
the activation angle that will trigger the tilt alarm. greater.
1
301
English
6.4.20.3 6.4.20.4
Checking the Radio Model Number Checking the CRC of the Option Board
Index OTA Codeplug File
This index number identifies your radio model-specific Follow the instructions below if your radio system
hardware. Your radio system administrator may ask for this administrator asks you to view the Option Board OTA
number when preparing a new Option Board codeplug for Codeplug File CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check). This
your radio. menu option only appears if the Option Board received its
last codeplug update OTA.
1
2
Press or to Utilities and press to 2
select. Press or to Utilities and press to
select.
3
Press or to Radio Info and press to 3
select. Press or to Radio Info and press to
select.
4
Press or to Model Index and press to
select.
The display shows the Model Number Index.
302
English
4 3
Press or to OB OTA CPcrc and press Press or to Radio Info and press to
to select. select.
The display shows some letters and numbers.
4
Communicate this information to your radio system
administrator exactly as shown. Press or to Site Number and press to
select.
The display shows the Network ID and the Site
6.4.20.5 Number.
Displaying the Site ID (Site Number)
NOTICE: 6.4.20.6
If you are not currently registered at a site, the Checking the Site Info
display shows Not Registered.
NOTICE:
The radio briefly shows the Site ID as it registers with a
If you are not currently registered at a site, the
Connect Plus site. Following registration, the radio does not
display shows Not Registered.
generally indicate the Site number. To display the
registered Site number, do the following: The Site Info feature provides information that can be
useful to a service technician. It consists of the following
1 information:
Press to access the menu. • Repeater number of current Control Channel repeater.
2 • RSSI: Last signal strength value measured from Control
Press or to Utilities and press to Channel repeater.
select.
303
English
• Neighbor List sent by Control Channel repeater (five Follow the procedure described next to access this feature
numbers separated by commas). via the radio screen.
If you are requested to use this feature, please report the
displayed information exactly as it appears on the screen. 1
1
2
2 select.
3
select.
Press or to Radio Info and press to
3 select.
4
select.
Press or to My ID and press to select.
4 The display shows the radio ID.
Press or to Site Info and press to
select.
The display shows the Site Info.
6.4.20.7
Checking the Radio ID
This feature displays the ID of your radio.
304
English
6.4.20.8 • Option Board Frequency Version

Checking the Firmware Version and • Option Board Hardware Version
Codeplug Version • Option Board Codeplug Version
Displays the firmware version on your radio.
1 6.4.20.9
Press to access the menu. Checking for Updates
2 Connect Plus provides the ability to update certain files
Press or to Utilities and press to (Option Board Codeplug, Network Frequency File, and
select. Option Board Firmware File) Over-The-Air (OTA).
NOTICE:
3 Check with the dealer or network administrator to
Press or to Radio Info and press to determine whether this feature has been enabled for
select. your radio.
Any display Connect Plus radio has the ability to show its
4
current Option Board OTA Codeplug CRC, Frequency File
Press or to Versions and press to
version or Option Board firmware file version by using a
select.
menu option. In addition, display radios that have been
The display a list with the following information: enabled for over-the-air file transfer can display the version
• (Radio) Firmware Version of a "pending file". A "pending file" is a Frequency File or
Option Board firmware file that the Connect Plus radio
• (Radio) Codeplug Version knows about through system messaging, but the radio has
• Option Board Firmware Version not yet collected all of the file packets. If a display Connect
Plus radio has a pending file, the menu provides options to:
305
English
• See the version number of the pending file. • The radio system administrator re-initiates the OTA file
transfer.
• See what percentage of packets has been collected so
far. • The Option Board pre-defined timer expires, which
causes the Option Board to automatically resume the
• Request the Connect Plus radio to resume collecting file
process of collecting packets.
packets.
• The timer has not yet expired, but the radio user
If the radio is enabled for Connect Plus OTA file transfer,
there may be times when the radio automatically joins a file requests the file transfer to resume through the menu
option.
transfer without first notifying the radio user. While the radio
is collecting file packets, the LED rapidly blinks red and the After the Connect Plus radio finishes downloading all file
radio displays the High Volume Data icon on the Home packets, it must upgrade to the newly acquired file. For the
Screen status bar. Network Frequency File, this is an automatic process and
does not require a radio reset. For the Option Board
NOTICE:
The Connect Plus radio cannot collect file packets Codeplug File, this is an automatic process that will cause
and receive calls at the same time. If you wish to a brief interruption to service as the Option Board loads the
cancel the file transfer, press and release the PTT new codeplug information and re-acquires a network site.
button. This causes the radio to request a call on How quickly the radio upgrades to a new Option Board
the selected Contact Name, and it will also cancel firmware file depend on how the radio has been configured
by the dealer or system administrator. The radio will either
the file transfer for that radio until the process
upgrade immediately after collecting all file packets, or it
resumes at a later time.
will wait until the next time that the user turns the radio on.
There are several things that can make the file transfer
NOTICE:
process start again. The first example applies to all OTA
file types. The other examples apply only to the Network
Frequency File and Option Board Firmware File:
306
English
The process of upgrading to a new Option Board firmware 2

file takes several seconds, and it requires the Connect Plus Press or to Utilities and press to
Option Board to reset the radio. Once the upgrade starts, select.
the radio user will not be able to make or receive calls until
the process is completed. During the process, radio display 3
prompts user to not turn off the radio. Press or to Radio Info and press to
select.
6.4.20.9.1
Firmware File 4
Press or to Updates and press to
The following section provides information on the radio select.
firmware.
5
6.4.20.9.1.1 Press or to Firmware and press to
Firmware Up to Date select.
NOTICE: The display shows Firmware is Up to Date.
If the Option Board firmware file is not Up to Date
(and if the radio has partially collected a more
recent Option Board firmware file version) the radio 6.4.20.9.2
displays a list with additional options; Version, Pending Firmware – Version
%Received, and Download.
1
307
English
2 6.4.20.9.3
Press or to Utilities and press to Pending Firmware – % Received
select.
1
select. 2
4 select.
select. 3
5 select.
Press or to Firmware and press to
select. 4
6 select.
Press or to Version and press to
select. 5
If there is a pending Option Board firmware file, the Press or to Firmware and press to
display shows the pending firmware version number. select.
If there is a pending Option Board firmware file, the

display shows Firmware is Up to Date.
308
English
6 2
Press or to %Received and press to Press or to Utilities and press to
select. select.
The screen displays the percentage of firmware file
3
packets collected so far.
NOTICE: select.
When at 100%, the radio needs to be power
cycled Off and then On to initiate the 4
firmware upgrade. Press or to Updates and press to
select.
6.4.20.9.4 5
Press or to Firmware and press to
Pending Firmware – Download
select.
If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTA Option
Board Firmware File Transfer with a partial file, the unit 6
automatically rejoins the file transfer (if still ongoing) when Press or to Download and press to
an internal timer expires. If you want the unit to rejoin an select.
ongoing Option Board Firmware File transfer prior to The display shows the following:
expiration of this internal timer, use the Download option as
described below.
Download Available Start Download
1
309
English
No Download Availa- Download not avail‐ 1

ble able Press to access the menu.
2
select.
• Select Yes and press to start the download. 3

• Select No and press to return to the previous select.
menu.
4
Press or to Frequency and press to
6.4.20.9.5 select.
Frequency File The display shows Freq. File is Up to Date.
The following section provides information on the frequency
file of the radio.
6.4.20.9.5.2
6.4.20.9.5.1 Frequency File Pending – Version
Frequency File Up to Date
1
NOTICE: Press to access the menu.
If the Frequency File is not Up to Date (and if the
radio has partially collected a more recent frequency
file version) the radio displays a list with additional
options; Version, %Received, and Download.
310
English
2 Frequency File Pending – % Received

select. 1
3
Press or to Radio Info and press to 2
select. Press or to Utilities and press to
select.
4
Press or to Updates and press to 3
select. Press or to Radio Info and press to
select.
5
Press or to Frequency and press to 4
select. Press or to Updates and press to
select.
6
Press or to Version and press to 5
select. Press or to %Received and press to
If there is a pending Frequency File, the display select.
shows the pending Frequency File version number. The screen displays the percentage of frequency file
packets collected so far.
6.4.20.9.5.3
311
English
6.4.20.9.5.4 5
Frequency File Pending – Download Press or to Frequency and press to
select.
If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTA
Network Frequency File Transfer with a partial file, the unit
6
automatically rejoins the file transfer (if still ongoing) when
Press or to Download and press to
an internal timer expires. If you want the unit to rejoin an
select.
ongoing Network Frequency File transfer prior to expiration
of this internal timer, use the Download option as described
below. Download Currently Download not
Unavailable available
1
Download Currently Start Download
Available
2
select. 7 Do one of the following:
• Select Yes and press to start the download.
3
Press or to Radio Info and press to • Select No and press to return to the previous
select. menu.
4
select.
312
English
6.4.20.9.6 3
Checking the GNSS Information Press or to Radio Info and press to
select.
values of:
4
• Latitude Press or to GNSS Info and press to
• Longitude select.
• Altitude 5
• Direction Press or to the required item and press
to select.
• Velocity
The display shows the requested GNSS information.
• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)
• Satellites See Turning GNSS On or Off on page 299 for details on
• Version GNSS.
1 6.4.21
Press to access the menu. Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate
2 Details
Press or to Utilities and press to You can view the details of the selected Enterprise Wi-Fi
select. Certificate.
313
English
1
2
3
Press or to Certificate Menu. Press
to select.
appears beside ready certificates.
to select.

NOTICE:
Status.
314
English
Other Systems Programmable Buttons

Features that are available to the radio users under this Depending on the duration of a button press, your dealer
system are available in this chapter. can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to
radio functions.
7.1 Short press
Push-To-Talk Button Pressing and releasing rapidly.
Long press
The Push-to-Talk (PTT) button serves two basic purposes: Pressing and holding for the programmed duration.
• While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the NOTICE:
radio to transmit to other radios in the call. The See Emergency Operation on page 390 for more
microphone is activated when the PTT button is information on the programmed duration of the
pressed. Emergency button.
• While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to
make a new call. 7.2.1
Long press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button Assignable Radio Functions
to listen. The following radio functions can be assigned to the
If the Talk Permit Tone is enabled, wait until the short alert programmable buttons.
tone ends before talking.
Audio Profiles
7.2 Allows the user to select the preferred audio profile.
Audio Toggle
Toggles audio routing between the internal radio
speaker and the speaker of a wired accessory.
315
English
Bluetooth® Audio Switch Contacts

Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker Provides direct access to the Contacts list.
and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Emergency
Bluetooth Connect Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an
Initiates a Bluetooth find-and-connect operation. emergency.
Bluetooth Disconnect Indoor Location
Terminates all existing Bluetooth connections between Toggles Indoor Location on or off.
your radio and any Bluetooth-enabled devices. Intelligent Audio
Bluetooth Discoverable Toggles intelligent audio on or off.
Enables your radio to enter Bluetooth Discoverable
Manual Site Roam 6
Mode.
Starts the manual site search.
Call Alert
Mic AGC
Provides direct access to the contacts list for you to
Toggles the internal microphone automatic gain control
select a contact to whom a Call Alert can be sent.
(AGC) on or off.
Call Forwarding Monitor
Toggles Call Forwarding on or off. Monitors a selected channel for activity.
Call Log Notifications
Selects the call log list. Provides direct access to the Notifications list.
Channel Announcement Nuisance Channel Delete6
Plays zone and channel announcement voice Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for
messages for the current channel. the Selected Channel, from the scan list. The Selected
6 Not applicable in Capacity Plus.

316
English
Channel refers to the selected zone or channel Radio Enable

combination of the user from which scan is initiated. Allows a target radio to be remotely enabled.
One Touch Access Radio Disable
Directly initiates a predefined Private, Phone or Group Allows a target radio to be remotely disabled.
Call, a Call Alert, a Quick Text message, or Home
Remote Monitor
Revert.
Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it
Option Board Feature giving any indicators.
Toggles option board feature(s) on or off for option
Repeater/Talkaround6
board-enabled channels.
Toggles between using a repeater and communicating
Permanent Monitor6 directly with another radio.
Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until
Silence Home Channel Reminder
function is disabled.
Mutes the Home Channel Reminder.
Phone
Scan 7
Provides direct access to the Phone Contacts list.
Toggles scan on or off.
Privacy Site Info
Toggles privacy on or off. Displays the current site name and ID of Capacity Plus-
Radio Alias and ID Multi-Site.
Provides radio alias and ID. Plays site announcement voice messages for the
Radio Check current site when Voice Announcement is enabled.
Determines if a radio is active in a system.
7 Not applicable in Capacity Plus–Single-Site.

317
English
Site Lock6 7.2.2

When toggled on, the radio searches the current site Assignable Settings or Utility
only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in
addition to the current site. Functions
Status The following radio settings or utility functions can be
Selects the status list menu. assigned to the programmable buttons.
Telemetry Control Tones/Alerts
Controls the Output Pin on a local or remote radio. Toggles all tones and alerts on or off.
Text Message Backlight
Selects the text message menu. Toggles display backlight on or off.
Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey Backlight Brightness
Stops an ongoing interruptible call to free the channel. Adjusts the brightness level.
Trill Enhancement Power Level
Toggles trill enhancement on or off. Toggles transmit power level between high and low.
Voice Announcement On/Off
Toggles voice announcement on or off. 7.2.3
Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) Accessing Programmed Functions

Toggles VOX on or off. Follow the procedure to access programmed functions in
Wi-Fi your radio.
Toggles Wi-Fi on or off.
Zone Selection
Allows selection from a list of zones. • Press the programmed button. Proceed to step 3.
318
English
Icons
The radio display shows radio status, text entries, and
2 Press or to the menu function, and press menu entries. The following are the icons that appear on
the radio display.
to select a function or enter a sub-menu.
Table 9: Display Icons
The following icons appear on the status bar at the top of
the radio display. The icons are arranged left most in order
• Press to return to the previous screen. of appearance or usage, and are channel-specific.
Battery
• Long press to return to the Home screen. The number of bars (0–4) shown indi-
Your radio automatically exits the menu after a cates the charge remaining in the bat-
period of inactivity and returns to the Home screen. tery. The icon blinks when the battery
is low.
7.3
Bluetooth Connected
Status Indicators The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The
icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth
This chapter explains the status indicators and audio tones device is connected.
used in the radio.
Bluetooth Not Connected
The Bluetooth feature is enabled but
7.3.1 there is no remote Bluetooth device
connected.
319
English
Call Log Indoor Location Available 8

Radio call log. Indoor location status is on and availa-
ble.
Contact
Radio contact is available. Indoor Location Unavailable8
Indoor location status is on but un-
Emergency available due to Bluetooth disabled or
Radio is in Emergency mode. Beacons Scan suspended by Blue-
tooth.
Flexible Receive List
Flexible receive list is enabled. Message
Incoming message.
GNSS Available
GNSS feature is enabled. The icon Monitor
stays lit when a position fix is availa- Selected channel is being monitored.
ble.
Mute Mode
GNSS Not Available Mute Mode is enabled and speaker is
GNSS feature is enabled but is not re- muted.
ceiving data from the satellite.
Notification
High Volume Data Notification List has one or more
Radio is receiving high volume data missed events.
and channel is busy.
8 Only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware.
320
English
Option Board Response Inhibit

The Option Board is enabled. (Option Response Inhibit is enabled.
board enabled models only)
Ring Only
Option Board Non-Function Ringing mode is enabled.
The Option Board is disabled.
Scan 9
Over-the-Air Programming Delay Tim- Scan feature is enabled.
er
Indicates time left before automatic re- Scan- Priority 19
start of radio. Radio detects activity on channel/
group designated as Priority 1.
Power Level
or Radio is set at Low power or Radio is Scan- Priority 29
set at High power. Radio detects activity on channel/
group designated as Priority 2.
Received Signal Strength Indicator
(RSSI) Secure
The number of bars displayed repre- The Privacy feature is enabled.
sents the radio signal strength. Four Silent Ring
bars indicate the strongest signal. This Silent ring mode is enabled.
icon is only displayed while receiving.
9 Not applicable in Capacity Plus.

321
English
Site Roaming 10 Wi-Fi Excellent 11

The site roaming feature is enabled. Wi-Fi signal is excellent.
Talkaround9 Wi-Fi Good11

In the absence of a repeater, radio is Wi-Fi signal is good.
currently configured for direct radio to
radio communication.
Wi-Fi Average11
Tones Disable Wi-Fi signal is average
Wi-Fi Poor11
Unsecure Wi-Fi signal is poor.
The Privacy feature is disabled.
Vibrate
Vibrate mode is enabled.
Vibrate and Ring

Vibrate and Ring mode is enabled.
Vote Scan
Vote scan feature is enabled.
10 Not applicable in Capacity Plus–Single-Site

322
English
Wi-Fi Unavailable11 Bluetooth Audio Device

Wi-Fi signal is unavailable. Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such
as a headset.
Bluetooth Data Device

Table 10: Advance Menu Icons
Bluetooth-enabled data device, such
The following icons appear beside menu items that offer a as a scanner.
a sub-menu offering two options. Bluetooth PTT Device
Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such
Checkbox (Checked) as a PTT-Only Device (POD).
Indicates that the option is selected.
Bluetooth Sensor Device11
Checkbox (Empty) Bluetooth-enabled sensor device,
Indicates that the option is not selec- such as gas sensor.
ted.
Solid Black Box Table 12: Call Icons

Indicates that the option selected for
The following icons appear on the display during a call.
the menu item with a sub-menu.
These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate
alias or ID type.
Table 11: Bluetooth Device Icons Bluetooth PC Call
The following icons appear next to items in the list of Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call in pro-
Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device gress.
type.
323
English
In the Contacts list, it indicates a Blue- In the Contacts list, it indicates a

tooth PC Call alias (name) or ID (num- group alias (name) or ID (number).
ber).
Option Board Individual Call
Dispatch Call Indicates an Option Board individual
The Dispatch Call contact type is used call in progress.
to send a text message to a dispatch- In the Contacts list, it indicates a sub-
er PC through a third-party Text Mes- scriber alias (name) or ID (number).
sage Server.
Option Board Group Call
Group Call/All Call Indicates an Option Board group call
Indicates a Group Call or All Call in in progress.
progress.
In the Contacts list, it indicates a
In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number).
group alias (name) or ID (number).
Phone Call as Group/All Call
Non-IP Peripheral Individual call Indicates a Phone Call as Group Call
Indicates a Non-IP Peripheral individu- or All Call in progress. In the Contacts
al call in progress. list, it indicates a group alias (name)
In the Contacts list, it indicates a sub- or ID (number).
scriber alias (name) or ID (number).
Phone Call as Private Call
Non-IP Peripheral Group call Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call
Indicates a Non-IP Peripheral group in progress. In the Contacts list, it indi-
call in progress. cates a phone alias (name) or ID
(number).
324
English
Private Call In Progress

Indicates a Private Call in progress. In The text message to a subscriber
or
the Contacts list, it indicates a sub- alias or ID is pending transmission,
scriber alias (name) or ID (number). followed by waiting for acknowledge-
ment. The text message to a group
alias or ID is pending transmission.
Table 13: Mini Notice Icons
Individual or Group Message Read
The following icons appear momentarily on the display after
The text message has been read.
an action to perform a task is taken. or
Failed Transmission (Negative)
Failed action taken.
Individual or Group Message Unread
Successful Transmission (Positive)
or The text message has not been read.
Successful action taken.
Transmission in Progress (Transi-

tional) Send Failed
Transmitting. This is seen before indi- The text message cannot be sent.
cation for Successful Transmission or or
Failed Transmission.
Table 14: Sent Items Icons

The following icons appear at the top right corner of the
display in the Sent Items folder.
325
English
Sent Successfully Radio is sending a Call Alert or an emergency

The text message has been success- transmission.
or
fully sent. Blinking Green
Radio is receiving a call or data.
Radio is retrieving Over-the-Air Programming
transmissions.
7.3.2
Radio is detecting activity over the air.
LED Indicators
NOTICE:
LED indicators show the operational status of your radio. This activity may or may not affect the
Blinking Red programmed channel of the radio due to the
Radio is indicating a battery mismatch. nature of the digital protocol.
Radio has failed the self-test upon powering up. There is no LED indication when the radio is
detecting activity over the air in Capacity Plus.
Radio is receiving an emergency transmission.
Double Blinking Green
Radio is transmitting in low battery state. Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call or data.
Radio has moved out of range if Auto-Range Solid Yellow
Transponder System is configured. Radio is monitoring a conventional channel.
Mute Mode is enabled. Blinking Yellow
Solid Green Radio is scanning for activity.
Radio is powering up. Radio has yet to respond to a Call Alert.
Radio is transmitting. All Capacity Plus–Multi-Site channels are busy.
326
English
Double Blinking Yellow Indicator Tones

Radio has Auto Roaming enabled.
Indicator tones provide you with audible indications of the
Radio is actively searching for a new site. status after an action to perform a task is taken.
Radio has yet to respond to a Group Call Alert.
Radio is locked. Positive Indicator Tone
Radio is not connected to the repeater while in Capacity
Plus.
Negative Indicator Tone
All Capacity Plus channels are busy.
7.3.3.2
7.3.3
Audio Tones
Tones Audio tones provide you with audible indications of the
The following are the tones that sound through on the radio status, or response to data received on the radio.
speaker.
Continuous Tone
High Pitched Tone A monotone sound. Sounds continuously until
termination.
Low Pitched Tone
Periodic Tone
7.3.3.1 Sounds periodically depending on the duration set by
the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself.
327
English

Repetitive Tone • Press the programmed Zone Selection button.
A single tone that repeats itself until it is terminated by Proceed to step 3.
the user.

Momentary Tone
Sounds once for a short duration set by the radio. 2
Press or to Zone. Press to select.
7.4
The display shows and the current zone.
Zone and Channel
Selections 3
Press or to the required zone. Press to
This chapter explains the operations to select a zone or select.
channel on your radio. A zone is a group of channels.
Your radio supports up to 1000 channels and 250 zones, and returns to the selected zone screen.
with a maximum of 160 channels per zone.
Each channel can be programmed with different features
and/or support different groups of users. 7.4.2
Selecting Channels
7.4.1 Follow the procedure to select the required channel on your
Selecting Zones radio.
Follow the procedure to select the required zone on your
radio.
328
English
Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select the NOTICE:

channel, subscriber ID, or group ID. You can only have one alias or ID assigned to a
number key, but you can have more than one
number key associated to an alias or ID. All the
7.5 number keys on a keypad microphone can be
Calls assigned. See Assigning Entries to
Programmable Number Keys on page 373 for
more information.
This chapter explains the operations to receive, respond to,
make, and stop calls. Programmed One Touch Access Button
This method is used for Group, Private, and Phone
You can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID
Calls only.
after you have selected a channel by using one of these
features: You can only have one ID assigned to a One Touch
Alias Search Access button with a short or long programmable
This method is used for Group, Private, and All Calls button press. Your radio can have multiple One Touch
only with a keypad microphone. Access buttons programmed.
Contacts List Programmable Button
This method provides direct access to the Contacts list. This method is used for Phone Calls only.
Manual Dial (by using Contacts)
This method is used for Private and Phone Calls only 7.5.1
with a keypad microphone. Group Calls
Programmed Number Keys Your radio must be configured as part of a group to receive
This method is used for Group, Private, and All Calls a call from or make a call to the group of users.
only with a keypad microphone.
329
English
7.5.1.1 the group alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias
Making Group Calls or ID.
Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio.

1 Do one of the following: you hear a short alert tone the moment the
• Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT
• Press the programmed One Touch Access button to respond to the call.
button. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a
predetermined period. The radio returns to the
2 Press the PTT button to make the call. screen you were on prior to initiating the call.
Group Call icon and the group call alias. 7.5.1.2
Making Group Calls by Using the
Contacts List
clearly into the microphone if enabled. Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio by
using the Contacts list.
clearly into the microphone if enabled. 1
The green LED lights up when the target radio 2
responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, Press or to Contacts. Press to select.
330
English
3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press The call ends when there is no voice activity for a
to select.
7.5.1.3
Responding to Group Calls
To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be
configured as part of that group. Follow the procedure to
5 Do one of the following: respond to Group Calls on your radio.
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak When you receive a Group Call:
• The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right
corner.
6 Release the PTT button to listen. • The first text line shows the caller alias.
The green LED lights up when the target radio • The second text line displays the group call alias.
responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, • Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds
and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. through the speaker.
7 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, 1 Do one of the following:

• If the Channel Free Indication feature is
enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment
the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
331
English
indicating the channel is free for you to respond.

Press the PTT button to respond to the call. Long press to return to the Home screen to view the
caller alias before replying.
• If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press
the PTT button to interrupt the audio from the
transmitting radio and free the channel for you to 7.5.2
respond. Private Calls
The green LED lights up. A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another
individual radio.
2 Do one of the following: There are two ways to set up a Private Call. The first type
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak sets up the call after performing a radio presence check,
clearly into the microphone if enabled. while the second type sets up the call immediately. Only
one of these types can be programmed to your radio by
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak your dealer.
If your radio is programmed to perform a radio presence
3 Release the PTT button to listen. check prior to setting up the Private Call and the target
radio is not available:
predetermined period. • A tone sounds.
If the radio receives a Group Call while not on the Home
screen, it remains on its current screen prior to answering • The radio returns to the menu prior to initiating the radio
the call. presence check.
See Privacy on page 413 for more information.
332
English
7.5.2.1 4 Release the PTT button to listen.

Making Private Calls The green LED blinks when the target radio
Your radio must be programmed to initiate a Private Call. If responds.
this feature is not enabled, a negative indicator tone
sounds when you initiate the call. Follow the procedure to 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,
make Private Calls on your radio. you hear a short alert tone the moment the
1 Do one of the following: the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT
• Select a channel with the active subscriber alias
or ID. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a
predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display
• Press the programmed One Touch Access shows Call Ended.
button.
2 Press the PTT button to make the call. 7.5.2.2

Making Private Calls by Using the
Private Call icon, the subscriber alias, and call Contacts List
status.
1
3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak Press to access the menu.
2
333
English
3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press The call ends when there is no voice activity for a
predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display
to select. shows Call Ended.
4 Press the PTT button to make the call. 7.5.2.3

If you release the PTT button while the radio is Responding to Private Calls
setting up the call, it exits without any indication and
returns to the previous screen. Follow the procedure to respond to Private Calls on your
radio.
destination alias. When you receive a Private Call:
5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak • The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner.
6 Release the PTT button to listen. • Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds
The green LED blinks when the target radio
responds. The display shows the transmitting user
alias or ID. 1 Do one of the following:
• If the Channel Free Indication feature is
7 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment
you hear a short alert tone the moment the the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
334
English
• If the Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey feature Making All Calls

is enabled, press the PTT button to stop an
ongoing interruptible call and free the channel for Your radio must be programmed for you to make an All
you to respond. Call. Follow the procedure to make All Calls on your radio.
The green LED lights up. 1 Select a channel with the active All Call group alias
or ID.
clearly into the microphone if enabled. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call.
3 Release the PTT button to listen. Group Call icon and All Call.
predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display 3 Do one of the following:
shows Call Ended.
7.5.3
All Calls clearly into the microphone if enabled.
An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call.
on the channel. An All Call is used to make important
announcements, requiring full attention from the user. The
users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call. 7.5.3.2
Receiving All Calls
7.5.3.1 When you receive an All Call:
• A tone sounds.
335
English
• The green LED blinks. 7.5.4

• The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right Selective Calls
corner.
A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio to another
• The first text line shows the caller alias ID. individual radio. It is a Private Call on an analog system.
• The second text line displays All Call.
7.5.4.1
through the speaker. Making Selective Calls
The radio returns to the screen before receiving the All Call Your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a
when the call ends. Selective Call. Follow the procedure to make Selective
Calls on your radio.
An All Call does not wait for a predetermined period before
ending.
1 Select a channel with the active subscriber alias or
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you ID.
hear a short alert tone when the transmitting radio releases
the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to 2 Press the PTT button to make the call.
use.
You cannot respond to an All Call. Private Call icon, the subscriber alias, and call
NOTICE: status.
The radio stops receiving the All Call if you switch to
a different channel while receiving the call. You are 3 Do one of the following:
not able to continue with any menu navigation or
editing until the end of an All Call.
336
English
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak • The first text line shows the Private Call icon and the
clearly into the microphone if enabled. caller alias or Selective Call or Alert with Call.
4 Release the PTT button to listen. through the speaker.
responds. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
you hear a short alert tone the moment the 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating clearly into the microphone if enabled.
button to respond to the call. 3 Release the PTT button to listen.
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a The call ends when there is no voice activity for a
predetermined period. predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display
shows Call Ended.
6 The display shows Call Ended.
7.5.5
7.5.4.2
Phone Calls
Responding to Selective Calls
A Phone Call is a call from an individual radio to a
Follow the procedure to respond to Selective Calls on your telephone.
radio.
If Phone Call capability is not enabled in your radio:
When you receive a Selective Call:
• The display shows Unavailable.
337
English
• Your radio mutes the call.

• Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call 7.5.5.2
ends. Making Phone Calls with the
During the Phone Call, your radio attempts to end the call Programmable Phone Button
when:
Follow the procedure to make a phone call with the
• You press the One Touch Access button with the programmable phone button.
deaccess code preconfigured.
• You enter the deaccess code as the input for extra 1 Press the programmed Phone button to enter into
digits. the Phone Entry list.
During channel access, access or deaccess code, or extra
digits transmission, your radio responds to the On/Off ,
Volume Control, and Channel Selector buttons or knobs
to select.
only. A tone sounds for every invalid input.
• The green LED lights up. The Phone Call icon
During channel access, press to dismiss the call
shows the subscriber alias. The second text line
attempt. A tone sounds.
displays the call status.
NOTICE:
• If the call-setup is successful, the Dual Tone Multi
Check with your dealer or system administrator for
Frequency (DTMF) tone sounds. You hear the
more information.
dialing tone of the telephone user. The first text
line shows the subscriber alias. The Phone Call
7.5.5.1 icon remains in the top right corner. The second
Making Phone Calls text line displays the call status.
Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio.
338
English
• If call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone sounds and • When the telephone user ends the call, a tone
the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your sounds and the display shows Phone Call
radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If Ended.
the access code was preconfigured in the
NOTICE:
Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you
were on prior to initiating the call.
During channel access, press to dismiss
the call attempt and a tone sounds.
3 Press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT During the call, when you press One Touch
button to listen. Access button with the deaccess code
preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as
4 the input for extra digits, your radio attempts
Press to end the call. to end the call.
• The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) tone
sounds and the display shows Ending Phone
Call. 7.5.5.3
• If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds Dual Tone Multi Frequency
and the display shows Call Ended . The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) feature allows your
• If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio radio to operate in a radio system with an interface to the
returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 3 telephone systems.
and step 4 or wait for the telephone user to end Disabling all radio tones and alert will automatically turn off
the call. the DTMF tone.
• When you press PTT button while in the Phone
Contacts screen, a tone sounds and the display
shows Press OK to Place Phone Call.
339
English
7.5.5.3.1 If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the

Initiating DTMF Tone first line of the display shows Unavailable and your radio
mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen
Follow the procedure to initiate a DTMF tone on your radio. when the call ends.
1 Press and hold the PTT button. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. Release
the PTT button to listen.
• Enter the desired number to initiate a DTMF tone. 2
• Press to initiate a DTMF tone. The display shows Ending Phone Call.
• Press to initiate a DTMF tone.
• A tone sounds.
7.5.5.4 • The display shows Call Ended.

Responding to Phone Calls as Private If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone
Call screen. Repeat this step or wait for the
Calls telephone user to end the call.
Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Private
Calls on your radio.
When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call:
corner.
• The display shows the caller alias or Phone Call.
340
English
7.5.5.5 If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone
Responding to Phone Calls as Group Call screen. Repeat this step or wait for the
telephone user to end the call.
Calls
Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Group
Calls on your radio. 7.5.5.6
When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call: Responding to Phone Calls as All Calls
corner.
When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, you can
• The display shows the group alias and Phone Call. respond to or end the call, only if an All Call type is
If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the assigned to the channel. Follow the procedure to respond
first line of the display shows Unavailable and your radio to Phone Calls as All Calls on your radio.
mutes the call. When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call:
1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. Release
corner.
the PTT button to listen.
• The display shows All Call and Phone Call.
2 If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the
Press to end the call. first line of the display shows Unavailable and your radio
The display shows Ending Phone Call. mutes the call.
• A tone sounds.
• The display shows Call Ended.
341
English
Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call • Press the Voice PTT button.
ends. • Press the Emergency button.
1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. • Perform data transmission.
• Press the programmed TX Interrupt Remote
2 Release the PTT button to listen. Dekey button.
3 The recipient radio displays Call Interrupted.

The display shows Ending Phone Call. 7.5.7
If the call ends successfully: Broadcast Voice Calls
• A tone sounds. A Broadcast Voice Call is a one-way voice call from any
• The display shows All Call and Call Ended. user to an entire talkgroup.
If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone The Broadcast Voice Call feature allows only the call
Call screen. Repeat step 3 or wait for the telephone initiating user to transmit to the talkgroup, while the
user to end the call. recipients of the call cannot respond (no Call Hang Time).
Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this
feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for
7.5.6 more information.
Initiating Transmit Interrupt
7.5.7.1
An ongoing call is interrupted, when you perform the Making Broadcast Voice Calls
following actions: Program your radio to make Broadcast Voice Calls.
342
English
1 Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. 7.5.7.2

Making Broadcast Voice Calls by Using
the Programmable Number Key
Follow the procedure to make Broadcast Voice Call on your
• Press the programmed One Touch Access radio by using the programmable number key.
button.
1 On the Home screen, long press the programmed
3 Press the PTT button to make the call. number key assigned to the predefined alias or ID.
The green LED lights up. The display shows If the number key is assigned to an entry in a
Broadcast Call, the Group Call icon and alias.The particular mode, this feature is not supported when
display shows the Group Call icon and alias. you long press the number key in another mode.
If the number key is not associated to an entry, a
4 Do one of the following: negative indicator tone sounds
clearly into the microphone if enabled. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak The green LED lights up. The first text line shows the
clearly into the microphone if enabled. subscriber alias. The second text line shows the call
status.
NOTICE:
Users on the channel cannot respond to
Broadcast Voice Calls. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
The radio returns to the previous menu after the call ends.
Users on the channel cannot respond to a Broadcast
Voice Call.
343
English
The radio returns to the previous menu after the call • Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds
ends. through the speaker.
See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on When the call ends, the radio returns to the previous
page 373 for more information. screen.
A Broadcast Voice Call does not wait for a predetermined
7.5.7.3 period before ending.
Making Broadcast Voice Calls by Using You cannot respond to a Broadcast Voice Call.
the Alias Search NOTICE:
The radio stops receiving the Broadcast Voice Call if
you switch to a different channel while receiving the
call. You cannot continue with any menu navigation
7.5.7.4 or editing until the end of the Broadcast Voice Call.
Receiving Broadcast Voice Calls
7.5.8
When you receive a Broadcast Voice Call:
Unaddressed Calls
• A tone sounds.
An Unaddressed Call is a group call to one of the 16
• The green LED blinks. predefined group IDs.
• The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right This feature is configured using CPS-RM. A contact for one
corner. of the predefined IDs is required to initiate and/or receive
• The first text line shows the caller alias ID. an Unaddressed Call. Check with your dealer or system
• The second text line displays Broadcast Call.
344
English
7.5.8.1 shows Unaddress Call, the Group Call icon, and

Making Unaddressed Calls alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID.
1 Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,
2 Do one of the following: transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating
that the channel is free for you to respond. Press the
PTT button to respond to the call.
button.
The call initiator can press to end a Group Call.
The green LED lights up.The text line shows
Unaddress Call, the Group Call icon and alias.
7.5.8.2

Responding to Unaddressed Calls
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak When you receive an Unaddressed Call:
clearly into the microphone if enabled. • The green LED blinks.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak • A momentary tone sounds.
• The text line shows Unaddress Call, the caller alias,
5 Release the PTT button to listen. and the group call alias.

responds. A momentary tone sounds. The display
345
English
• Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds The call ends when there is no voice activity for a
through the speaker. predetermined period.

7.5.9
• If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,
Open Voice Channel Mode (OVCM)
transmitting radio releases the PTT button, An Open Voice Channel Mode (OVCM) allows a radio that
indicating the channel is free for you to respond. is not preconfigured to work in a particular system to both
Press the PTT button to respond to the call. receive and transmit during a group or individual call.
• If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the The OVCM group call also supports broadcast calls.
PTT button to interrupt the audio from the Program your radio to use this feature. Check with your
transmitting radio and free the channel for you to dealer or system administrator for more information.
respond.
The green LED lights up. 7.5.9.1
Making OVCM Calls
2 Do one of the following: Your radio must be programmed for you to make an OVCM
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak Call. Follow the procedure to make OVCM Calls on your
clearly into the microphone if enabled. radio.
1 Select a channel with the active group alias or ID.
346
English
• Press the programmed One Touch Access NOTICE:

button. Recipient users are not allowed to Talkback during
a Broadcast Call. The display shows Talkback
3 Press the PTT button to make the call. Prohibit. If the PTT button is pressed during a
The green LED lights up. Broadcast Call, the Talkback Prohibit Tone sounds
The text line shows the call type icon, OVCM and momentarily.
alias. indicating that the radio has entered OVCM
State. 1 Do one of the following:
• If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,
4 Do one of the following: transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
clearly into the microphone if enabled. Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak • If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the
clearly into the microphone if enabled. PTT button to interrupt the audio from the
transmitting radio and free the channel for you to
respond.
7.5.9.2
Responding to OVCM Calls
When you receive an OVCM Call: 2 Do one of the following:
• The green LED blinks. • Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
• The text line shows the call type icon, OVCM, and alias. clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds • Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak
through the speaker. clearly into the microphone if enabled.
347
English
3 Release the PTT button to listen. reliability, Motorola Solutions recommends to not separate
the radio and the accessory.
predetermined period. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality
start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this
7.6 problem, position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device
closer to each other (within the 10 m defined range) to re-
Advanced Features establish clear audio reception. The Bluetooth function of
your radio has maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the
This chapter explains the operations of the features 10 m range.
available in your radio. Your radio can support up to three simultaneous Bluetooth
Your dealer or system administrator may have customized connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique
your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer types. For example, a headset, a scanner, a sensor device,
or system administrator for more information. and a PTT-Only Device (POD).
Refer to the user manual of your respective Bluetooth-
7.6.1 enabled device for more details on the full capabilities of
Bluetooth® your Bluetooth-enabled device.
This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth- Your radio connects to the Bluetooth-enabled device within
enabled device (accessory) through a Bluetooth range with either the strongest signal strength, or to one
connection. Your radio supports both Motorola Solutions which it has connected to before in a prior session. Do not
and Commercially available Off-The-Shelf (COTS) turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or press the home
back button during the finding and connecting
Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 m (32ft) line of operation as this cancels the operation.
sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and
your Bluetooth-enabled device. For high degree of
348
English
7.6.1.1 7.6.1.2
Turning Bluetooth On and Off Connecting to Bluetooth Devices
Follow the procedure to turn Bluetooth on and off. Follow the procedure to connect to Bluetooth devices.
Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in
1 pairing mode.
1
2
2
3
Press or to My Status. Press to select.
The display shows On and Off. The current status is 3
indicated by a . Press or to Devices. Press to select.

• Press or to the required device. Press
to select.
• Press or to Off. Press to select. available devices. Press or to the
required device. Press to select.
349
English
5 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices in

Press or to Connect. Press to select.
Discoverable Mode
Follow the procedure to connect to Bluetooth devices in
additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to the
discoverable mode.
user manual of your Bluetooth-enabled device.
The display shows Connecting to <Device>. Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in
pairing mode.
1
If successful:
• The display shows <Device> Connected and the 2
Bluetooth Connected icon. Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select.

If unsuccessful: Press or to Find Me. Press to select.
The radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-
• A negative indicator tone sounds. enabled devices for a programmed duration. This is
• The display shows Connecting Failed. called Discoverable Mode.

7.6.1.3 If successful:
• The display shows <Device> Connected and the
Bluetooth Connected icon.
350
English

If unsuccessful: Press or to Disconnect. Press to
select.
The display shows Disconnecting from
• The display shows Connecting Failed. <Device>.
7.6.1.4 Wait for acknowledgment.

Disconnecting from Bluetooth Devices • A tone sounds.
Follow the procedure to disconnect from Bluetooth devices. • The display shows <Device> Disconnected and the
Bluetooth Connected icon disappears.
1
Press to access the menu. • The disappears beside the connected device.
2 7.6.1.5
Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. Switching Audio Route between
3 Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth
Press or to Devices. Press to select. Device
Follow the procedure to toggle audio routing between
4
internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth device.
Press or to the required device. Press
to select.
Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch
button.

351
English
• A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio to 5

Radio. Press or to View Details. Press to
• A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio to select.
Bluetooth.
7.6.1.7
7.6.1.6 Deleting Device Name
Viewing Device Details
Follow the procedure to view device details on your radio. Bluetooth-enabled devices.
1 1
2 2
Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select.
3 3
Press or to Devices. Press to select. Press or to Devices. Press to select.
4 4
Press or to the required device. Press Press or to the required device. Press
352
English
5 5 Press or to increase or to decrease values.

The display shows Device Deleted. Press to select.
7.6.1.8 7.6.1.9
Bluetooth Mic Gain Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable
This feature allows the user to control the microphone gain Mode
value of the connected Bluetooth-enabled device.
The Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode must be
enabled by the dealer or system administrator.
1
Press to access the menu. NOTICE:
If enabled, Bluetooth is not displayed in the Menu
2 and you cannot use any Bluetooth programmable
Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. button features.
Other Bluetooth-enabled devices can locate your radio, but
3 the devices cannot connect to the radio. The Permanent
Press or to BT Mic Gain. Press to Bluetooth Discoverable Mode enables dedicated devices to
select. use your radio position in the process of Bluetooth-based
location.
4 Press or to the BT Mic Gain type and the
current values. Press to select. You can edit

the values here.
353
English
7.6.2 c. Press or to Indoor Location and press

Indoor Location
to select.
NOTICE:
the latest software and hardware. Check with your d. Press to turn on Indoor Location.
dealer or system administrator for more information. The display shows Indoor Location On. You
Indoor Location is use to keep track of the location of radio hear a positive indicator tone.
users. When Indoor Location is activated, the radio is in a One of the following scenarios occurs.
limited discoverable mode. Dedicated beacons are used to • If successful, the Indoor Location Available
locate the radio and determine its position. icon appears on the Home screen display.
Turning Indoor Location On or Off tone.
one of the following actions.
e. Press to turn off Indoor Location.
a. Press to access the menu. One of the following scenarios occurs.
b. Press or to Bluetooth and press to icon disappears on the Home screen display.
select.
354
English
• If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning • If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning
Off Failed. You hear a negative indicator Off Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a
tone. negative indicator tone.
• Access this feature by using the programmed button.

7.6.2.2
button to turn on Indoor Location. Accessing Indoor Location Beacons
The display shows Indoor Location On. You Information
hear a positive indicator tone. Follow the procedure to access Indoor Location beacons
One of the following scenarios occurs. information.
icon appears on the Home screen display. 1
2
select.
to turn off Indoor Location. 3 Press or to Indoor Location and press
The display shows Indoor Location Off. You
hear a positive indicator tone. to select.
355
English
4 If the current channel is a multi-site channel with an

Press or to Beacons and press to attached roam list and is out of range, and the site is
select. unlocked, your radio also performs automatic site search.
The display shows the beacons information. 7.6.3.1

Enabling Manual Site Search
7.6.3
1 Perform one of the following actions:
Multi-Site Control • Press the programmed Manual Site Roam
Your radio is able to search for sites and switch between button. Skip the following steps.
sites when signal is weak or your radio is unable to detect
any signal from the current site. • Press to access the menu.
When the signal is strong, the radio remains on the current
site. 2
This setting is applicable when your current radio channel
is part of an IP Site Connect or Capacity Plus–Multi-Site 3
configuration. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
Your radio can perform either one of the following site select.
searches:
4
• Automatic Site Search Press or to Site Roaming. Press to
• Manual Site Search select.
356
English
5 7.6.3.2
Press or to Active Search. Press to Site Lock On/Off
select.
A tone sounds. The green LED blinks. The display When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition
shows Finding Site. to the current site.
If the radio finds a new site, your radio shows the following Press the programmed Site Lock button.
indications:
If the Site Lock function is toggled on:
• A positive tone sounds.
• You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the
• The LED extinguishes. radio has locked to the current site.
• The display shows Site <Alias> Found. • The display shows Site Locked.
If the radio fails to find a new site, your radio shows the If the Site Lock function is toggled off:
following indications:
• A negative tone sounds. radio is unlocked.
• The LED extinguishes. • The display shows Site Unlocked.
• The display shows Out of Range.
If a new site is within range, but the radio is unable to
connect to it, your radio shows the following indications: 7.6.4
• A negative tone sounds. Talkaround

• The LED turns off. This feature allows you to continue communicating when
your repeater is non-operational, or when your radio is out
• The display shows Channel Busy.
357
English
of range from the repeater but within the talk range of other 3
radios. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
The talkaround setting is retained even after powering select.
down.
4
NOTICE:
Press or to Talkaround. Press to
This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus–
select.
Single-Site, Capacity Plus–Multi-Site, and Citizens
Band channels that are in the same frequency. If enabled, appears beside Enabled.
If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
7.6.4.1
Toggling Between Repeater and screen.
Talkaround Modes
Follow the procedure to toggle between Repeater and
Talkaround modes on your radio. 7.6.5
Monitor Feature
The feature allows you to ensure that a channel is free
• Press the programmed Repeater/Talkaround before transmitting.
button. Skip the following steps.
NOTICE:
This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus–
• Press to access the menu. Single-Site and Capacity Plus–Multi-Site.
2
358
English
7.6.5.1 7.6.5.2.1
Monitoring Channels Turning Permanent Monitor On or Off
Follow the procedure to monitor channels. Follow the procedure to turn Permanent Monitor on or off
on your radio.
1 Long press the programmed Monitor button.
Press the programmed Permanent Monitor button.
The Monitor icon appears on the display and the
LED lights up solid yellow. When the radio enters the mode:
If the channel is in use: • An alert tone sounds.
• The display shows the Monitor icon. • The yellow LED lights up.
• You hear radio activity or total silence. • The display shows Permanent Monitor On and
• The yellow LED lights up. the Monitor icon.
If the monitored channel is free, you hear a “white When the radio exits the mode:
noise". • An alert tone sounds.
• The yellow LED turns off.
2 Press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT • The display shows Permanent Monitor Off.
button to listen.
7.6.5.2 7.6.6
Permanent Monitor Home Channel Reminder
The Permanent Monitor feature is used to continuously This feature provides a reminder when the radio is not set
monitor a selected channel for activity. to the home channel for a period of time.
359
English
If this feature is enabled through CPS, when your radio is Press the programmed Silence Home Channel
not set to the home channel for a period of time, the Reminder button.
following occurs periodically:
The display shows HCR Silenced.
• The Home Channel Reminder tone and announcement
sound.
• The first line of the display shows Non. 7.6.6.2
• The second line shows Home Channel. Setting New Home Channels
You can respond to the reminder by performing one of the When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can set a
following actions: new home channel.
• Return to the home channel.
• Mute the reminder temporarily using the programmable
• Press the Reset Home Channel programmable
button.
button to set the current channel as the new
• Set a new home channel using the programmable Home Channel. Skip the following steps.
button. The first line of the display shows the channel
alias and the second line shows New Home Ch.
7.6.6.1
Muting the Home Channel Reminder • Press to access the menu.
When the Home Channel Reminder sounds, you can
2
temporarily mute the reminder.
360
English
3 Sending Radio Checks

Follow the procedure to send radio checks on your radio.
select.
4 1 Press the programmed Radio Check button.

Press or to Home Channel. Press to
select. 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press
5 Press or to the desired new home channel to select.

alias. Press to select. indicating the request is in progress.The green LED
lights up.
channel alias.
7.6.7 If you press when the radio is waiting for

acknowledgment, a tone sounds, the radio terminates all
Radio Check retries, and exits Radio Check mode.
This feature allows you to determine if another radio is If successful:
active in a system without disturbing the radio user. No
audible or visual notification is shown on the target radio. • A positive indicator tone sounds.
Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this • The display shows a positive mini notice.
feature.
If unsuccessful:
7.6.7.1 • A negative indicator tone sounds.
361
English
• The display shows a negative mini notice. This feature stops after a programmed duration or when
there is any user operation on the target radio.
The radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen.
7.6.8.1
7.6.8
Remote Monitor Initiating Remote Monitor
This feature is used to turn on the microphone of a target
radio.
radio with a subscriber alias or ID. You can use this feature
to remotely monitor any audible activity surrounding the
1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button.
target radio.
There are two types of Remote Monitor: 2 Press or to the required alias or ID.
• Remote Monitor without Authentication
3
• Remote Monitor with Authentication.
Press to select. One of the following scenarios
Authenticated Remote Monitor is a purchasable feature. In occurs:
Authenticated Remote Monitor, verification is required
• The display shows a transitional mini notice,
when your radio turns on the microphone of a target radio.
indicating the request is in progress. The green
When your radio initiates this feature on a target radio with LED lights up.
User Authentication, a passphrase is required. The
• A passphrase screen appears.
passphrase is preprogrammed into the target radio through
CPS.
Enter the passphrase. Press to proceed.
Both your radio and the target radio must be programmed
to allow you to use this feature. • If the passphrase is correct, the display shows
a transitional mini notice, indicating the
362
English
request is in progress. The green LED lights Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the
up.
Contacts List
• If the passphrase is incorrect, the display
shows a negative mini notice, and returns to Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your
the previous screen. radio by using the Contacts list.

If successful:
• The display shows a positive mini notice. Press or to Contacts. Press to select.
• The audio from the monitored radio starts playing 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press
for a programmed duration, and the display
shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an to select.
If unsuccessful: 4 Press or to Remote Mon..
5
• The display shows a negative mini notice. Press to select. One of the following scenarios
occurs:
7.6.8.2 indicating the request is in progress. The green
LED lights up.
363
English
7.6.8.3
Enter the passphrase. Press to proceed. Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the
• If the passphrase is correct, the display shows Manual Dial
a transitional mini notice, indicating the
request is in progress. The green LED lights Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your
up. radio by using the manual dial.
• If the passphrase is incorrect, the display
1
shows a negative mini notice, and returns to
the previous screen.
2
If successful:
• The display shows a positive mini notice. select.
• The audio from the monitored radio starts playing
for a programmed duration, and the display 4
shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an Press or to Radio Number. Press to
alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off. select.
If unsuccessful: 5 Do one of the following:
• The display shows a negative mini notice. • Enter the subscriber alias or ID, and press
to proceed.
364
English

• Edit the previously dialed ID, and press to
proceed. If successful:
6 Press or to Remote Mon.. • The display shows a positive mini notice.
7 • The audio from the monitored radio starts playing
Press to select. One of the following scenarios for a programmed duration, and the display
occurs: shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an
indicating the request is in progress. The green If unsuccessful:
LED lights up. • A negative indicator tone sounds.
• A passphrase screen appears. • The display shows a negative mini notice.

• If the passphrase is correct, the display shows 7.6.9
a transitional mini notice, indicating the Scan Lists
request is in progress. The green LED lights
up. Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels
or groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling
• If the passphrase is incorrect, the display through the channel or group sequence specified in the
shows a negative mini notice, and returns to scan list for the current channel or group.
Your radio can support up to 250 scan lists, with a
maximum of 16 members in a list.
365
English
Each scan list supports a mixture of both analog and digital 2

entries. Press or to Scan. Press to select.
You can add, delete, or prioritize channels by editing a
scan list. 3
Press or to Scan List. Press to select.
You can attach a new scan list to your radio by using Front
Panel Programming. See Front Panel Programming on
4 Press or to view each member on the list.
The Priority icon appears on the left of the member alias, if
set, to indicate whether the member is on a Priority 1 or 7.6.9.2
Priority 2 channel list. You cannot have multiple Priority 1 Adding New Entries to the Scan List
or Priority 2 channels in a scan list. There is no Priority
Follow the procedure to add new entries to the Scan list on
icon if priority is set to None.
your radio.
NOTICE:
This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus. 1
7.6.9.1
2
Viewing Entries in the Scan List Press or to Scan. Press to select.
Follow the procedure to view the entries in the Scan list on
your radio. 3
1
366
English
4 Deleting Entries from the Scan List

Press or to Add Member. Press to
Follow the procedure to delete entries from the Scan list.
select.
5 Press 1
to select.
2
6 Press or to the required priority level. Press
3
to select.
The display shows a positive mini notice and then,
Add Another?. 4 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press
7 Do one of the following: to select.
• Press or to Yes to add another entry. 5

Press to select. Repeat step 5 and step 6.
The display shows Delete Entry?.
• Press or to No to save the current list.
Press to select.
• Press or to Yes to delete the entry. Press
7.6.9.3
to select.
367
English
The display shows a positive mini notice. 3

• Press or to No to return to the previous Press or to Scan List. Press to select.
screen. Press to select. 4 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press
7 Repeat step 4 to step 6 to delete other entries. to select.
8 5
Long press to return to the Home screen after Press or to Edit Priority. Press to
deleting all required aliases or IDs. select.
6 Press or to the required priority level. Press

7.6.9.4
Setting Priority for Entries in the Scan to select.
List The display shows a positive mini notice before
returning to the previous screen. The Priority icon
Follow the procedure to set priorities for entries in the Scan
appears on the left of the member alias.
list on your radio.
1
2
368
English
7.6.10 Turning Scan On or Off

Scan Follow the procedure to turn scan on or off on your radio.
Your radio cycles through the programmed scan list for the NOTICE:
current channel looking for voice activity when you start a While scanning, the radio only accepts data (for
scan. example: text message, location, or PC data) if
NOTICE: received on its Selected Channel.
This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus.
1 Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select a
During a dual-mode scan, if you are on a digital channel,
channel programmed with a scan list.
and your radio locks onto an analog channel, it
automatically switches from digital mode to analog mode
2
for the duration of the call. This is also true for the reverse.
There are two ways of initiating scan:
Main Channel Scan (Manual) 3
Your radio scans all the channels or groups in your Press or to Scan. Press to select.
scan list. On entering scan, your radio may, depending
on the settings, automatically start on the last scanned 4
active channel or group, or on the channel where scan Press or to Scan State. Press to
was initiated. select.
Auto Scan (Automatic)
Your radio automatically starts scanning when you 5 Press or to the required scan state and
select a channel or group that has Auto Scan enabled.
press to select.
7.6.10.1 If scan is enabled:
369
English
• The display shows Scan On and Scan icon. 2 Do one of the following:
• The yellow LED blinks. • Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
If scan is disabled: clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• The display shows Scan Off. • Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak
• The Scan icon disappears.
• The LED turns off. 3 Release the PTT button to listen.
The radio returns to scanning other channels or
7.6.10.2 groups if you do not respond within the hang time.
Responding to Transmissions During
Scanning 7.6.10.3
During scanning, your radio stops on a channel or group Deleting Nuisance Channels
where activity is detected. The radio stays on that channel
If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise,
for a programmed duration known as hang time. Follow the
(termed a "nuisance" channel), you can temporarily remove
procedure to respond to transmissions during scanning.
the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability
does not apply to the channel designated as the Selected
1 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, Channel. Follow the procedure to delete nuisance channels
you hear a short alert tone the moment the on your radio.
the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT 1 When your radio locks on to an unwanted or
button during hang time. nuisance channel, press the programmed Nuisance
The green LED lights up. Channel Delete button until you hear a tone.
370
English
2 Release the programmed Nuisance Channel

Delete button.
Vote Scan
The nuisance channel is deleted.
Vote Scan provides you with wide area coverage in areas
where there are multiple base stations transmitting identical
7.6.10.4 information on different analog channels.
Restoring Nuisance Channels Your radio scans analog channels of multiple base stations
and performs a voting process to select the strongest
Follow the procedure to restore nuisance channels on your received signal. Once that is established, your radio
radio. receives transmissions from that base station.
During a vote scan, the yellow LED blinks and the display
shows the Vote Scan icon.
• Turn the radio off and then power it on again.
To respond to a transmission during a vote scan, see
• Stop and restart a scan using the programmed Responding to Transmissions During Scanning on page
Scan button or menu. 370.
• Change the channel using the Channel Selector
Knob. 7.6.12
Contacts Settings
7.6.11 Contacts provides address book capabilities on your radio.
Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to
initiate a call. The entries are alphabetically sorted.
371
English
Each entry, depending on context, associates with the 7.6.12.1

different call types: Group Call, Private Call, All Call, PC Adding New Contacts
Call, or Dispatch Call.
Follow the procedure to add new contacts on your radio.
PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They are only
available with the applications. Refer to the data
1
applications documentation for further details.
NOTICE:
You see a checkmark before each number key that 2
is assigned to an entry. If the checkmark is before Press or to Contacts. Press to select.
Empty, you have not assign a number key to the
entry. 3
Each entry within Contacts displays the following Press or to New Contact. Press to
information: select.
• Call Type 4 Press or to select contact type Radio

• Call Alias
Contact or Phone Contact. Press to select.
• Call ID
NOTICE: 5 Enter the contact number with the keypad, and press
If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you
can make privacy-enabled Group Calls, Private to proceed.
Calls, and All Calls on that channel. Only target
radios with the same Privacy Key, or the same Key 6 Enter the contact name with the keypad, and press
Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to
decrypt the transmission. to proceed.
372
English
7 Press or to the required ringer type. Press 4

Press or to Set as Default. Press to
to select. select.
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows
a positive mini notice. a positive mini notice. The display shows beside
the selected default alias or ID.
7.6.12.2
Setting Default Contact 7.6.12.3
Follow the procedure to set the default contact on your

Assigning Entries to Programmable
radio. Number Keys
1 1
2 2
Press or to Contacts. Press to select. Press or to Contacts. Press to select.
3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press
373
English
4 Removing Associations Between

Press or to Program Key. Press to
select.
Entries and Programmable Number
Keys
• If the desired number key has not been assigned 1 Do one of the following:
to an entry, press or to the desired • Long press the programmed number key to the
required alias or ID. Proceed to step 4.
number key. Press to select.
• If the desired number key has been assigned to • Press to access the menu.
an entry, the display shows The Key is
Already Assigned and then, the first text line 2
shows Overwrite?. Do one of the following: Press or to Contacts. Press to select.
Press or to Yes. Press to select. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press
The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and
to select.
the display shows Contact Saved and a positive
mini notice.
4
Press or to No to return to the previous Press or to Program Key. Press to
step. select.
7.6.12.4
374
English
5 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers

Press or to Empty. Press to select.
for Call Alerts
The first text line shows Clear from all keys.
1
2
NOTICE: Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
When an entry is deleted, the association
between the entry and its programmed 3
number key(s) is removed. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows select.
Contact Saved.
The screen automatically returns to the previous 4
menu. Press or to Tones/Alert. Press to
select.
5
7.6.13
Call Indicator Settings select.
This feature allows you to configure call or text message
ringing tones. 6
Press or to Call Alert. Press to
select.
7.6.13.1
375
English
3
• Press or to the required tone. Press Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
to select. select.
4
• Press or to Off. Press to select. Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press to
If the ringing tones were earlier enabled, the select.
5
If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the Press or to Call Ringers. Press to
display does not show beside Off. select.
6
7.6.13.2
Press or to Private Call. Press to
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers select.
for Private Calls The display shows beside On if Private Call
Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers ringing tones are enabled.
for Private Calls on your radio. The display shows beside Off if Private Call
ringing tones are disabled.
1
2
• Press or to the required tone. Press
to select.
376
English
The display shows and the selected tone. 4

• Press or to Off. Press to select. select.
5
If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the select.
6
Press or to Selective Call. Press to
7.6.13.3
select.
The display shows and the current tone.
for Selective Calls
Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers 7 Do one of the following:
for Selective Calls on your radio.
1
to select.
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. • Press or to Off. Press to select.
3 display shows beside Off.
select.
377
English
If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the 5

display does not show beside Off. Press or to Call Ringers. Press to
select.
7.6.13.4
6
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers Press or to Text Message. Press to
for Text Messages select.
Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers The display shows and the current tone.
for text messages on your radio.
1
2 to select.
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. The display shows and the selected tone.
3 • Press or to Off. Press to select.

Press or to Radio Settings. Press to If the ringing tones were earlier enabled, the
select. display shows beside Off.
4 If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the

Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press to display does not show beside Off.
select.
378
English
7.6.13.5 6
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers Press or to Telemetry. Press to select.
for Telemetry Status with Text The current tone is indicated by a .
Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers
for telemetry status with text on your radio. 7 Do one of the following:
• Press or to the preferred tone. Press
1
to select.
The display shows Tone <Number> Selected
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. and a appears left of the selected tone.
3 • Press or to Turn Off. Press to

Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select.
select. The display shows Telemetry Ringer Off and
a appears left of Turn Off.
4
Press or to Tones/Alert. Press to
select. 7.6.13.6
Assigning Ring Styles
5
The radio can be programmed to sound one of eleven
predefined ringing tones when receiving a Private Call, a
select.
Call Alert, or a Text Message from a particular contact.The
379
English
radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate through 6

the list. Press or to the required tone. Press to
select.
1
2
Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 7.6.13.7
The entries are alphabetically sorted. Selecting a Ring Alert Type
NOTICE:
3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press The programmed Ring Alert Type button is
assigned by your dealer or system administrator.
to select. Check with your dealer or system administrator to
4 You can program the radio calls to one predetermined
Press or to View/Edit. Press to select. vibrate call. If All Tones status is disabled, the radio
displays the All Tone Mute icon. If All Tones status is
5 enabled, the related ring alert type is displayed.
Press until display shows Ringer menu
The radio vibrates once if it is a momentary ring style. The
A indicates the current selected tone. radio vibrates repetitively if it is a repetitive ring style. When
set to Ring and Vibrate, the radio sounds a specific ring
tone if there is any incoming radio transaction (for example,
Call Alert or Message). It sounds like a positive indicator
tone or missed call.
380
English
For radios with batteries that support the vibrate feature c. Press or to Radio Settings and press
and are attached to a vibrating belt clip, the available Ring
Alert Type options are Silent, Ring, Vibrate, and Ring and to select.
Vibrate.
d. Press or to Tones/Alerts and press
For radios with batteries that do not support the vibrate
feature and are not attached to a vibrating belt clip, Ring to select.
Alert Type is automatically set to Ring. The available Ring
Alert Type options are Silent and Ring. e. Press or to Ring Alert Type and press
You can select a Ring Alert Type by performing one of the to select.
following actions.
f. Press or to Ring, Vibrate, Ring &
• Press the programmed Ring Alert Type button to
access the Ring Alert Type menu. Vibrate or Silent and press to select.
a. Press or to Ring, Vibrate, Ring &
7.6.13.8
Vibrate or Silent and press to select. Configuring Vibrate Style
• Access this feature through the menu. NOTICE:
a. Press to access the menu. by your dealer or system administrator. Check with
your dealer or system administrator to determine
how your radio has been programmed.
select. Vibrate Style is enabled when the Vibrating Belt Clip is
feature.
381
English
You can configure the vibrate style by performing one of f. Press or to Short, Medium, or Long and
press to select.
access the Vibrate Style menu.
7.6.13.9
a. Press or to Short, Medium, or Long and Escalating Alarm Tone Volume
press to select. The radio can be programmed to continually alert, when a
• Access this feature via the menu. automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time.
This feature is known as Escalert. Follow the procedure to
a. Press to access the menu. escalate alarm tone volume on your radio.
b. Press or to Utilities and press to 7.6.14

select.
Call Log Features
Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered,
to select. and missed Private Calls. The call log feature is used to
view and manage recent calls.
d. Press or to Tones/Alerts and press
Missed Call Alerts may be included in the call logs,
depending on the system configuration on your radio. You
to select.
can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:
e. Press or to Vibrate Style and press • Store Alias or ID to Contacts
to select. • Delete Call
382
English
• View Details Viewing Call List Details

Follow the procedure to view call details on your radio.
7.6.14.1
Viewing Recent Calls 1
1
Press or to Call Log. Press to select.
2
Press or to Call Log. Press to select. 3
Press or to the required list. Press to
3 Press or to the preferred list. The options are select.
Missed, Answered, and Outgoing lists.
Press to select.
to select.
The display shows the most recent entry.
5
4 Press or to view the list. Press or to View Details. Press to
select.
You can start a call with the alias or ID the display is
currently showing by pressing the PTT button. The display shows the call details.
7.6.14.2
383
English
7.6.14.3 6 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias.

Storing Aliases or IDs from the Call List
Press to select.
You can store an ID without an alias.
Follow the procedure to store aliases or IDs on your radio
from the Call list. The display shows a positive mini notice.
1
Deleting Calls from the Call List
2
Press or to Call Log. Press to select. Follow the procedure to delete calls from the Call list.
3 1
Press or to the required list. Press to Press to access the menu.
select.
2
4 Press Press or to Call Log. Press to select.
3
to select.
Press or to the required list. Press to
select.
5
Press or to Store. Press to select. If the list is empty:
The display shows a blinking cursor. • A tone sounds.
384
English
• The display shows List Empty. This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs only
and is accessible through the menu using Contacts or a
programmed One Touch Access button.
7.6.15.1
to select.
Responding to Call Alerts
5 When you receive a Call Alert:
Press or to Delete Entry?. Press to
select. • A repetitive tone sounds.
• The display shows the notification list listing a Call Alert
with the alias or ID of the calling radio.
• Press to select Yes to delete the entry.
The display shows Entry Deleted. Depending on the configuration by your dealer or
system administrator, you can respond to a Call Alert
• Press or to No. Press to select. by doing one of the following:
The radio returns to the previous screen. • Press the PTT button and respond with a Private
Call directly to the caller.
• Press the PTT button to continue normal
7.6.15 talkgroup communication.
Call Alert Operation The Call Alert is moved to the Missed Call option
at the Call Log menu. You can respond to the
Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user caller from the Missed Called log.
to call you back.
385
English
See Notification List on page 159 and Call Log Features on Making Call Alerts by Using the
Contacts List
7.6.15.2
1
Making Call Alerts Press to access the menu.
Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your radio.
2
1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. Press or to Contacts. Press to select.
The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press
alias or ID. The green LED lights up.
to select.
If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, the 4
display shows a positive mini notice. Press or to Call Alert. Press to
select.
If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received, the
display shows a negative mini notice. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber
alias or ID. The green LED lights up.
7.6.15.3 5 Wait for acknowledgment.

• If the acknowledgment is received, the display
shows a positive mini notice.
386
English
• If the acknowledgment is not received, the 2

display shows a negative mini notice. Press or to Caller Aliases. Press to
select.
7.6.16 3
Press or to the preferred list. Press to
Dynamic Caller Alias select.
This feature allows a Caller Alias to be configured in the
radio. 4
Press or to View Details. Press to
When in a call, the receiving radio displays the Caller Alias
select.
of the transmitting radio.
The Caller Aliases list can store up to 500 Caller Aliases of
transmitting radio. You can view or make Private Calls from 7.6.16.2
the Caller Aliases list. When you turn off your radio, the Initiating Private Call From the Caller
history of receiving Caller Aliases is removed from the Aliases List
Caller Aliases list.
You can access the Caller Aliases list to initiate Private
7.6.16.1 Call.
Viewing the Caller Aliases List 1
You can access the Caller Aliases list to view the Press to access the menu.
transmitting Caller Alias details.
2
1 Press or to Caller Aliases. Press to
Press to access the menu. select.
387
English
3 Press or to the <required Caller Do one of the following:

Alias>. • Access this feature by using the programmed
Mute Mode button.
4 To call, press and hold the PTT button.
• Access this feature by placing the radio in a face-
7.6.17
Depending on radio model, the Face Down feature
Mute Mode can be enabled either through the radio menu or by
your system administrator. Check with your dealer or
Mute Mode provides an option to silence all audio
IMPORTANT:
When Mute Mode is initiated, all audio indicators are muted
User can only enable either Man Down or
except higher priority features such as emergency
Face Down at a time. Both features cannot
operations.
be enabled together.
NOTICE:
ongoing tones and audio transmissions.
Face Down feature is applicable to DP4601e
IMPORTANT: only.
Down one at a time. Both features cannot be The following occurs when Mute mode is enabled:
enabled together. • Positive Indicator Tone sounds.
7.6.17.1
• The red LED light starts blinking and remains blinking
Turning On Mute Mode until Mute Mode is exited.
Follow the procedure to turn on Mute Mode.
• Display shows Mute Mode icon on home screen.
388
English
• Radio is muted. 3
• Mute Mode Timer begins counting down the duration Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
that is configured. select.
7.6.17.2 4
Press or to Mute Timer. Press to
Setting Mute Mode Timer select.
Mute Mode feature can be enabled for a pre-configured
amount of time by setting the Mute Mode Timer. The timer 5 Press or to edit the numeric value of each
duration is configured in the radio menu and can range
between 0.5–6 hours. Mute Mode is exited once the timer digit, and press .
expires.
If the timer is left at 0, the radio remains in Mute mode for 7.6.17.3
an indefinite period until the radio is moved to a face-up Exiting Mute Mode
position or the programmed Mute Mode button is pressed.
This feature can be exited automatically once the Mute
NOTICE:
Mode Timer expires.
Face Down feature is applicable to DP4601e only.
Do one of the following to exit Mute mode manually:
1
Press to access the menu. • Press the programmed Mute Mode button.
• Press the PTT button on any entry.
2
389
English
• Place the radio in a face-up position momentarily. Emergency Operation

An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical situation.
NOTICE: You are able to initiate an Emergency at any time even
Face Down feature is applicable to when there is activity on the current channel.
DP4601e only.
Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for the
The following occurs when Mute mode is disabled: programmed Emergency button, except for long press,
which is similar with all other buttons:
• Negative Indicator Tone sounds.
Short Press
• Display shows Mute Mode Off. Duration between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds.
• The blinking red LED turns off. Long Press
• Mute Mode icon disappears from home screen. Duration between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds.
• Your radio unmutes and speaker state is restored. The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency
On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned
• If the timer has not expired, Mute mode timer is operation of the Emergency button.
stopped.
NOTICE:
NOTICE: If a short press to the Emergency button initiates
Mute Mode is also exited if the user transmits voice Emergency mode, then a long press to the same
or switches to an unprogrammed channel. enables the radio to exit Emergency mode.
If a long press to the Emergency button initiates
7.6.18
Emergency mode, then a short press to the same
enables the radio to exit Emergency mode.
Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:
• Emergency Alarm
390
English
• Emergency Alarm with Call Sending Emergency Alarms

• Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm, a
NOTICE: non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication on a
Only one of the Emergency Alarms above can be group of radios. Your radio does not display any audio or
assigned to the programmed Emergency button. visual indicators during Emergency mode when it is set to
Silent.
In addition, each alarm has the following types:
Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms on your
Regular
radio.
Radio transmits an alarm signal and shows audio
and/or visual indicators.
Silent
Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or You see one of these results:
visual indicators. Radio receives calls without any • The display shows Tx Alarms and the
sound through the speaker, until the programmed hot destination alias.
mic transmission period is over and/or you press the
PTT button. • The display shows Tx Telegram and the
destination alias.
Silent with Voice
Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or
visual indicators, but allow incoming calls to sound
through the speaker. If hot mic is enabled, the incoming
calls sound through the speaker after the programmed
hot mic transmission period is over. The indicators only
appear once you press the PTT button.
7.6.18.1
391
English
The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon 7.6.18.2

appears. Sending Emergency Alarms with Call
NOTICE: This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with
If programmed, the Emergency Search tone Call to a group of radios. Upon acknowledgement by a
sounds. This tone is muted when the radio radio within the group, the group of radios can
transmits or receives voice, and stops when communicate over a programmed Emergency channel.
the radio exits Emergency mode. The Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms with call
Emergency Search tone can be programmed on your radio.
through CPS.
2 Wait for acknowledgment. You see the following:
If successful: • The display shows Tx Telegram and the
• The Emergency tone sounds. destination alias.
• The red LED blinks. The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon
appears.
• The display shows Alarm Sent.
NOTICE:
If unsuccessful after all retries have been exhausted: If programmed, the Emergency Search tone
• A tone sounds. sounds. This tone is muted when the radio
transmits or receives voice, and stops when
• The display shows Alarm Failed. the radio exits Emergency mode. The
The radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode and Emergency Search tone can be programmed
returns to the Home screen. by your dealer or system administrator.
392
English
2 Wait for acknowledgment. 5 Release the PTT button to listen.

If successful: The display shows the caller and group aliases.
• The Emergency tone sounds.
• The display shows Alarm Sent. transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating
• Your radio enters the Emergency call mode when the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT
the display shows Emergency and the destination button to respond to the call.
group alias.
7 To exit the Emergency mode once the call ends,
press the Emergency Off button.
3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The radio returns to the Home screen.
Group Call icon.
7.6.18.3
4 Do one of the following: Emergency Alarms with Voice to
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak Follow
clearly into the microphone if enabled. This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak Voice to Follow to a group of radios. Your radio microphone
clearly into the microphone if enabled. is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate
with the group of radios without pressing the PTT button.
This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic.
393
English
If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled, Sending Emergency Alarms with Voice
repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are made for a
programmed duration. During Emergency Cycle Mode, to Follow
received calls sound through the speaker.
If you press the PTT button during the programmed
receiving period, you hear a prohibit tone, indicating that You see one of these results:
you should release the PTT button. The radio ignores the • The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination
PTT button press and remains in Emergency mode. alias.
If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon
press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio appears.
continues to transmit until you release the PTT button.
If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radio does not
retry to send the request, and enters the hot mic state 2 Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speak clearly
directly. into the microphone.
NOTICE: The radio automatically stops transmitting when:
Some accessories may not support hot mic. Check • The cycling duration between hot mic and
with your dealer or system administrator for more receiving calls expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode
information. is enabled.
• The hot mic duration expires, if Emergency Cycle
7.6.18.4 Mode is disabled.
394
English
3 Press the Emergency Off button to exit the • If more than one alarm, press or to the
Emergency mode.
required alias, and press to view more
The radio returns to the Home screen.
details.
2
7.6.18.5
Press to view the action options.
Receiving Emergency Alarms
3
When you receive an Emergency Alarm:
Press and select Yes to exit the Alarm list.
• A tone sounds.
• The red LED blinks. 4
• The display shows the Emergency icon, and the
Emergency caller alias or if there is more than one 5 Select Alarm List to revisit the Alarm list.
alarm, all emergency caller aliases are displayed in an
Alarm List. 6 To return to home screen, perform the following
actions:
a Press .
• If only one alarm, press to view more
details. b Press or to Yes.
395
English
NOTICE:
c Press to select. Emergency voice can only be transmitted by
the emergency initiating radio. All other
The radio returns to the home screen and the display
radios, including the emergency receiving
shows the Emergency icon.
radio, transmit non-emergency voice.
The green LED lights up. Your radio remains in the
7.6.18.6 Emergency mode.
Responding to Emergency Alarms
1 Make sure the display shows the Alarm List. Press • Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
or to the required alias or ID. clearly into the microphone if enabled.
2 Press the PTT button to transmit non-emergency • Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak
voice to the same group the Emergency Alarm clearly into the microphone if enabled.
targeted.
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,
you hear a short alert tone the moment the When the emergency initiating radio responds:
transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating • The green LED blinks.
the channel is free for you to respond.
• The display shows the Group Call icon and ID,
transmitting radio ID, and the Alarm list.
396
English
7.6.18.7 • Press the programmed Emergency On button

Exiting Emergency Mode After during an emergency initiation or transmission
state.
Receiving the Emergency Alarm
The radio exits the Emergency mode, and reinitiates
Do one of the following to exit Emergency mode after
Emergency.
receiving Emergency alarm:
• Delete the alarm items. 7.6.18.9
• Power down the radio. Exiting Emergency Mode
This feature is only applicable to the radio sending the
7.6.18.8
Emergency Alarm.
Reinitiating Emergency Mode
Your radio exits Emergency mode when:
Perform one of the following actions: • An acknowledgment is received (for Emergency Alarm
only).
• Change the channel while the radio is in
Emergency mode. • All retries to send the alarm have been exhausted.
• Your radio is turned off.
NOTICE: NOTICE:
You can reinitiate emergency mode only if Your radio does not reinitiate the Emergency mode
you enable emergency alarm on the new automatically when it is powered up again.
channel.
Follow the procedure to exit Emergency mode on your
radio.
397
English
• Press the programmed Emergency Off button. 4

• Turn off the radio and then, power it on again, if Press or to Delete. Press to select.
your radio has been programmed to remain on
the Emergency Revert channel even after
7.6.19
acknowledgment is received.
• Change the channel to a new channel that has no
Man Down
emergency system configured. NOTICE:
The display shows No Emergency. Man Down feature is applicable to only DP4601e .
This feature prompts an emergency to be raised if there is
7.6.18.10 a change in the motion of the radio, such as the tilt of the
Deleting an Alarm Item from the Alarm radio, motion and/or the lack of motion for a predefined
time.
List
Following a change in the motion of the radio for a
programmed duration, the radio pre-warns the user with an
1
audio indicator indicating that a change in motion is
detected.
2 If there is still no acknowledgment by the user before the
Press or to Alarm List. Press to predefined reminder timer expires, the radio initiates an
select. Emergency Alarm or an Emergency Call. You can program
the reminder timer by using CPS.
3 Press or to the required alarm item. Press
to select.
398
English
7.6.19.1
Turning the Man Down Feature On or b. Press or to Utilities. Press to
select.
Off
NOTICE: c. Press or to Radio Settings. Press
The programmed Man Down button and Man Down to select.
settings are configured using CPS. Check with your
dealer or system administrator to determine how
d. Press or to Man Down. Press to
your radio has been programmed.
select.
If you disable the Man Down feature, the programmed alert
tone sounds repeatedly until the Man Down feature is You can also use or to change the selected
enabled. A device failure tone sounds when the Man Down option.
feature fails while powering up. The device failure tone
continues until the radio resumes normal operation.
e. Press to enable or disable Man Down.
You can enable or disable this feature by performing one of
the following actions. If enabled, appears beside Enabled.
If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
• Press the programmed Man Down button to toggle
the feature on or off.
• Access this feature using the menu. 7.6.20
Text Messaging
Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text
message, from another radio or a text message application.
399
English
There are two types of text messages, Digital Mobile Radio Viewing Text Messages
(DMR) Short Text Message and text message. The
maximum length of a DMR Short Text Message is 23 1
characters. The maximum length of a text message is 280 Press to access the menu.
characters, including the subject line. The subject line only
appears when you receive messages from e-mail 2
applications. Press or to Messages. Press to select.
NOTICE:
The maximum character length is only applicable for 3
models with the latest software and hardware. For Press or to Inbox. Press to select.
radio models with older software and hardware, the If the Inbox is empty:
maximum length of a text message is 140
characters. Contact your dealer for more • The display shows List Empty.
information. • A tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is turned on.
7.6.20.1 4 Press or to the required message. Press

Text Messages
to select.
The text messages are stored in an Inbox, and sorted
according to the most recently received. The display shows a subject line if the message is
7.6.20.1.1
400
English
7.6.20.1.2 7.6.20.1.3
Viewing Telemetry Status Text Messages Viewing Saved Text Messages
Follow the procedure to view a telemetry status text
message from the inbox. 1 Do one of the following:
1 Proceed to step 3.
2
Press or to Messages. Press to select. 2
3
Press or to Inbox. Press to select. 3
to select.
You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status text to select.
message.
The display shows Telemetry: <Status Text 7.6.20.1.4
Message>. Responding to Text Messages
Follow the procedure to respond to text messages on your
5
radio.
401
English
When you receive a text message: 2

• The display shows the Notification list with the alias or Press to return to the Inbox.
ID of the sender.
• The display shows the Message icon. 7.6.20.1.5
NOTICE: Replying to Text Messages
The radio exits the Text Message alert screen and Follow the procedure to respond to text messages on your
sets up a Private or Group Call to the sender of the radio.
message if the PTT button is pressed.
Proceed to Step step 3.
• Press or to Read. Press to select.
The display shows the text message. The display
shows a subject line if the message is from an e- • Press to access the menu.
mail application.
2
• Press or to Read Later. Press to
select. 3
The radio returns to the screen you were on prior Press or to Inbox. Press to select.
to receiving the text message.
• Press or to Delete. Press to select.
402
English
4 Press or to the required message. Press 8 Wait for acknowledgment.

If successful:
to select.
• A tone sounds.
from an e-mail application. • The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
5 • A tone sounds.
Press to access the sub-menu.
6 Do one of the following: • The radio returns to the Resend option screen.
• Press or to Reply. Press to select.

7.6.20.1.6
• Press or to Quick Reply. Press to Forwarding Text Messages
select. Follow the procedure to forward text messages on your
A blinking cursor appears. You can write or edit your radio.
message, if required. When you are at the Resend option screen:
7 1
Press once message is composed. Press or to Forward, and press to send
The display shows a transitional mini notice, the same message to another subscriber or group
confirming the message is being sent. alias or ID.
403
English
2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press Resending Text Messages

When you are at the Resend option screen:
to select.
confirming your message is being sent. Press to resend the same message to the
same subscriber or group alias or ID.
3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
If successful: • A positive indicator tone sounds.
• A positive indicator tone sounds. • The display shows a positive mini notice.
• The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
If unsuccessful: • A negative indicator tone sounds.
• A negative indicator tone sounds. • The display shows a negative mini notice.
• The display shows a negative mini notice. • The radio returns to the Resend option screen.
7.6.20.1.7 7.6.20.1.8
Deleting Text Messages from the Inbox
Follow the procedure to delete text messages from the
Inbox on your radio.
404
English
• Press the programmed Text Message button. 6

Proceed to step 3. Press or to Delete. Press to select.

2 The display shows a positive mini notice. The screen
Press or to Messages. Press to select. returns to the Inbox.
3
Press or to Inbox. Press to select. 7.6.20.1.9
If the Inbox is empty: Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox
• A tone sounds. Follow the procedure to delete all text messages from the
Inbox on your radio.
to select. • Press the programmed Text Message button.
The display shows a subject line if the message is Proceed to step 3.
5
Press to access the sub-menu. 2
405
English
3
Press or to Inbox. Press to select. • Press to access the menu.
If the Inbox is empty: 2

• The display shows List Empty. Press or to Messages. Press to select.
• A tone sounds.
3
4
select.
5 to select.
5
The display shows a positive mini notice. Press or to Delete. Press to delete the
text message.
7.6.20.1.10
7.6.20.2
Deleting Saved Text Messages from the
Drafts Folder Sent Text Messages
Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in
1 Do one of the following: Sent Items folder. The most recent sent text message is
always added to the top of the Sent Items folder. You can
resend, forward or delete a Sent text message.
Proceed to step 3.
30 last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next
406
English
sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text Viewing Sent Text Messages
message in the folder.
Follow the procedure to view sent text messages on your
If you exit the message sending screen while the message radio.
is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message
in the Sent Items folder without providing any indication in 1 Do one of the following:
the display or via sound.
If the radio changes mode or powers down before the Proceed to step 3.
status of the message in Sent Items folder is updated, the
radio cannot complete any In-Progress messages and
automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. • Press to access the menu.
The radio supports a maximum of five In-Progress 2
messages at one time. During this period, the radio cannot Press or to Messages. Press to select.
send any new message and automatically marks it with a
Send Failed icon. 3
Press or to Sent Items. Press to
If you long press at any time, the radio returns to the select.
Home screen. If the Sent Items folder is empty:
NOTICE:
If the channel type, for example a conventional
digital or Capacity Plus channel, is not a match, you • A low tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is turned
can only edit, forward, or delete a Sent message. on.
7.6.20.2.1
407
English
4 Press or to the required message. Press • A positive indicator tone sounds.

to select.
If unsuccessful:
• The radio proceeds to the Resend option screen.
7.6.20.2.2 See Resending Text Messages on page 138 for
Sending Sent Text Messages more information.
Follow the procedure to send a sent text message on your
radio.
7.6.20.2.3
When you are viewing a Sent message:
Deleting All Sent Text Messages from the
1 Sent Items Folder
Press while viewing the message.
Follow the procedure to delete all sent text messages from
the Sent Items folder on your radio.
2
Press or to Resend. Press to select.
confirming your message is being sent.
Proceed to step 3.

If successful:
408
English
2 Quick Text Messages

3 7.6.20.3.1
Press or to Sent Items. Press to
Sending Quick Text Messages
select.
Follow the procedure to send predefined Quick Text
If the Sent Items folder is empty:
messages on your radio to a predefined alias.
• A tone sounds. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button.
4 confirming the message is being sent.
select.
5 Do one of the following: If successful:
• Press or to Yes. Press to select. • The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
• Press or to No. Press to select. • A negative indicator tone sounds.
The radio returns to the previous screen. • The display shows a negative mini notice.
7.6.20.3
409
English
• The radio proceeds to the Resend option screen. 3

See Resending Text Messages on page 138 for Press or to Quick Text. Press to
more information. select.

7.6.21
to select.
Analog Message Encode
Your radio can send preprogrammed messages from the
Message list to a radio alias or the dispatcher.
Sending MDC Encode Messages to If successful:
Dispatchers • A positive indicator tone sounds.
Follow the procedure to send MDC Encode messages to • The display shows a positive mini notice.
dispatchers on your radio. If unsuccessful:
1
Press to access the menu. • The display shows a negative mini notice.
2
Press or to Message. Press to select.
410
English
7.6.21.2 5
Sending 5-Tone Encode Messages to Press or to the required contact. Press
to select.
Contacts
Follow the procedure to send 5-Tone Encode messages to
contacts on your radio.
1 6 Wait for acknowledgment.

Press to access the menu. If successful:
2 • A positive indicator tone sounds.

Press or to Message. Press to select. • The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
3
Press or to Quick Text. Press to • A negative indicator tone sounds.
select. • The display shows a negative mini notice.

NOTICE:
to select. Check with your dealer or system administrator for
more information.
411
English
7.6.22 When you press the PTT button while in the Status
Analog Status Update list for 5-Tone systems, the radio sends the selected
status update, and returns to the Home screen to
Your radio is able to send preprogrammed messages from initiate a voice call.
the Status list indicating your current activity to a radio
contact (for 5-Tone systems) or the dispatcher (for Motorola 3
Data Communication systems). Press or to Set as Default. Press to
The last acknowledged message is kept at the top of the select.
Status list. The other messages are arranged in The display shows a transitional mini notice,
alphanumeric order. confirming the status update is being sent.

Sending Status Updates to Predefined If successful:
Contacts • A positive indicator tone sounds.
Follow the procedure to send status updates to predefined • The display shows a positive mini notice.
contacts on your radio.
• The display shows beside the acknowledged
1 status.
Press or to Status. Press to select. If unsuccessful:

Press or to the required status. Press • The display shows a negative mini notice.
to select.
• The display shows beside the previous status.
412
English
See Setting Default Contact on page 373 for more 7.6.23

information on setting the default contact for 5-Tone Privacy
systems.
This feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by
7.6.22.2 unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-
based scrambling solution. The signaling and user
Viewing 5-Tone Status Details identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled.
Follow the procedure to view 5-tone status details on your Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channel to
radio. send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a
It is assumed that you have purchased the Software necessary requirement for receiving a transmission. While
License Key. on a privacy-enabled channel, the radio is still able to
receive clear or unscrambled transmissions.
1 Some radio models may not offer Privacy feature, or may
Press or to Status. Press to select. have a different configuration. Check with your dealer or
2
Your radio supports the following types of privacy, but only
Press or to the required status. Press
one can be assigned to your radio. They are:
to select.
• Basic Privacy
3 • Enhanced Privacy
Press or to View Details. Press to
select. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or data transmission,
your radio must be programmed to have the same Privacy
The display shows details of the selected status. Key for Basic Privacy, or the same Key Value and Key ID
for Enhanced Privacy as the transmitting radio.
413
English

Privacy Key, or different Key Value and Key ID, you either • Press to access the menu.
hear a garbled transmission for Basic Privacy or nothing at
all for Enhanced Privacy. 2
On a privacy-enabled channel, your radio is able to receive Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
clear or unscrambled calls, depending on how your radio is
programmed. In addition, your radio may play a warning 3
tone or not, depending on how it is programmed. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
select.
The green LED lights up when the radio is transmitting, and
blinks rapidly when the radio is receiving an ongoing 4 Press or to <required privacy>. Press
privacy-enabled transmission.
NOTICE: to select.
This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band
• If privacy is on, display shows beside Enabled.
• If privacy is off, display shows empty box beside
7.6.23.1 Enabled.
Turning Privacy On or Off
Follow the procedure to turn privacy on or off on your radio.

• Press the programmed Privacy button. Skip the
proceeding steps.
414
English
7.6.24 Press the programmed Response Inhibit button.

Response Inhibit
If successful:
This feature helps prevent your radio from responding to
any incoming transmissions.
• The display shows a momentary positive mini notice.
NOTICE:
Contact your dealer to determine how your radio If unsuccessful:
has been programmed. • A negative indicator tone sounds.
If enabled, your radio does not generate any outgoing • The display shows a momentary negative mini notice.
transmissions in respond to incoming transmissions, such
as Radio Check, Call Alert, Radio Disable, Remote Monitor,
7.6.25
Automatic Registration Service (ARS), Responding to
Private Messages, and Sending GNSS location reports. Security
Your radio cannot receive Confirmed Private Calls when This feature allows you to enable or disable any radio in the
this feature is enabled. However, your radio is able to system.
manually send transmission.
For example, you may want to disable a stolen radio to
prevent unauthorized users from using it, and enable the
7.6.24.1 radio when it is recovered.
Turning Response Inhibit On or Off There are two ways to enable or disable a radio, with
Follow the procedure to enable or disable Response Inhibit authentication and without authentication.
on your radio. Authenticated Radio Disable is a purchasable feature. In
Authenticated Radio Disable, verification is required when
you enable or disable a radio. When your radio initiates this
feature on a target radio with User Authentication, a
415
English
passphrase is required. The passphrase is preprogrammed

in the target radio through CPS. Enter the passphrase. Press to proceed.
• If the passphrase is correct, the display shows
You will not receive an acknowledgment if you press a transitional mini notice, indicating the
during Radio Enable or Radio Disable operation. request is in progress. The green LED lights
up.
NOTICE:
Check with your dealer or system administrator for • If the passphrase is incorrect, the display
more information. shows a negative mini notice, and returns to
7.6.25.1
Disabling Radios
If successful:
Follow the procedure to disable your radio.
1 Press the programmed Radio Disable button. • The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
2 Press or to the required alias or ID.
3 • The display shows a negative mini notice.
occurs:
• The display shows Radio Disable:
<Subscriber Alias or ID>. The green LED
blinks.
416
English
7.6.25.2 • A passphrase screen appears.

Disabling Radios by Using the
Contacts List Enter the passphrase. Press to proceed.
Follow the procedure to disable your radio by using the • If the passphrase is correct, the display shows
Contacts list. a transitional mini notice, indicating the
up.
1
Press to access the menu. • If the passphrase is incorrect, the display
2 the previous screen.
3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press If successful:
to select. • A positive indicator tone sounds.

4 Press or to Radio Disable. If unsuccessful:
Press to select. One of the following scenarios • The display shows a negative mini notice.
occurs:
• The display shows Radio Disable:
blinks.
417
English
7.6.25.3 • The display shows a transitional mini notice,

Disabling Radios by Using the Manual indicating the request is in progress. The green
LED blinks.
Dial
Follow the procedure to disable your radio by using the
manual dial.
1 • If the passphrase is correct, the display shows
Press to access the menu. a transitional mini notice, indicating the
2 up.
Press or to Contacts. Press to select. • If the passphrase is incorrect, the display
3 the previous screen.
select. 7 Wait for acknowledgment.
4 If successful:
Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed. • A positive indicator tone sounds.
5 Press • The display shows a positive mini notice.

or to Radio Disable.
If unsuccessful:
occurs: • The display shows a negative mini notice.
418
English
7.6.25.4 • If the passphrase is incorrect, the display

Enabling Radios shows a negative mini notice, and returns to
Follow the procedure to enable your radio.
1 Press the programmed Radio Enable button.
If successful:
2 Press or to the required alias or ID. • A positive indicator tone sounds.
3
Press to select. One of the following scenarios If unsuccessful:
occurs: • A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows Radio Enable: • The display shows a negative mini notice.
lights up.
• A passphrase screen appears. 7.6.25.5
Enabling Radios by Using the Contacts
Enter the passphrase. Press to proceed. List
• If the passphrase is correct, the display shows Follow the procedure to enable your radio by using the
a transitional mini notice, indicating the Contacts list.
up.
1
419
English
2 • If the passphrase is incorrect, the display

Press or to Contacts. Press to select. shows a negative mini notice, and returns to
to select. If successful:
4 Press or to Radio Enable.
5 If unsuccessful:
occurs: • A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows Radio Enable:
lights up.
7.6.25.6
Enabling Radios by Using the Manual
Enter the passphrase. Press to proceed. Dial
• If the passphrase is correct, the display shows Follow the procedure to enable your radio by using the
a transitional mini notice, indicating the manual dial.
up. 1
420
English
2 • If the passphrase is correct, the display shows

Press or to Contacts. Press to select. a transitional mini notice, indicating the
3 up.
Press or to Manual Dial. Press to • If the passphrase is incorrect, the display
select. shows a negative mini notice, and returns to
4
Press or to Private Call. Press to 8 Wait for acknowledgment.
select.
If successful:
The first text line shows Radio Number:.
5
Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed. If unsuccessful:
6 Press or to Radio Enable.
7
occurs: 7.6.26
• The green LED lights up. Lone Worker
• A passphrase screen appears. This feature prompts an emergency to be raised if there is
no user activity, such as any radio button press or channel
Enter the passphrase. Press to proceed. selection, for a predefined time.
421
English
Following no user activity for a programmed duration, the Password Lock

radio pre-warns you using an audio indicator once the
inactivity timer expires. You can set a password to restrict access to your radio.
Each time you turn on your radio, you are asked to enter
If there is still no acknowledgment by you before the
the password.
predefined reminder timer expires, the radio initiates an
Emergency Alarm. Your radio supports a 4-digit password input.
Only one of the following Emergency Alarms is assigned to Your radio is unable to receive calls in locked state.
this feature:
• Emergency Alarm 7.6.27.1
• Emergency Alarm with Call Accessing the Radio by Using

• Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow
Password
The radio remains in the emergency state, allowing voice Turn on your radio.
messages to proceed until action is taken. See Emergency
Operation on page 390 for more information on ways to exit 1 Enter the four-digit password.
Emergency. a To edit the numeric value of each digit, press
NOTICE: or . To enter and move to the next digit, press
Check with your dealer or system administrator for
more information. .
7.6.27 2
Press to confirm the password.
If you enter the password correctly, the radio powers up.
422
English
If you enter the wrong password after the first and second 7.6.27.2
attempt, your radio shows the following indications: Turning Password Lock On or Off
• A continuous tone sounds. Follow the procedure to turn password lock on or off on
• The display shows Wrong Password. your radio.
Repeat step 1.
1
If you enter the wrong password after the third attempt, Press to access the menu.
your radio shows the following indications:
• A tone sounds. 2
• The yellow LED double blinks.
• The display shows Wrong Password and then, Radio 3
Locked. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
select.
• Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes.
NOTICE: 4
In locked state, your radio responds to inputs from Press or to Passwd Lock. Press to
the On/Off/Volume Control Knob and select.
programmed Backlight button only.
Wait for the 15-minute locked state timer to end and then 5 Enter the current four-digit password.
repeat step 1. • Use a keypad microphone.
NOTICE: • Press or to edit the numeric value of
If you turn off and turn your radio on again, the 15-
minute timer restarts. each digit, and press to enter and move to
the next digit.
423
English
A positive indicator tone sounds for every digit Do one of the following:
pressed. • If the radio is powered on, wait for 15 minutes and then
repeat the steps in Accessing the Radio by Using
6
Password on page 156 to access the radio.
Press to enter the password.
• If the radio is powered off, power up the radio. Your
If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong radio restarts the 15-minute timer for locked state.
Password and automatically returns to the previous A tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. The
menu. display shows Radio Locked.
7 Do one of the following: Wait for 15 minutes and then repeat the steps in
Accessing the Radio by Using Password on page 156 to
access the radio.
• Press or to Turn On. Press to
select.
7.6.27.4
The display shows beside Turn On.
Changing Passwords
• Press or to Turn Off. Press to Follow the procedure to change passwords on your radio.
select.
The display shows beside Turn Off. 1
7.6.27.3 2
Unlocking Radios in Locked State Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
Your radio is unable to receive calls in locked state. Follow
the procedure to unlock your radio in locked state.
424
English
3 8 Re-enter the new four-digit password, and press

select. to proceed.
If successful, the display shows Password Changed.
4
If unsuccessful, the display shows Passwords Do
Press or to Passwd Lock. Press to
Not Match.
select.
5 menu.
Enter the current four-digit password, and press
to proceed.
If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong 7.6.28
Password and automatically returns to the previous Notification List
menu.
Your radio has a Notification list that collects all your
6 unread events on the channel, such as unread text
Press or to Change PWD. Press to messages, telemetry messages, missed calls, and call
select. alerts.
The display shows the Notification icon when the
7 Notification list has one or more events.
Enter a new four-digit password, and press to
The list supports a maximum of 40 unread events. When
proceed.
the list is full, the next event automatically replaces the
oldest event. After the events are read, they are removed
from the Notification list.
425
English
For text messages, missed calls, and call alert events, the 4
maximum number of notifications are 30 text messages Press or to the required event. Press to
and 10 missed calls or call alerts. This maximum number select.
depends on individual feature (job tickets or text messages
or missed calls or call alerts) list capability.
7.6.28.1
Accessing Notification List 7.6.29
Follow the procedure to access the Notification list on your

Auto-Range Transponder System
radio.

The Auto-Range Transponder System (ARTS) is an
• Press the programmed Notification button. Skip
analog-only feature designed to inform you when your radio
the steps below.
is out-of-range of other ARTS-equipped radios.
ARTS-equipped radios transmit or receive signals
periodically to confirm that they are within range of each
other.
2
Press to access the menu. Your radio provides indications of states as follows:
First-Time Alert
3 A tone sounds.
Press or to Notification. Press to
select. The display shows channel alias and In Range.
426
English
ARTS-in-Range Alert When OTAP completes, depending on the configuration:

A tone sounds, if programmed.
• A tone sounds. The display shows Updating
The display shows channel alias and In Range. Restarting. Your radio restarts by powering off and on
ARTS-Out-of-Range Alert again.
A tone sounds. The red LED rapidly blinks. • You can select Restart Now or Postpone. When you
The display shows Out of Range alternating with the select Postpone, your radio returns to the previous
Home screen. screen. The display shows the OTAP Delay Timer icon
until the automatic restart occurs.
NOTICE:
Check with your dealer or system administrator for When your radio powers up after automatic restart:
more information. • If successful, the display shows Sw Update
Completed.
7.6.30 • If the program update is unsuccessful, a tone sounds,
Over-the-Air Programming the red LED blinks once, and the display shows Sw
Update Failed.
Your dealer can remotely update your radio through Over-
the-Air Programming (OTAP) without any physical NOTICE:
connection. Additionally, some settings can also be If the programming update is unsuccessful, the
configured by using OTAP. software update failure indications appear every
time you turn on your radio. Contact your dealer to
When your radio undergoes OTAP, the green LED blinks. reprogram your radio with the latest software to
When your radio receives high volume data: eliminate the software update failure indications.
• The display shows the High Volume Data icon. See Checking Software Update Information on page 191
for the updated software version.
• The channel becomes busy.
• A negative tone sounds if you press the PTT button.
427
English
7.6.31 7.6.31.2
Transmit Inhibit Disabling Transmit Inhibit
Transmit inhibit feature allow users to block all transmission Follow the procedure to disable Transmit Inhibit.
from the radio.
Perform one of the following actions:
NOTICE:
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi features are available in
Transmit Inhibit mode. • Press or to Tx Inhibit and press
to select.
7.6.31.1 • Press the Transmit Inhibit programmable button.
Enabling Transmit Inhibit
• A negative indicator tone sounds. Transmission is back
Follow the procedure to enable Transmit Inhibit. to normal operation.
• The display shows Tx Inhibit Off.
Perform one of the following actions:
7.6.32
• Press or to Tx Inhibit and press
to select. Wi-Fi Operation
• Press the Transmit Inhibit programmable button. This feature allows you to set up and connect to a Wi-Fi
• A positive indicator tone sounds. codeplug, and resources such as language packs and
voice announcement.
• The display shows Tx Inhibit On.
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
The status of the Transmit Inhibit does not change
after the radio powers up.
428
English
Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. 7.6.32.1

Your radio supports WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal and WPA/ Turning Wi-Fi On or Off
WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal Wi-Fi network 1 Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button.
Uses pre-shared key (password) based authentication. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or
Turning Off Wi-Fi.
Pre-shared key can be entered by using the menu or
CPS/RM. 2 Access this feature using the menu.
WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network
Uses certificate-based authentication. a Press to access the menu.
NOTICE: b Press or to WiFi and press to
Check with your dealer or system administrator select.
network. c Press or to WiFi On and press to
The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned by select.
or system administrator to determine how your radio has d Press to turn on/off Wi-Fi.
been programmed.
If Wi-Fi is on, the display shows beside
Voice Announcements for the programmed Wi-Fi On or
Enabled.
Off button can be customized through CPS according to
user requirements. Check with your dealer or system If Wi-Fi is off, the disappears from beside
429
English
7.6.32.2 3
to select.
(One to One). 5
Press to select.
NOTICE:

Proceed to step 3.
(One to Many).
NOTICE:
430
English

2
using the menu.
to select.
1
2
Press to select.
3
7.6.32.4
431
English
NOTICE:
7.6.32.5
select.
by using RM.
access point.

432
English

NOTICE: select.

7.6.32.7
Adding a Network
networks.
433
English


2
7.6.32.8
3 Points
4 1
select.
2
. 3
6 select.
press to select.
434
English
5 7.6.32.9
to select.
NOTICE:
WPA-Personal Wi-Fi
3
select.
435
English
6 7.6.33.1
Press or to Yes and press to select. Entering Front Panel Programming
The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate Mode
that the selected network access point is
successfully removed. 1
7.6.33 2
Front Panel Programming Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
You are able to customize certain feature parameters in 3

Front Panel Programming (FPP) to enhance the use of Press or to Program Radio. Press to
your radio. select.
The following buttons are used as required while navigating
through the feature parameters.
7.6.33.2
Up/Down Navigation Button
Press to navigate through options horizontally or Editing Mode Parameters
vertically, or increase or decrease values. Use the following buttons as required while navigating
Menu/OK Button through the feature parameters.
Press to select the option or enter a sub-menu. • , – Scroll through options, increase/decrease
Return/Home Button values, or navigate vertically.
Short press to return to the previous menu or exit the
selection screen. • – Select the option or enter a sub-menu.
Long press at any time to return to the Home screen.
436
English
Contact your dealer to determine how your radio has been

• – Short-press to return to previous menu or to exit programmed.
the selection screen. Long-press to return to Home
screen. 7.7.1.1
7.7 Enabling the Keypad Lock Option
Utilities The following steps are applicable for either Lock Keypad,
Lock Channel Selector Knob, or Lock Keypad and Channel
This chapter explains the operations of the utility functions Selector Knob option depending on how your radio has
available in your radio. been configured.
Press the programmed Keypad Lock button.

7.7.1
Keypad Lock Options The display shows Locked.
With this feature, you can avoid accidentally pressing

7.7.1.2
buttons or changing channels when your radio is not in use.
You can choose to either lock your keypad, channel Disabling the Keypad Lock Option
selector knob, or both; depending on your requirements. The following steps are applicable for either Lock Keypad,
Your dealer can use CPS/RM to configure one of the Lock Channel Selector Knob, or Lock Keypad and Channel
following options: Selector Knob option depending on how your radio has
been configured.
• Lock Keypad
• Lock Channel Selector Knob Press the programmed Keypad Lock button.
• Lock Keypad and Channel Selector Knob
The display shows Unlocked.
437
English
7.7.2 • Press or to disable Call Forwarding. If

Turning Automatic Call Forwarding disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
On or Off
7.7.3
You can enable your radio to automatically forward voice
calls to another radio. Identifying Cable Type
Do the following steps to select the type of cable your radio
1 uses.
1
2
select. 3
4 select.
Press or to Call Forward. Press to
select. 4
Press or to Cable Type. Press to
5 Do one of the following: select.
• Press or to enable Call Forwarding. If
enabled, appears beside Enabled. 5 Press or to change the selected option.
The current cable type is indicated by a .
438
English
7.7.4
Flexible Receive List • Press or to Turn On. Press to
select.
Flexible Receive List is a feature that allows you to create A positive indicator tone sounds.
and assign members on the receive talkgroup list. Your
radio can support a maximum of 16 members in the list.
This feature is supported in Capacity Plus.
• Press or to Turn Off. Press to
7.7.4.1 select.
A negative indicator tone sounds.
Turning Flexible Receive List On or Off
The display shows a negative mini notice.
Follow the procedure to turn Flexible Receive List on or off.

• Press the programmed Flexible Receive List Adding New Entries to the Flexible
button. Skip the following steps. Receive List
Follow the procedure to add new members to the receive
• Press to access the menu. talkgroup list.
2 1
Press or to Flexible Rx List. Press Press to access the menu.
to select.
2
3 Do one of the following: Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
439
English
3 • Press or to Yes to add another entry.

select. Press to select. Repeat step 7.
• Press or to No to save the current list.
4
Press or to Flexible Rx List. Press Press to select.
to select.
5 7.7.4.3
Press or to View/Edit List. Press to Deleting Entries from the Flexible
select.
Receive List
6 Follow the procedure to delete members of the receive
Press or to Add Member. Press to talkgroup list from your radio.
select.
1
7 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press Press to access the menu.
to select. 2
The display shows a positive mini notice and then, Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
Add Another?.
3
8 Do one of the following: select.
440
English
4 10
Press or to Flexible Rx List. Press Long press to return to the Home screen after
to select. deleting all required aliases or IDs.
5
7.7.5
Press or to View/Edit List. Press to
select. Setting Menu Timer
You can set the time your radio stays in the menu before it
6 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press automatically switches to the Home screen. Follow the
procedure to set the menu timer.
to select.
1
7
2
• Press or to Yes to delete the entry. Press
3
to select. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
The display shows a positive mini notice. select.
4
• Press or to No. Press to select.
Press or to Display. Press to select.
9 Repeat step 6 to step 8 to delete other entries.
441
English
5 This audio indicator can be customized per customer

Press or to Menu Timer. Press to requirements. This feature is typically useful when the user
select. is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the
display.
6
Press or to the required setting. Press 7.7.6.1
to select. Setting Text-to-Speech
Follow the procedure to set the Text-to-Speech feature.
7.7.6
Text-to-Speech 1
The Text-to-Speech feature can only be enabled by your
dealer. If Text-to-Speech is enabled, the Voice 2
Announcement feature is automatically disabled. If Voice Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
Announcement is enabled, then the Text-to-Speech feature
is automatically disabled. 3
This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
following features: select.
• Current Channel
4 Press or to Voice Announcement. Press
• Current Zone
• Programmed button feature on or off to select.
• Content of received Job Tickets
442
English
5 Press or to any of the following features. • Press the programmed AF Suppressor button.
Skip the following steps.
Press to select.
The available features are as follows: • Press to access the menu.
• All 2
• Messages Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
• Job Tickets 3
• Channel Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
select.
• Zone
• Program Button 4
Press or to AF Suppressor. Press to
select.

7.7.7
Turning Acoustic Feedback • Press to enable Acoustic Feedback
Suppressor On or Off Suppressor.
The feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback in

received calls. Follow the procedure to turn Acoustic
Feedback Suppressor on or off on your radio.

443
English
2 Do one of the following steps to toggle GNSS on or

• Press to disable Acoustic Feedback off on your radio.
Suppressor.
• Press the programmed GNSS button.
If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled,
disappears beside Enabled. • Press to access the menu. Proceed to the
next step.
7.7.8 3
Turning Global Navigation Satellite Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
System On or Off 4
Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a satellite Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
navigation system that determines the radio precise select.
location. GNSS includes Global Positioning System (GPS),
Global Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS), and 5
BeiDou Navigation Satellite System (BDS). Press or to GNSS. Press to select.
NOTICE:
6
Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS,
Press to enable or disable GNSS.
CPS. Check with your dealer or system If enabled, appears beside Enabled.
administrator to determine how your radio has been If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
programmed.
444
English
7.7.9 6
Turning Introduction Screen On or Press to enable or disable the Introduction
Screen.
Off
You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen by
following the procedure. • If enabled, appears beside Enabled.
1
2 7.7.10
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or
3
Off
Press or to Radio Settings. Press to You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts, if
select. needed, except for incoming Emergency alert tone . Follow
the procedure to turn tones and alerts on or off on your
4 radio.
Press or to Display. Press to select.
5
• Press the programmed Tones/Alerts button. Skip
Press or to Intro Screen. Press to
select.
445
English
2 Setting Tones/Alerts Volume Offset

Levels
3 This feature adjusts the volume of the tones or alerts,
Press or to Radio Settings. Press to allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice volume.
select. Follow the procedure to set the tones and alerts volume
offset levels on your radio.
4
Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press to 1
5 2
Press or to All Tones. Press to select. Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
6 3
Press to enable or disable all tones and alerts. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
The display shows one of the following results: select.
4
• If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press to
select.
7.7.11
5
Press or to Vol. Offset. Press to
select.
446
English
6 Press or to the required volume offset level. 3

A feedback tone sounds with each corresponding
select.
volume offset level.
4
7 Do one of the following: Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press to
select.
• Press to select. The required volume offset
level is saved. 5
Press or to Talk Permit. Press to
select.
• Press to exit. The changes are discarded.
6
7.7.12 Press to enable or disable the Talk Permit
Tone.
Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Off
Follow the procedure to turn Talk Permit Tone on or off on
your radio. • If enabled, appears beside Enabled.
1
2
447
English
7.7.13 • If enabled, appears beside Enabled.

Turning Power Up Tone On or Off • If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
Follow the procedure to turn Power Up Tone on or off on
your radio. 7.7.14
1 Setting Text Message Alert Tones

Press to access the menu. You can customize the text message alert tone for each
entry in the Contacts list. Follow the procedure to set the
2 text message alert tones on your radio.
1
select. 2
4
Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press to 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press
select.
to select.
5
Press or to Power Up. Press to select. 4
Press or to Message Alert. Press to
6 select.
Press to enable or disable the Power Up Tone.
The display shows one of the following results: 5 Do one of the following:
448
English
7.7.15.1
• Press or to Momentary. Press to Setting Power Levels
select.
The display shows beside Momentary. Follow the procedure to set the power levels on your radio.

• Press or to Repetitive. Press to
select. • Press the programmed Power Level button. Skip
The display shows beside Repetitive. the steps below.

7.7.15
Power Levels 2
You can customize the power setting to high or low for
each channel.
3
High Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
This enables communication with radios located at a select.
considerable distance from you.
Low 4
This enables communication with radios in closer Press or to Power. Press to select.
proximity.
NOTICE:
channels that are in the same frequency. • Press or to High. Press to select.
The display shows beside High.
449
English
4
• Press or to Low. Press to select. Press or to Brightness. Press to
The display shows beside Low. select.
The display shows the progress bar.
6
5 Press or to decrease or increase the display
7.7.16
brightness. Press to select.
Adjusting Display Brightness
Follow the procedure to adjust the display brightness on 7.7.17
your radio.
Setting Display Backlight Timer
1 Do one of the following: You can set the display backlight timer of the radio as
needed. The setting also affects the Menu Navigation
• Press the programmed Brightness button. Skip
Buttons and keypad backlighting accordingly. Follow the
procedure to set the backlight timer on your radio.
• Press to access the menu. 1 Do one of the following:
2 • Press the programmed Backlight button. Skip

Press or to Utilities. Press to select. the following steps.
3 • Press to access the menu.

select.
450
English
2 1
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press to access the menu.
3 2
Press or to Radio Settings. Press to Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
select.
3
Press or to Display. Press to select. select.
5 4 Press or to Backlight Auto.

Press or to Backlight Timer. Press
to select. 5
Press to enable or disable Backlight Auto.
The display backlight and keypad backlighting are The display shows one of the following results:
automatically turned off as the LED indicator is disabled.
See Turning LED Indicators On or Off on page 181 for • If enabled, appears beside Enabled.
more information. • If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
7.7.18
Turning Backlight Auto On or Off
You can enable and disable the backlight of the radio to
turn on automatically as needed. If enabled, the backlight is
turned on when the radio receives a call, Notification List
event, or Emergency Alarm.
451
English
7.7.19
Squelch Levels • Press to access the menu.
You can adjust the squelch level to filter out unwanted calls 2
with low signal strength or channels with noise higher than Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
normal background.
Normal 3
This is the default setting. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
select.
Tight
This setting filters out unwanted calls and/or 4
background noise. Calls from remote locations may also Press or to Squelch. Press to select.
be filtered out.
NOTICE: 5 Do one of the following:
channels that are in the same frequency. • Press or to Normal. Press to select.
The display shows beside Normal.
7.7.19.1
Setting Squelch Levels • Press or to Tight. Press to select.
Follow the procedure to set the squelch levels on your The display shows beside Tight.
radio. The screen automatically returns to the previous
menu.
• Press the programmed Squelch button. Skip the
following steps.
452
English
7.7.20 • If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.

Turning LED Indicators On or Off
Follow the procedure to turn the LED indicators on or off on
your radio. 7.7.21
Setting Languages
1
Follow the procedure to set the languages on your radio.
1
2
2
3
select.
3
4
select.
Press or to LED Indicator. Press to
select.
4
Press or to Languages. Press to select.
5
Press to enable or disable the LED indicator.
5 Press or to the required language. Press
• If enabled, appears beside Enabled. to select.
The display shows beside the selected language.
453
English
7.7.22 NOTICE:
Voice Operating Transmission Turning this feature on or off is limited to radios with
this function enabled. Check with your dealer or
The Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) allows you to system administrator for more information.
initiate a hands-free voice-activated call on a programmed
channel. The radio automatically transmits, for a 7.7.22.1
programmed period, whenever the microphone on the
VOX-capable accessory detects voice. Turning Voice Operating Transmission
NOTICE: On or Off
This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band Follow the procedure to turn VOX on or off on your radio.
You can enable or disable VOX by doing one of the 1 Do one of the following:
following: • Press the programmed VOX button. Skip the
• Turn the radio off and then power it on again to enable steps below.
VOX.
• Change the channel by using the Channel Selector • Press to access the menu.
knob to enable VOX.
2
• Turn VOX on or off by using the programmed VOX Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
button or menu to enable or disable VOX.
• Press the PTT button during radio operation to disable 3
VOX. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
select.
454
English
4 Press the programmed Option Board button.

Press or to VOX. Press to select.
7.7.24
Turning Voice Announcement On or
• Press or to On. Press to select. The Off
This feature enables the radio to audibly indicates the
current zone or channel the user has just assigned, or the
• Press or to Off. Press to select. programmable button the user has just pressed.
The display shows beside Off. This is typically useful when the user has difficulty reading
the content shown on the display.
NOTICE:
If the Talk Permit Tone is enabled, use a trigger This audio indicator can be customized according to
word to initiate the call. Wait for the Talk Permit customer requirements. Follow the procedure to turn Voice
Tone to finish before speaking clearly into the Announcement on or off on your radio.
microphone. See Turning Talk Permit Tone On or
Off on page 177 for more information.
7.7.23 • Press the programmed Voice Announcement

button. Skip the following steps.
Turning Option Board On or Off
Option board capabilities within each channel can be • Press to access the menu.
assigned to programmable buttons. Follow the procedure
to turn option board on or off on your radio. 2
455
English
3 audio. Follow the procedure to turn Digital Microphone

Press or to Radio Settings. Press to AGC on or off on your radio.
select.
1
4 Press or to Voice Announcement. Press Press to access the menu.
to select. 2
5
Press to enable or disable Voice 3
Announcement. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
select.
• If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 4
Press or to Mic AGC-D. Press to
select.
7.7.25 5
Turning Digital Microphone AGC On Press to enable or disable Digital Microphone
AGC.
or Off
The Digital Microphone Automatic Gain Control (AGC)
controls the microphone gain of the radio automatically • If enabled, appears beside Enabled.
while transmitting on a digital system. • If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
456
English
7.7.26 5
Turning Analog Microphone AGC On Press to enable or disable Analog Microphone
AGC.
or Off
The Analog Microphone Automatic Gain Control (AGC)
controls the microphone gain of the radio automatically • If enabled, appears beside Enabled.
while transmitting on an analog system. • If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
audio. Follow the procedure to turn Analog Microphone
AGC on or off on your radio. 7.7.27
Switching Audio Route between
1
Internal Radio Speaker and Wired
Accessory
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Follow the procedure to toggle audio routing between
internal radio speaker and wired accessory.
3 You can toggle audio routing between the internal radio
Press or to Radio Settings. Press to speaker and the speaker of a wired accessory with the
select. condition that:
• The wired accessory with speaker is attached.
4
Press or to Mic AGC-A. Press to • The audio is not routed to an external Bluetooth
select. accessory.
457
English
Press the programmed Audio Toggle button.

A tone sounds when the audio route has switched.
2
Powering down the radio or detaching the accessory resets
the audio routing to the internal radio speaker.
3
7.7.28 Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
Turning Intelligent Audio On or Off select.
Your radio automatically adjusts the audio volume to 4 Press or to Intelligent Audio. Press
overcome current background noise in the environment,
inclusive of both stationary and non-stationary noise
to select.
sources. This is a receive-only feature and does not affect
transmission audio. Follow the procedure to turn Intelligent
Audio on or off on your radio.

NOTICE: display shows beside On.
This feature is not applicable during a Bluetooth
session.
1 Do one of the following: The display shows beside Off.
• Press the programmed Intelligent Audio button.
Skip the steps below.
458
English
7.7.29
Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off • Press or to On. Press to select. The
You can enable this feature when you are speaking in a
language that contains many words with alveolar trill
(rolling "R") pronunciations. Follow the procedure to turn • Press or to Off. Press to select.
Trill Enhancement on or off on your radio. The display shows beside Off.

• Press the programmed Trill Enhancement Turning the Microphone Dynamic
button. Skip the steps below.
Distortion Control Feature On or Off
• Press to access the menu. This feature allows you to enable the radio to automatically
monitor the microphone input and adjust the microphone
2 gain value to avoid audio clipping.
1
select. 2
4
Press or to Trill Enhance. Press to 3
select. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
select.
459
English
4 2
Press or to Mic Distortion. Press to Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
select.
3
5 Do one of the following: Press or to Radio Settings. Press to
select.
• Press to enable Microphone Dynamic
4
Distortion Control. If enabled, appears beside
Press or to Audio Ambience. Press to
Enabled.
select.
• Press to disable Microphone Dynamic 5

Distortion Control. If disabled, disappears Press or to the required setting. Press
beside Enabled. to select.
7.7.31 • Choose Default for the default factory settings.
Setting Audio Ambience • Choose Loud to increase speaker loudness when
Follow the procedure to set the audio ambience on your using in noisy surroundings.
radio according to your environment. • Choose Work Group to reduce acoustic feedback
when using with a group of radios that are near to
1 each other.
The display shows beside the selected setting.
460
English
7.7.32 • Choose Level 1, Level 2, or Level 3 for audio

Setting Audio Profiles profiles intended to compensate for noise-
induced hearing loss that is typical for adults over
Follow the procedure to set audio profiles on your radio. 40 years of age.
• Choose Treble Boost, Mid Boost, or Bass
1
Boost for audio profiles that align with your
preference for tinnier, more nasal, or deeper
sounds.
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. The display shows beside the selected setting.
3
Press or to Radio Settings. Press to 7.7.33
select. General Radio Information
4 Your radio contains information on various general
Press or to Audio Profiles. Press to parameters.
select. The general information of your radio is as follows:
5 • Battery information.
Press or to the required setting. Press • Radio alias and ID.
to select.
• Firmware and Codeplug versions.
• Software update.
• Choose Default to disable the previously
• GNSS information.
selected audio profile and return to the default
factory settings. • Site information.
461
English
• Received Signal Strength Indicator. 4

NOTICE: Press or to Battery Info. Press to
select.
Press to return to the previous screen. Long NOTICE:
For IMPRES batteries only: The display
press to return to the Home screen. The radio reads Recondition Battery when the
exits the current screen once the inactivity timer battery requires reconditioning in an IMPRES
expires. charger. After the reconditioning process, the
display then shows the battery information.
7.7.33.1
Accessing Battery Information NOTICE:
Displays information of your radio battery. For non-supported battery, the display shows
Unknown Battery.
1
7.7.33.2
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Checking Radio Alias and ID

Press or to Radio Info. Press to • Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID
select. button. Skip the following steps.
A positive indicator tone sounds.
462
English
You can press the programmed Radio Alias and 2

ID button to return to the previous screen. Press or to Utilities. Press to select.

2 select.
4
3 Press or to Versions. Press to select.
Press or to Radio Info. Press to The display shows the current firmware and
select. codeplug versions.
4
Press or to My ID. Press to select. 7.7.33.4
The first text line shows the radio alias. The second Checking GNSS Information
text line shows the radio ID.
values of:
7.7.33.3 • Latitude
Checking Firmware and Codeplug • Longitude
Versions • Altitude
• Direction
1
Press to access the menu. • Velocity
463
English
• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) Checking Software Update Information

• Satellites This feature shows the date and time of the latest software
• Version update carried out through OTAP or Wi-Fi. Follow the
procedure to check the software update information on
1 your radio.
1
2
select. 3
4 select.
Press or to GNSS Info. Press to select.
4
5 Press or to SW Update. Press to select.
Press or to the required item. Press to The display shows the date and time of the latest
select. The display shows the requested GNSS software update.
information.
Software Update menu is only available after at least one
7.7.33.5 successful OTAP or Wi-Fi session. See Over-the-Air
Programming on page 427 for more information.
464
English
7.7.33.6 The display shows the RSSI icon at the top right corner.
Displaying Site Information See Display Icons for more information on the RSSI icon.
Follow the procedure to display the current site name your

7.7.33.7.1
radio is on.
Viewing RSSI Values
1
Press to access the menu. At the home screen, press three times and
2 immediately press , all in 5 seconds.

The display shows the current RSSI values.
3
Press or to Radio Info. Press to To return to the home screen, press and hold .
select.
7.7.34
4
Press or to Site Info. Press to select. Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate
The display shows the current site name.
Details
You can view the details of the selected Enterprise Wi-Fi
7.7.33.7 Certificate.
Received Signal Strength Indicator
1
This feature allows you to view the Received Signal Press to access the menu.
Strength Indicator (RSSI) values.
465
English
2
3
Press or to Certificate Menu. Press
to select.
appears beside ready certificates.
to select.

NOTICE:
Status.
466
English
Authorized Accessories List Part Number Description

PMAD4147_ VHF, 136–174 MHz, Whip Antenna
Motorola Solutions provides the following approved 20 cm
accessories to improve the productivity of your digital
PMAD4133_ 12 VHF, 360–400 MHz, Stubby Anten-
portable two-way radio.
na
Table 15: Antenna PMAD4136_12 VHF, 350–380 MHz, Stubby Anten-

na
Part Number Description
PMAD4139_12 VHF, 350–400 MHz, Whip Antenna
PMAD4116_ VHF, 144–165 MHz, Helical Anten- PMAE4069_ UHF, 403–450 MHz, Stubby Anten-
na na
na na
na na
PMAD4119_ VHF, 136–148 MHz, Stubby Anten- PMAE4079_ UHF, 403–527 MHz, Slim Whip An-
na tenna
PMAD4120_ VHF, 146–160 MHz, Stubby Anten- PMAF4009_ 800/900, 806–870 MHz, Short Whip
na Antenna
PMAD4121_ VHF, 160–174 MHz, Stubby Anten-
na
12 Applicable to Full Keypad and Non-Keypad only.

467
English
Part Number Description

PMAF4010_ 800/900, 896–941 MHz, Short Whip
Antenna
PMAF4011_13 800/900, 806–870 MHz, Whip An-
tenna
PMAF4012_13 800/900, 896–941 MHz, Whip An-
tenna
13 Applicable to Full Keypad and Non-Keypad only.

468
English
Citizens Band License Citizens Band Repeater Operation

A repeater is a station established at a fixed location that
The use of the Citizens Band radio service is licensed in
receives radio signals from one Citizens Band station and
Australia by the Australian Communications and Media
automatically retransmits the signal to another station using
Authority (ACMA) Radiocommunications (Citizens Band
the corresponding output channel. UHF Citizens Band
Radio Stations) Class Licence and in New Zealand by the
repeaters can be found in all states and enable the range
Ministry of Economic Development New Zealand (MED)
of vehicle to vehicle communications to be significantly
General User Radio Licence (GURL) for Citizens Band
increased. Avoid operating on locally used repeater input
Radio, and operation is subject to the conditions contained
channels (which are in the range of channels 31 to 38, and
in those licences.
channels 71 to 78 when they are authorized) or locally
In Australia, a Citizens Band transmitter shall not be used repeater receiving channels (which will be in the
operated on UHF emergency channels 5 and 35 and no range channels 1 to 8, and channels 41 to 48 when they
voice transmissions are permitted on data (telemetry/ are authorized), unless long-distance communication via
telecommand) channels 22 and 23, except in an the repeater facility is specifically required.
emergency. The radio that complies to this Standard will
NOTICE:
inhibit voice operation on channels 22 and 23. In the event
In Australia, channel 11 is the customary calling
that additional telemetry/telecommand channels are
channel for establishing communication and
approved by the ACMA, these channels shall be added to
channel 40 is the customary road vehicle channel.
those currently listed where voice transmission is inhibited.
Always listen on a channel (or observe a channel-busy
indicator) to ensure it is not already being used before 25 kHz Land Mobile Band to 12.5 kHz
transmitting. Narrow Band Transition
The existing use of 25 kHz analogue land mobile channels
is to cease by 1 November 2015. This period is in
accordance with the minimum period (five years) specified
469
English
in the Radio Regulations for giving notice of revocation of a For the list of currently authorized channels, please refer to
licence of an undefined duration. the following websites:
Land mobile frequency bands with an offset channel plan • http://www.acma.gov.au/Citizen/Consumer-info/All-
(E, EN, and ENX bands) require a different treatment to about-spectrum/Marine-and-Amateur-Radio/citizen-
manage the introduction of digital land mobile radio (due to band-radio-service-cbrs-fact-sheet (Australia)
potential adjacent channel interference risks). The following • http://www.rsm.govt.nz/cms/licensees/types-of-licence/
items apply to these bands: general-user-licences/citizen-band-radio (New Zealand)
• Users of E band (25 kHz channels) wanting to transition
to digital prior 1 November 2015, can migrate to the EE
band (also in the VHF range) or any other band open for
digital land mobile radio licensing.
• E band users wanting to continue operating analogue
services after the five year transition period can migrate
to 12.5 kHz analogue channels in the EN band (also in
the VHF range) or any other band open for narrow band
analogue land mobile radio.
• Introduction of digital land mobile radio in the EN and
ENX bands prior to 1 November 2015 will be considered
on a case by case basis. Licensing of digital land mobile
radio in these bands will be possible in areas where E
band users have vacated the band, or when rigorous
engineering analysis guarantees no risk of interference
to other band users.
470
English
Limited Warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms

of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted
for the balance of the original applicable warranty period.
MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of
Motorola Solutions.
COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS
This express limited warranty is extended by Motorola
Solutions to the original end user purchaser only and is not
I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the
complete warranty for the Product manufactured by
AND FOR HOW LONG: Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions assumes no
Motorola Solutions, Inc. ("Motorola Solutions") warrants the obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this
Motorola Solutions manufactured Communication Products warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of
listed below ("Product") against defects in material and Motorola Solutions.
workmanship under normal use and service for a period of Unless made in a separate agreement between Motorola
time from the date of purchase as scheduled below: Solutions and the original end user purchaser, Motorola
Solutions does not warrant the installation, maintenance or
Portable Radios Two (2) Years service of the Product.
Product Accessories (In- One (1) Year Motorola Solutions cannot be responsible in any way for
cluding Batteries and any ancillary equipment not furnished by Motorola
Chargers) Solutions which is attached to or used in connection with
the Product, or for operation of the Product with any
Motorola Solutions, at its option, will at no charge either ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly
repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), excluded from this warranty. Because each system which
replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund may use the Product is unique, Motorola Solutions
the purchase price of the Product during the warranty
471
English
disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:
system as a whole under this warranty.
SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
II. GENERAL PROVISIONS DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED
This warranty sets forth the full extent of Motorola Solutions WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR
responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY.
or refund of the purchase price, at Motorola Solutions This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be
option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS other rights which may vary from state to state.
GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS
WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR SERVICE
PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS
LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of
SOLUTIONS BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF purchase and Product item serial number) in order to
THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the
LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an
COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will
OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL be provided by Motorola Solutions through one of its
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact
TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH the company which sold you the Product (for example,
MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate
your obtaining warranty service. You can also call Motorola
Solutions at 1-800-927-2744.
472
English
V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES • any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are
broken or show evidence of tampering.
NOT COVER • the damage or defect is caused by charging or using
1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in the battery in equipment or service other than the
other than its normal and customary manner. Product for which it is specified.
2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or 8 Freight costs to the repair depot.
neglect. 9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized
3 Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does
maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or not function in accordance with Motorola Solutions
adjustment. published specifications or the FCC certification labeling
in effect for the Product at the time the Product was
4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly
initially distributed from Motorola Solutions.
by defects in material workmanship.
10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product
5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product
surfaces that does not affect the operation of the
modifications, disassembles or repairs (including,
Product.
without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-
Motorola Solutions supplied equipment) which adversely 11 Normal and customary wear and tear.
affect performance of the Product or interfere with
Motorola Solutions normal warranty inspection and
testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE
6 Product which has had the serial number removed or PROVISIONS
made illegible. Motorola Solutions will defend, at its own expense, any suit
7 Rechargeable batteries if: brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it
is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a
United States patent, and Motorola Solutions will pay those
473
English
costs and damages finally awarded against the end user Motorola Solutions, nor will Motorola Solutions have any
purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not
such claim, but such defense and payments are furnished by Motorola Solutions which is attached to or
conditioned on the following: used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states
the entire liability of Motorola Solutions with respect to
1 Motorola Solutions will be notified promptly in writing by
infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof.
such purchaser of any notice of such claim,
Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for
2 Motorola Solutions will have sole control of the defense
Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted
of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or
Motorola Solutions software such as the exclusive rights to
compromise, and
reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such Motorola
3 Should the Product or parts become, or in Motorola Solutions software. Motorola Solutions software may be
Solutions opinion be likely to become, the subject of a used in only the Product in which the software was
claim of infringement of a United States patent, that originally embodied and such software in such Product may
such purchaser will permit Motorola Solutions, at its not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or
option and expense, either to procure for such used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use
purchaser the right to continue using the Product or including, without limitation, alteration, modification,
parts or to replace or modify the same so that it reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such
becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a Motorola Solutions software or exercise of rights in such
credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept Motorola Solutions software is permitted. No license is
its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under
year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as Motorola Solutions patent rights or copyrights.
established by Motorola Solutions.
Motorola Solutions will have no liability with respect to any VII. GOVERNING LAW
claim of patent infringement which is based upon the
combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of
with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by Illinois, U.S.A.
474
English
VIII. For Australia Only

This warranty is given by Motorola Solutions Australia Pty
Limited (ABN 16 004 742 312) of Tally Ho Business Park,
10 Wesley Court. Burwood East, Victoria.
Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be excluded
under the Australia Consumer Law. You are entitled to a
replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation
for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You
are also entitled to have the goods repaired or replaced if
the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure
does not amount to a major failure.
Motorola Solutions Australia's limited warranty above is in
addition to any rights and remedies you may have under
the Australian Consumer Law. If you have any queries,
please call Motorola Solutions Australia at 1800 457 439.
You may also visit our website: http://
www.motorolasolutions.com/XA-EN/Pages/Contact_Us for
the most updated warranty terms.
475
www.motorolasolutions.com/mototrbo
MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are
the property of their respective owners. © 2012 and 2020 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved.

68012007023-FP Enus MOTOTRBO DP4600 DP4600e DP4601 DP4601e LIMITED KEYPAD PORTABLE RADIO USER GUIDE

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

68012007023-FP Enus MOTOTRBO DP4600 DP4600e DP4601 DP4601e LIMITED KEYPAD PORTABLE RADIO USER GUIDE

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO

Contents 2.7 Removing the Universal Connector Cover

5.2.2 Assignable Settings or Utility 5.6.1.2 Making Group Calls by

5.6.5.1 Making Phone Calls......... 78 5.7.4 Receive Group List........................ 89

5.7.8.7 Deleting Device Name..... 98 5.7.12.1 Initiating Remote

5.7.14.3 Activating or 5.7.16.2 Making Call Alerts by

5.7.19.5 Responding to 5.7.20.1.8 Deleting All

5.7.21.1.3 Sending a 5.7.23.3 Stunning a Radio by

5.7.29.1 Viewing RSSI Values... 161 5.7.31.8 Viewing Details of

5.8.9 Setting Tones/Alerts Volume 5.8.22 Switching Audio Route between

5.8.28.6 Displaying Site 6.1.4 Switching Between Connect Plus

6.2.5.6 Inbound Phone Multi- 6.3.2.1 Indications of Auto

6.3.12 Contacts Settings.......................227 6.3.14.2 Deleting a Call from a

6.3.17.4 Responding to an 6.3.20 Text Messaging ........................ 252

6.3.20.6 Reading a Text 6.3.23.3 Unlocking the Radio

6.3.25.1 Turning Indoor Location 6.3.27.8 Viewing Details of

6.4.12 Voice Announcement.................293 6.4.20.5 Displaying the Site ID

7.5.5.4 Responding to Phone 7.5.9 Open Voice Channel Mode

7.6.2 Indoor Location............................ 354 7.6.6.2 Setting New Home

7.6.10.1 Turning Scan On or Off 7.6.13.1 Activating or

7.6.14.2 Viewing Call List 7.6.18.1 Sending Emergency

7.6.20 Text Messaging ........................ 399 7.6.20.1.10 Deleting

7.6.22.1 Sending Status 7.6.26 Lone Worker.............................. 421

7.6.32.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off429 7.6.33.2 Editing Mode

7.7.8 Turning Global Navigation 7.7.20 Turning LED Indicators On or

7.7.31 Setting Audio Ambience............ 460 Citizens Band Repeater Operation..................469

Important Safety Information

European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and

The European Union's WEEE directive requires that

• When cleaning your radio, do not use a high pressure

Introduction Icon Information

1 : Channel Selector Knob

1.4 Check with your dealer or system administrator for more

Capacity Plus is an entry-level trunked system for single 1.4.2

the current site. It then locks on to the repeater with the

Getting Started warranty extension over the standard Motorola

Getting Started provides instructions to prepare your radio

administrator to determine how your radio has been

1 Align the battery with the rails on the back of the

2 Press the battery firmly, and slide upwards until the

Set the antenna in the receptacle and turn clockwise.

4 To remove the battery, turn the radio off. Move the

2 Press downwards until you hear a click.

• To increase the volume, turn the On/Off/Volume

Radio Controls 5 Push-to-Talk (PTT) Button

1 These buttons are programmable.

You can use the 4–way navigation button, , as a

Editor Catego- Direction

Wide Area Voice Environment (WAVE™) provides a new

WAVE allows you to communicate across different WAVE OnCloud/OnPremise

Table 2: WAVE Display Icons

The display shows a momentary notice of Switching to 4.1.2

Capacity Max is MOTOTRBO control channel based 5.2

Audio Profiles Call Alert

One Touch Access Site Lock

Functions 2 Press or to the menu function, and press

Tones/Alerts 3 Do one of the following:

1 Do one of the following:

5.3.1 Bluetooth Not Connected

Indoor Location Available 2 Over-the-Air Programming Delay Tim-

Ring Only Vibrate

Shared Frequency Vibrate and Ring

Silent Ring Wi-Fi Good3